Samsung Officeserv 7070 Price Download

Copy and paste this link to your website, so they can see this document directly without any plugins.


Keywords

button, Press, Soft, Right, This, MMC:, press, Volume, enter, will, Transfer, SAMSUNG, Electronics, Co.,, Ltd., NONE, station, select, system, number, move, DISPLAY, Enter, ASSIGN, advance, cursor., next, Dial, call, this

Transcript

GANA-000023
Ed. 01
OfficeServ 500
Programming Guide
01. 2005
COPYRIGHT
This guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright.
No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial
purposes or disclosed to third parties in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics
Co., Ltd.
TRADEMARKS
is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
This guide should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product.
This guide may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior
notice.
If you need updated guides or have any questions concerning the contents of the guides, contact our Document Center
at the following address or Web site:
Address: Document Center 2nd Floor IT Center. Dong-Suwon P.O. Box 105, 416, Maetan-3dong Yeongtong-gu,
Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600
Homepage: http://www.samsungdocs.com
©2005 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. I
INTRODUCTION
Purpose
This guide describes a programming method for the OfficeServ 500 system users.
OfficeServ 500 allows you to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system setup.
Likewise, using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC(Man Machine
Communication) program. This guide describes how to program a digital phone.
Document Content and Organization
This guide is composed of two Chapters and one Annex. Each chapter is introduced as
follows:
CHAPTER 1. Overview Of MMC Programming
This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about the
buttons of digital phone and cautions.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.
ANNEX A. Abbreviation
Acronyms frequently used in this document are described.
Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
II © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Conventions
The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read
and thoroughly understood. Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular
box, separating it from the main text, but is always preceded by an icon and/or a bold title.
WARNING
Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid
personal injury or fatality.
CAUTION
Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid
a service failure or damage to the system.
CHECKPOINT
Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation.
NOTE
Indicates additional information as a reference.
OPERATION PROCEDURES
Indicates the operational procedures that should be executed in sequence.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. III
Reference
OfficeServ 500 Installation Guide
Introduces the installation related information for OfficeServ 500 system.
OfficeServ 500 Service Manual
Introduces circuit configuration of each section in OfficeServ 500 system, main functions,
parts list, troubleshooting, and disassembly diagram of main device.
DS-5012L Digital Phone User’s Manual
This is a user’s manual for the Large LCD Digital Phone(DS-5012L) that can be used by
connecting to the OfficeServ 500 system.
ITP-5012L IP Phone User’s Manual
This is a user’s manual for the Large LCD IP Phone that can be used by connecting to the
OfficeServ 500 system.
DS-5038D/5021D/5014D Digital Phone User Guide
This is a user’s manual for the 2 Line LCD Digital Phone(DS-5038D, DS-5012D, DS5014D) that can be used by connecting to the OfficeServ 500 system.
ITP-5021D/5014D IP Phone User Guide
This is a user’s manual for the 2 Line LCD IP Phone(ITP-5021D, ITP-5014D) that can be
used by connecting to the OfficeServ 500 system.
OfficeServ 500 Wireless LAN Service Manual
Introduces information needed to install the wireless device of the OfficeServ 500 system
or for its maintenance.
WIP-5000M Phone User Guide
This is a user’s manual for WIP-5000M that is designed to use wireless LAN provided
from the OfficeServ 500 system.
Revision History
EDITION DATE OF ISSUE REMARKS
00 06. 2004. First Edition
01 01. 2005. - MMC 324 added (SLI2 card interface)
- New options added to MMC 110, 210, 861
- Changed MMC descriptions relating to addition of
WLAN functions and modification of options
Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
IV © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
This page is intentionally left blank.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. V
SAFETY CONCERNS
For product safety and correct operation, the following information must be given to the
operator/user and shall be read before the installation and operation.
Symbols
Caution
Indication of a general caution
Restriction
Indication for prohibiting an action for a product
Instruction
Indication for commanding a specifically required action
Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
VI © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Caution
When using the auto record feature
Before using the auto record feature make sure that you are not violating any
state or federal laws. Some states require that the recorded party be notified.
SAMSUNG is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.
Call Cost
Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate
call cost. This Meter Pulse Detection(MPD) facility requires the MPD version of
the trunk card.
When changing the MMC [807], [809], [812] and [816]
MMC [807], [809], [812] and [816] should not be changed from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.
The DECT System Code/Register handsets Change
Only the system administrator and/or installer should be allowed access to
change the DECT System Code and Register handsets.
Compliance with the National Version Standard
For the national version, OfficeServ 500 is designed to comply with the standard
of the corresponding country. Therefore, in case the ‘Program 812 Program the
national standard change’ needs to be used, please call the service company
assigned by Samsung to get an expert’s advice.
CAUTION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. VII
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION I
Purpose...............................................................................................................................................I
Document Content and Organization .................................................................................................I
Conventions .......................................................................................................................................II
Reference..........................................................................................................................................III
Revision History ................................................................................................................................III
SAFETY CONCERNS V
Symbols ............................................................................................................................................ V
Caution............................................................................................................................................. VI
CHAPTER 1. Overview Of MMC Programming 1-1
1.1 Introduction to Programming ..................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Phone Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1 DS-4000 Series phones ..................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000D Series Phones............................................................................................ 1-3
1.3 Cautions in Programming ........................................................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Program List by User’s Level ..................................................................................................... 1-6
1.4.1 Station Level Programming ................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4.2 Operator Level Programming ............................................................................................. 1-7
1.4.3 Technician Level Programming ........................................................................................ 1-13
1.5 Program List by Name............................................................................................................... 1-15
1.6 Program List by Function ......................................................................................................... 1-22
1.6.1 Phone Function................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.6.2 Networking Function ......................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6.3 VoIP Function.................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6.4 WLAN Function................................................................................................................. 1-24
1.6.5 LCR Function .................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function.................................................................................. 1-25
1.6.7 Diagnosis Function ........................................................................................................... 1-26
1.6.8 Hotel Function................................................................................................................... 1-26
Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
VIII © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming 2-1
2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure........................................................................................2-1
2.2 Programming Procedure..............................................................................................................2-2
[100] STATION LOCK.....................................................................................................................2-2
[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE ...............................................................................................2-4
[102] CALL FORWARD ..................................................................................................................2-5
[103] SET ANSWER MODE ...........................................................................................................2-7
[104] STATION NAME ....................................................................................................................2-9
[105] STATION SPEED DIAL .......................................................................................................2-11
[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME............................................................................................2-13
[107] KEY EXTENDER.................................................................................................................2-14
[108] STATION STATUS...............................................................................................................2-17
[109] DATE DISPLAY ...................................................................................................................2-19
[110] STATION ON/OFF ...............................................................................................................2-21
[111] PHONE RING TONE ...........................................................................................................2-23
[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK...............................................................................................2-24
[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER.......................................................................................................2-26
[114] PHONE VOLUME................................................................................................................2-27
[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE .......................................................................................2-29
[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE .....................................................................................................2-30
[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE........................................................................................................2-32
[118] CONFERENCE GROUP .....................................................................................................2-33
[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY ..........................................................................................................2-35
[120] LARGE LCD OPTION .........................................................................................................2-37
[121] PHONE LANGUAGE...........................................................................................................2-39
[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED...................................................................................................2-41
[125] EXECUTIVE STATE ............................................................................................................2-42
[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING ...............................................................................2-44
[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE ..................................................................................2-46
[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE.......................................................................................2-47
[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE...........................................................................................................2-49
[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL ...............................................................................................2-50
[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL ..........................................................................................................2-51
[206] BARGE-IN TYPE.................................................................................................................2-52
[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT ........................................................................................................2-53
[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE...........................................................................................................2-54
[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE................................................................................................2-55
[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT .................................................................................2-56
[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT ...............................................................................................2-61
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. IX
[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION...................................................................................... 2-62
[215] VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS ............................................................................................... 2-63
[216] VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS ..................................................................................... 2-64
[217] ISDN SERVICE TYPE ........................................................................................................ 2-65
[220] STATION PAIR.................................................................................................................... 2-66
[221] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION.............................................................................................. 2-67
[222] EXTENSION TYPE............................................................................................................. 2-69
[223] FAX PAIR ............................................................................................................................ 2-71
[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT ........................................................................................... 2-72
[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION................................................................................ 2-74
[301] ASSIGN STATION COS ..................................................................................................... 2-76
[302] PICKUP GROUPS.............................................................................................................. 2-78
[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY ............................................................................................ 2-79
[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE .................................................................................. 2-80
[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE................................................................................................... 2-82
[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION.................................................................................. 2-83
[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE...................................................................... 2-84
[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE .................................................................................... 2-86
[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE................................................................................................. 2-88
[312] ALLOW CALLER ID............................................................................................................ 2-89
[313] COPY STN/TRK USE......................................................................................................... 2-90
[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL ............................................................................................ 2-91
[315] BRANCH GROUP .............................................................................................................. 2-92
[316] DISTINCTIVE RINGING..................................................................................................... 2-93
[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE ..................................................................................... 2-95
[318] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE........................................................................................... 2-96
[319] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION....................................................................................... 2-97
[320] PRESET FWD NO ANSWER........................................................................................... 2-100
[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER............................................................................................. 2-102
[324] SLI2 GAIN CONTROL...................................................................................................... 2-104
[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK................................................................................. 2-105
[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE ................................................................................................... 2-107
[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE .......................................................................................................... 2-108
[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS....................................................................................................... 2-109
[404] TRUNK NAME ...................................................................................................................2-111
[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER................................................................................................2-112
[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT............................................................................................2-114
[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE ............................................................................................2-115
[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE......................................................................................2-116
[409] TRUNK STATUS READ.....................................................................................................2-118
Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
X © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK.......................................................................................................2-120
[411] ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE ...............................................................................................2-121
[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL .................................................................................................2-124
[413] VMS CALL TYPE...............................................................................................................2-125
[414] ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS (Malaysia and Israel Only) ..............................................2-126
[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA .................................................................................2-128
[416] ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN .....................................................................................2-129
[418] R2MFC SIGNALING .........................................................................................................2-131
[419] TRUNK NIGHT GROUP....................................................................................................2-133
[420] PRS SIGNAL .....................................................................................................................2-134
[421] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL..................................................................................................2-136
[422] TRUNK TMC GAIN............................................................................................................2-138
[423] S/T MODE .........................................................................................................................2-139
[424] BRI S0 MAPPING..............................................................................................................2-140
[425] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART ........................................................................................2-141
[426] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION .....................................................................................................2-142
[427] PRI OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................2-143
[428] BRI OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................2-146
[429] MSN DIGIT ........................................................................................................................2-150
[430] TRUNK COS......................................................................................................................2-152
[433] COST RATE ......................................................................................................................2-154
[434] CONNECTION STATUS....................................................................................................2-155
[436] INSERT DIGIT ...................................................................................................................2-158
[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS............................................................................................2-159
[501] SYSTEM TIMERS .............................................................................................................2-161
[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS ..................................................................................................2-168
[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMER .......................................................................................................2-170
[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO ..........................................................................................2-173
[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME.................................................................................................2-174
[506] TONE CADENCE ..............................................................................................................2-175
[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME...............................................................................................2-177
[508] CALL COST.......................................................................................................................2-179
[509] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT ..................................................................................................2-180
[510] SLI RING CADENCE ........................................................................................................2-181
[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE.....................................................................................2-183
[513] HOTEL TIMER...................................................................................................................2-184
[514] TONE SOURCE ................................................................................................................2-185
[515] ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE .................................................................................2-186
[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP..........................................................................................2-187
[601] SIGN STATION GROUP ...................................................................................................2-188
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XI
[602] STATION GROUP NAME ................................................................................................. 2-193
[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP................................................................................................. 2-194
[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE ................................................................................ 2-196
[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE .................................................................................. 2-197
[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK.................................................................................................. 2-198
[607] UCD OPTIONS................................................................................................................. 2-200
[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK................................................................................................ 2-205
[609] CALL LOG BLOCK ........................................................................................................... 2-206
[610]ASSIGN R2 CALL TYPE (China Only).............................................................................. 2-207
[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING............................................................................................. 2-208
[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE..................................................................................... 2-209
[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP ...................................................................................... 2-210
[615] MGI GROUP......................................................................................................................2-211
[616] MGI USER ........................................................................................................................ 2-213
[700] COPY COS CONTENTS.................................................................................................. 2-214
[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS............................................................................................... 2-215
[702] TOLL DENY TABLE .......................................................................................................... 2-219
[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE.............................................................................................. 2-221
[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER........................................................................................... 2-223
[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL ...................................................................................... 2-224
[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME ................................................................................... 2-226
[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE ................................................................................................. 2-228
[708] ACCOUNT CODE............................................................................................................. 2-229
[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE ................................................................... 2-230
[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE............................................................................................................ 2-232
[711] LCR TIME TABLE ............................................................................................................. 2-233
[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE......................................................................................................... 2-234
[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE............................................................................................. 2-236
[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION..................................................................... 2-238
[715] ROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE .............................................................................. 2-242
[717] UCD AGENT ID ................................................................................................................ 2-244
[718] MY AREA CODE............................................................................................................... 2-245
[719] IDLE DISPLAY.................................................................................................................. 2-246
[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING .......................................................................................... 2-247
[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING........................................................................... 2-248
[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................... 2-249
[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................... 2-254
[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN ................................................................................................ 2-256
[725] SMDR OPTIONS .............................................................................................................. 2-262
[726] VM/AA OPTIONS.............................................................................................................. 2-265
Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
XII © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE ..............................................................................................2-271
[730] AA RECORD GAIN............................................................................................................2-272
[731] AA RAM CLEAR ................................................................................................................2-273
[732] AA TRANSLATION TABLE ................................................................................................2-274
[733] AA PLAN TABLE................................................................................................................2-278
[735] AA USE TABLE..................................................................................................................2-282
[736] AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH..........................................................................2-284
[739] ASSIGN AA MOH ..............................................................................................................2-285
[740] DECT SYSTEM CODE .....................................................................................................2-286
[741] DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION........................................................................................2-288
[743] DBS RESTART..................................................................................................................2-290
[744] BSI STATUS ......................................................................................................................2-292
[745] DBS STATUS.....................................................................................................................2-293
[746] DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF ......................................................................................2-294
[747] BSI RF CARRIER..............................................................................................................2-295
[748] COSTING DIAL PLAN.......................................................................................................2-296
[749] RATE CALCULATION TABLE...........................................................................................2-298
[750] VM CARD RESTART ........................................................................................................2-300
[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX ............................................................................................................2-302
[752] AUTO RECORD ................................................................................................................2-303
[753] WARNING DESTINATION ................................................................................................2-305
[754] VM HALT ...........................................................................................................................2-306
[755] VM ALARM ........................................................................................................................2-307
[756] ASSIGN VM MOH .............................................................................................................2-308
[757] VM IN/OUT ........................................................................................................................2-310
[758] VM DAY/NIGHT.................................................................................................................2-311
[759] CLI RINGING.....................................................................................................................2-312
[760] ITEM COST TABLE...........................................................................................................2-315
[761] TAX RATE SETUP.............................................................................................................2-317
[762] ROOM COST RATE ..........................................................................................................2-319
[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM .................................................................................2-320
[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE...............................................................................2-321
[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER............................................................................2-322
[803] ASSIGN TENANT GROUP ...............................................................................................2-323
[804] SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER...............................................................................................2-324
[805] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY ..........................................................................................2-327
[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL ........................................................................................................2-328
[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL...........................................................................................2-330
[809] LEVEL AND GAIN .............................................................................................................2-332
[810] HALT PROCESSING.........................................................................................................2-335
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XIII
[811] RESET SYSTEM .............................................................................................................. 2-336
[812] SET COUNTRY CODE..................................................................................................... 2-337
[813] HOTEL OPERATION........................................................................................................ 2-338
[814] SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE ............................................................................................ 2-339
[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY ...................................................................................... 2-340
[816] CONFERENCE GAIN....................................................................................................... 2-342
[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD................................................................................................. 2-344
[819] SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL...................................................................................... 2-345
[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID............................................................................................... 2-347
[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK ........................................................................................... 2-348
[822] SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE .................................................................................. 2-349
[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS................................................................................................ 2-351
[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION .................................................................................... 2-353
[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION ................................................................................... 2-355
[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK ....................................................................... 2-357
[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETER........................................................................................... 2-358
[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS............................................................................................. 2-360
[831] MGI PARAMETERS ......................................................................................................... 2-363
[832] VOIP ACCESS CODE ...................................................................................................... 2-365
[833] VoIP IP TABLE.................................................................................................................. 2-367
[834] H.323 OPTIONS ............................................................................................................... 2-369
[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS ......................................................................................................... 2-371
[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS......................................................................................................... 2-375
[837] SIP OPTIONS................................................................................................................... 2-377
[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES ............................................................................................... 2-380
[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION............................................................................................... 2-381
[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS ..................................................................................................... 2-384
[844] IP STATION TYPE ............................................................................................................ 2-388
[845] WLAN PARAMETER ........................................................................................................ 2-389
[846] WIP INFORMATION ......................................................................................................... 2-395
[847] WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK ............................................................................. 2-397
[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST ......................................................................................................... 2-398
[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................ 2-399
[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY ..................................................................................... 2-401
[851] ALARM REPORTING ....................................................................................................... 2-402
[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS .................................................................................. 2-404
[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY......................................................................................................2-411
[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME.......................................................................................................... 2-413
[855] SYSTEM OPTIONS.......................................................................................................... 2-414
[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS........................................................................................ 2-416
Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
XIV © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[858] ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM .......................................................................2-417
[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY ....................................................................................2-418
[860] UCD STATUS SERVICE ...................................................................................................2-420
[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS...........................................................................................................2-421
[890] INITIALIZE PORT..............................................................................................................2-423
ANNEX A. Abbreviation A-1
A ~ G ............................................................................................................................................ A-1
I ~ Q ............................................................................................................................................ A-2
R ~ W ............................................................................................................................................ A-3
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1.1 DS-4028E phone ....................................................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1.2 DS-5038D phone....................................................................................................... 1-3
Figure 1.3 DS-5021D/ITP-5021D phone .................................................................................... 1-3
Figure 1.4 DS-5014D/ITP-5014D phone .................................................................................... 1-4
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2.1 Customer Set Relocation Allow Table....................................................................... 2-98
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-1
CHAPTER 1. Overview Of MMC
Programming
In this chapter, the things to know before you start MMC programming, and the phone
buttons and cautions will be discussed.
1.1 Introduction to Programming
The MMC program means the changes on the data that is used for the system operation
program. There are 3 levels of MMC programming, such as technician, operator, and
station levels. According to the programming level, the station can program or cannot
program the data change. The technician level programming and the operator level
programming require a passcode for each level while the station level programming does
not require a passcode.
Program List by User’s Level
For information about the programming level classified by user’s level, refer to
‘1.4 Program List by User’s Level’ of this chapter.
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-2 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1.2 Phone Buttons
There are several phones that are allowed for MMC programming;
DS-4000 series phones: DS-4028E, DS-4018E, DS-4008E
DS-5000D series phone: DS-5038D, DS-5021D, DS-5014D
ITP-5000D series phone: ITP-5021D, ITP-5014D
1.2.1 DS-4000 Series phones
The following figure shows the shape of DS-4028E phone among DS-4000 series phones.
Figure 1.1 DS-4028E phone
Among 3 Soft buttons, the first one is called the ‘Left Soft button’, which is used to save
the modified data or to move the cursor inside the LCD display in the left direction.
Among 3 Soft buttons, the third one is called the ‘Right Soft button’, which is used to save
the modified data or to move the cursor in the right direction.
Among 8 programmable buttons, the first 6 programmable buttons are assigned as ‘A~F’ to
carry out specific functions or usage while programming. Generally, these buttons perform
specific functions that you set for each corresponding button.
When MMC programming, other functions programmed on the programmable buttons are
as follows:
Volume buttons: Search the selected items.
Dial keypad: Confirm the status
Hold Button Volume Buttons
Dial Buttons
LCD Display
A Button
B Button
Transfer Button Speaker
Button
Left Soft Button Right Soft Button
ANS/RLS Button
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-3
Soft buttons: Move the cursor
Speaker Button: Save data and proceed to the next program
Hold Button: Erase the previously entered item
A button: Select either a capital letter or small letter
B button: Select either a Korean character or English character
Transfer Button: Enter the programming code
1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000D Series Phones
There are several DS/ITP-5000D series phones, such as DS-5038D, DS-5021D, DS-5014D,
ITP-5021D, ITP-5014D as shown in the figures below:
Figure 1.2 DS-5038D phone
Figure 1.3 DS-5021D/ITP-5021D phone
Dial Buttons
Soft buttons
Scroll Button
Redial Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button Hold Button
Speaker Button
LCD Display
Telephone Status Indicator
Microphone
Volume Buttons
Navigation Buttons
Programmable Buttons(21)
B Buttons
A Buttons
Dial Buttons
Soft buttons
Scroll Button
Programmable Buttons(21)
Redial Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button Hold Button
Speaker Button
LCD Display
Telephone Status Indicator
Microphone
Programmable Buttons(17)
Volume Buttons
B Buttons
A Buttons
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-4 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Figure 1.4 DS-5014D/ITP-5014D phone
The DS-5000D series phones have 38/21/14 programmable buttons that a station can
register any functions he/she wants to use. Also, there are several other function buttons:
the dial buttons, the volume button for controlling a voice volume, the redial button that
allows to redial the latest phone number, the conference button that can be used during the
conference, the transfer button that is used to transfer a call received during a phone
conversation to another station, the hold button to hold a call for a while, the speaker button,
and the navigation buttons that are designed for the convenience of phone users.
And, there is the LCD display that displays the station status and various other kinds of
information. With three colors like red, green, and yellow, the station status indicator
displays the current status of station.
Dial Buttons
Soft buttons
Scroll Button
Redial Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button Hold Button
Speaker Button
LCD Display
Telephone Status Indicator
Microphone
Volume Buttons
Navigation Buttons
Programmable Buttons(14)
B Buttons
A Buttons
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-5
1.3 Cautions in Programming
Programming can be done while the handset is placed on the phone at a idle state.
Programming can be done on any phone.
Programming can be done only on the phone, not on normal phone.
If the phone does not have the LCD display, press the numbers using the dial buttons
as instructed by the programming guide, without using the volume buttons. However,
if the phone does not have Soft buttons, certain programming cannot be done.
Therefore, only the station level programming is allowed on the phone that does not
have the LCD display.
If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, this means
that the entered data is invalid. Enter the correct data again.
The content of the displayed message for each step shows the status after each step is
executed.
If no key is pressed for a certain period of time during programming(Key program end
time, default is 60 seconds), it becomes a idle state from programming mode.
If the phone is off hook while programming, it becomes a dial state from programming
mode.
Before the modified data is confirmed by pressing [Left Soft] button or [Right Soft]
button, the [Speaker] or [Transfer] button is pressed to make it at a idle state or the
phone is unplugged. In this case, the data entered up to that time will be automatically
saved as the data displayed on the LCD.
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-6 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1.4 Program List by User’s Level
The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one.
The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and
station level. In this section, the programmable MMC for each level will be introduced.
1.4.1 Station Level Programming
Programming can be done for only station level programs.
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 100 STATION LOCK
MMC: 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE
MMC: 102 CALL FORWARD
MMC: 103 SET ANSWER MODE
MMC: 104 STATION NAME
MMC: 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC: 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
MMC: 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC: 108 STATION STATUS
MMC: 109 DATE DISPLAY
MMC: 110 STATION ON/OFF
MMC: 111 PHONE RING TONE
MMC: 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
MMC: 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER
MMC: 114 PHONE VOLUME
MMC: 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
MMC: 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE
MMC: 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE
MMC: 118 CONFERENCE GROUP
MMC: 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
MMC: 120 LARGE LCD OPTION
MMC: 121 PHONE LANGUAGE
MMC: 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED
MMC: 125 EXECUTIVE STATE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-7
1.4.2 Operator Level Programming
An technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC [802] CUSTOMER
ACCESS MMC NUMBER.
Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group, but it can be done for only
one phone at a time.
1.4.2.1 System Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the system are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
MMC: 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
MMC: 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
MMC: 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC: 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL
MMC: 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL
MMC: 206 BARGE-IN TYPE
MMC: 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
MMC: 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE
MMC: 209 ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
MMC: 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
MMC: 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC: 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
MMC: 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
MMC: 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS
MMC: 217 ISDN SERVICE TYPE
MMC: 220 STATION PAIR
MMC: 221 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
MMC: 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC: 223 FAX PAIR
MMC: 224 WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-8 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1.4.2.2 Station Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the station are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
MMC: 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC: 302 PICKUP GROUPS
MMC: 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
MMC: 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC: 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
MMC: 306 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
MMC: 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
MMC: 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
MMC: 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
MMC: 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
MMC: 313 COPY STN/TRK USE
MMC: 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
MMC: 315 BRANCH GROUP
MMC: 316 DISTINCTIVE RINGING
MMC: 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC: 318 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
MMC: 319 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
MMC: 320 PRESET FWD NO ANSWER
MMC: 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC: 324 SLI2 GAIN CONTROL
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-9
1.4.2.3 Trunk Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the trunk are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC: 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
MMC: 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC: 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS
MMC: 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC: 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
MMC: 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC: 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
MMC: 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
MMC: 409 TRUNK STATUS READ
MMC: 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
MMC: 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
MMC: 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
MMC: 413 VMS CALL TYPE
MMC: 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
MMC: 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
MMC: 416 ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN
MMC: 418 R2MFC SIGNALING
MMC: 419 TRUNK NIGHT GROUP
MMC: 420 PRS SIGNAL
MMC: 421 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
MMC: 422 TRUNK TMC GAIN
MMC: 423 S/T MODE
MMC: 424 BRI S0 MAPPING
MMC: 425 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
MMC: 426 E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
MMC: 427 PRI OPTIONS
MMC: 428 BRI OPTIONS
MMC: 429 MSN DIGIT
MMC: 430 TRUNK COS
MMC: 433 COST RATE
MMC: 434 CONNECTION STATUS
MMC: 436 INSERT DIGIT
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-10 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1.4.2.4 Timer and Tone Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the timer and tone are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
MMC: 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC: 502 STATION-WIDE TIMERS
MMC: 503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
MMC: 504 PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
MMC: 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
MMC: 506 TONE CADENCE
MMC: 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC: 508 CALL COST
MMC: 509 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
MMC: 510 SLI RING CADENCE
MMC: 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE
MMC: 513 HOTEL TIMER
MMC: 514 TONE SOURCE
MMC: 515 ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE
1.4.2.5 Group Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of a group are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
MMC: 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC: 602 STATION GROUP NAME
MMC: 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
MMC: 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
MMC: 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
MMC: 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC: 607 UCD OPTIONS
MMC: 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
MMC: 609 CALL LOG BLOCK
MMC: 610 R2MFC CALL TYPE
MMC: 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
MMC: 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
MMC: 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-11
(Continued)
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 615 MGI GROUP
MMC: 616 MGI USER
1.4.2.6 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the tables, codes, AA, DECT and VM are as
follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 700 COPY COS CONTENTS
MMC: 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC: 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC: 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC: 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
MMC: 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC: 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
MMC: 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE
MMC: 708 ACCOUNT CODE
MMC: 709 TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
MMC: 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC: 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC: 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC: 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
MMC: 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
MMC: 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
MMC: 717 UCD AGENT ID
MMC: 718 MY AREA CODE
MMC: 719 IDLE DISPLAY
MMC: 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC: 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC: 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC: 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC: 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC: 725 SMDR OPTIONS
MMC: 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
MMC: 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE
MMC: 730 AA RECORD GAIN
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-12 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 731 AA RAM CLEAR
MMC: 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE
MMC: 733 AA PLAN TABLE
MMC: 735 AA USE TABLE
MMC: 736 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH
MMC: 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC: 740 DECT SYSTEM CODE
MMC: 741 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
MMC: 743 DBS RESTART
MMC: 744 BSI STATUS
MMC: 745 DBS STATUS
MMC: 746 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
MMC: 747 BSI RF CARRIER
MMC: 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN
MMC: 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
MMC: 750 VM CARD RESTART
MMC: 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX
MMC: 752 AUTO RECORD
MMC: 753 WARNING DESTINATION
MMC: 754 VM HALT
MMC: 755 VM ALARM
MMC: 756 ASSIGN VM MOH
MMC: 757 VM IN/OUT
MMC: 758 VM DAY/NIGHT
MMC: 759 RING ASSIGNMENT BY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC: 760 ITEM COST TABLE
MMC: 761 TAX RATE SETUP
MMC: 762 ROOM COST RATE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-13
1.4.3 Technician Level Programming
This level is allowed to program every level of program.
This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system, but it can be
done for only one phone at a time.
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
MMC: 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
MMC: 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
MMC: 803 ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
MMC: 804 SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER
MMC: 805 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
MMC: 806 CARD PRE-INSTALL
MMC: 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL
MMC: 809 LEVEL AND GAIN
MMC: 810 HALT PROCESSING
MMC: 811 RESET SYSTEM
MMC: 812 SET COUNTRY CODE
MMC: 813 HOTEL OPERATION
MMC: 814 SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE
MMC: 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
MMC: 816 CONFERENCE GAIN
MMC: 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
MMC: 819 SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL
MMC: 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
MMC: 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
MMC: 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
MMC: 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS
MMC: 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
MMC: 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION
MMC: 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK
MMC: 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
MMC: 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MMC: 831 MGI PARAMETERS
MMC: 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE
MMC: 833 VoIP IP TABLE
MMC: 834 H.323 OPTIONS
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-14 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS
MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS
MMC: 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC: 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC: 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION
MMC: 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
MMC: 844 IP STATION TYPE
MMC: 845 WLAN PARAMETER
MMC: 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC: 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC: 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC: 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
MMC: 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY
MMC: 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC: 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MMC: 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY
MMC: 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME
MMC: 855 SYSTEM OPTIONS
MMC: 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
MMC: 858 ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM
MMC: 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY
MMC: 860 UCD STATUS SERVICE
MMC: 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS
MMC: 890 INITIALIZE PORT
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-15
1.5 Program List by Name
This program list is arranged alphabetically.
Program Description MMC Program No.
AA PLAN TABLE MMC: 733
AA RAM CLEAR MMC: 731
AA RECORD GAIN MMC: 730
AA TRANSLATION TABLE MMC: 732
AA USE TABLE MMC: 735
ACCOUNT CODE MMC: 708
ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC: 116
ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC: 112
ALARM REPORTING MMC: 851
ALLOW CALLER ID MMC: 312
ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE MMC: 612
ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING MMC: 611
ASSIGN AA MOH MMC: 739
ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE MMC: 209
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC: 308
ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY MMC: 303
ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS(Malaysia and Israel Only) MMC: 414
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC: 701
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC: 505
ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE MMC: 515
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC: 410
ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE MMC: 304
ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE MMC: 605
ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE MMC: 411
ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN MMC: 416
ASSIGN FORCED CODE MMC: 305
ASSIGN LOUD BELL MMC: 205
ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC: 751
ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC: 823
ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC: 821
ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION MMC: 825
ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP MMC: 600
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MMC: 608
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-16 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Program Description MMC Program No.
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC: 507
ASSIGN RING TYPE MMC: 208
ASSIGN R2 CALL TYPE(China Only) MMC: 610
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC: 606
ASSIGN STATION COS MMC: 301
ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC: 601
ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC: 309
ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE MMC: 604
ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE MMC: 317
ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM MMC: 858
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC: 820
ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK MMC: 826
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC: 705
ASSIGN TENANT GROUP MMC: 803
ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP MMC: 603
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC: 408
ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL MMC: 412
ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE MMC: 318
ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC: 203
ASSIGN VM MOH MMC: 756
ASSIGN VM/AA PORT MMC: 207
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER MMC: 704
AUTHORIZATION CODE MMC: 707
AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH MMC: 736
AUTO RECORD MMC: 752
BARGE IN TYPE MMC: 206
BRANCH GROUP MMC: 315
BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART MMC: 425
BRI OPTIONS MMC: 428
BSI RF CARRIER MMC: 747
BRI S0 MAPPING MMC: 424
BSI STATUS MMC: 744
CALL COST MMC: 508
CALL FORWARD MMC: 102
CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC: 119
CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC: 323
CALL LOG BLOCK MMC: 609
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-17
(Continued)
Program Description MMC Program No.
CARD PRE INSTALL MMC: 806
CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC: 201
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC: 202
CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE MMC: 801
CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC: 101
CID TRANSLATION TABLE MMC: 728
CLI RINGING MMC: 759
COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC: 204
CONFERENCE GAIN MMC: 816
CONFERENCE GROUP MMC: 118
CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL MMC: 314
CONNECTION STATUS MMC: 434
COPY COS CONTENTS MMC: 700
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 720
COPY STN/TRK USE MMC: 313
COST RATE MMC: 433
COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC: 748
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER MMC: 802
CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY MMC: 815
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION MMC: 300
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT MMC: 210
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION MMC: 319
DATE DISPLAY MMC: 109
DBS RESTART MMC: 743
DBS STATUS MMC: 745
DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC: 741
DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF MMC: 746
DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC: 740
DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC: 854
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC: 724
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC: 714
DISA ALARM RINGING STATION MMC: 214
DISTINCTIVE RINGING MMC: 316
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 211
EDIT TEXT MESSAGE MMC: 117
ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM MMC: 800
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-18 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Program Description MMC Program No.
ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC: 830
EXECUTIVE STATE MMC: 125
EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 222
E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION MMC: 426
FAX PAIR MMC: 223
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE MMC: 407
HALT PROCESSING MMC: 810
HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 859
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT MMC: 509
HOTEL OPERATION MMC: 813
HOTEL TIMER MMC: 513
HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION MMC: 306
H.323 GK OPTIONS MMC: 836
H.323 OPTIONS MMC: 834
IDLE DISPLAY MMC: 719
INITIALIZE PORT MMC: 890
INSERT DIGIT MMC: 436
IP PHONE INFORMATION MMC: 840
IP STATION TYPE MMC: 844
ISDN SERVICE TYPE MMC: 217
ITEM COST TABLE MMC: 760
LAN PRINTER PARAMETER MMC: 829
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC: 310
LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC: 710
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC: 713
LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC: 712
LCR TIME TABLE MMC: 711
LEVEL AND GAIN MMC: 809
MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC: 853
MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC: 835
MGI GROUP MMC: 615
MGI PARAMETERS MMC: 831
MGI USER MMC: 616
MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE MMC: 511
MSN DIGIT MMC: 429
MY AREA CODE MMC: 718
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-19
(Continued)
Program Description MMC Program No.
NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC: 824
OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING MMC: 200
PHONE LANGUAGE MMC: 121
PHONE RING TONE MMC: 111
PHONE VOLUME MMC: 114
PHONE VOLUME CONTROL MMC: 807
PICKUP GROUPS MMC: 302
PRESET FWD NO ANSWER MMC: 320
PRI OPTIONS MMC: 427
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD MMC: 818
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE MMC: 715
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MMC: 838
PRS SIGNAL MMC: 420
PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO MMC: 504
RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC: 749
REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA MMC: 415
RESET SYSTEM MMC: 811
ROOM COST RATE MMC: 762
R2MFC SIGNALING MMC: 418
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 721
SET ANSWER MODE MMC: 103
SET COUNTRY CODE MMC: 812
SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC: 115
SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 822
SIP OPTIONS MMC: 837
SLI RING CADENCE MMC: 510
SLI2 GAIN CONTROL MMC: 324
SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL MMC: 819
SMDR OPTIONS MMC: 725
STATION GROUP NAME MMC: 602
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 722
STATION LOCK MMC: 100
STATION NAME MMC: 104
STATION ON/OFF MMC: 110
STATION PAIR MMC: 220
STATION SPEED DIAL MMC: 105
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC: 106
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-20 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Program Description MMC Program No.
STATION STATUS MMC: 108
STATION WIDE TIMERS MMC: 502
STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP MMC: 614
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 852
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS MMC: 841
SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER MMC: 804
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 723
SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE MMC: 814
SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC: 855
SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC: 861
SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY MMC: 850
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC: 706
SYSTEM TIMERS MMC: 501
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 805
SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS MMC: 500
S/T MODE MMC: 423
TAX RATE SETUP MMC: 761
TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS MMC: 856
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC: 703
TOLL DENY TABLE MMC: 702
TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE MMC: 709
TONE CADENCE MMC: 506
TONE SOURCE MMC: 514
TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC: 221
TRUNK COS MMC: 430
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC: 405
TRUNK DIAL TYPE MMC: 402
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL MMC: 421
TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE MMC: 401
TRUNK NAME MMC: 404
TRUNK NIGHT GROUP MMC: 419
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 406
TRUNK STATUS READ MMC: 409
TRUNK TMC GAIN MMC: 422
TRUNK TOLL CLASS MMC: 403
TRUNK WIDE TIMER MMC: 503
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-21
(Continued)
Program Description MMC Program No.
UCD AGENT ID MMC: 717
UCD OPTIONS MMC: 607
UCD STATUS SERVICE MMC: 860
VIEW MEMO NUMBER MMC: 113
VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 216
VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS MMC: 215
VOIP ACCESS CODE MMC: 832
VoIP IP TABLE MMC: 833
VM ALARM MMC: 755
VM CARD RESTART MMC: 750
VM DAY/NIGHT MMC: 758
VM HALT MMC: 754
VM IN/OUT MMC: 757
VMS CALL TYPE MMC: 413
VM/AA OPTIONS MMC: 726
WARNING DESTINATION MMC: 753
WIP INFORMATION MMC: 846
WLAN CONFIGURATION MMC: 849
WLAN IP/MAC LIST MMC: 848
WLAN PARAMETER MMC: 845
WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK MMC: 847
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-22 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1.6 Program List by Function
This section describes MMC programs are classified by the function of the OfficeServ 500.
1.6.1 Phone Function
The MMC programs related to the function of a phone that is connected with the
OfficeServ 500 are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 100 STATION LOCK
MMC: 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE
MMC: 102 CALL FORWARD
MMC: 103 SET ANSWER MODE
MMC: 104 STATION NAME
MMC: 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC: 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
MMC: 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC: 108 STATION STATUS
MMC: 109 DATE DISPLAY
MMC: 110 STATION ON/OFF
MMC: 111 PHONE RING TONE
MMC: 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
MMC: 114 PHONE VOLUME
MMC: 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
MMC: 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE
MMC: 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-23
1.6.2 Networking Function
The MMC programs related to the function of networking are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
MMC: 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
MMC: 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
MMC: 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS
MMC: 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
MMC: 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION
MMC: 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
MMC: 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MMC: 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC: 840 IP PHONE INFORMATIONES
MMC: 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
MMC: 844 IP STATION TYPE
MMC: 844 IP STATION TYPE
1.6.3 VoIP Function
The MMC programs related to the function of VoIP(Voice over Internet Protocol) are as
follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 831 MGI PARAMETERS
MMC: 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE
MMC: 833 VoIP IP TABLE
MMC: 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC: 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS
MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS
MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-24 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1.6.4 WLAN Function
The MMC programs related to the function of WLAN(Wireless Local Area Network) are
as follows: (For systems whose MCP2 version is earlier than V2.40, the MMCs in the table
below are displayed only when the ‘USE WLAN FEATURE’ is set to ENABLE at [MMC
861 USE WLAN FEATURE]. For systems whose MCP2 version is V2.40 or later, the
MMC items in the table below are all displayed and the ‘USE WLAN FEATURE’ item is
not included in [MMC 861 USE WLAN FEATURE].)
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 845 WLAN PARAMETER
MMC: 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC: 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC: 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC: 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
1.6.5 LCR Function
The MMC programs related to the function of LCR(Least Cost Routing) are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC: 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC: 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC: 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-25
1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function
The MMC programs related to the function of AA(Auto Attendant) or VM(Voice Mail) are
as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
MMC: 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
MMC: 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS
MMC: 413 VMS CALL TYPE
MMC: 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
MMC: 730 AA RECORD GAIN
MMC: 731 AA RAM CLEAR
MMC: 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE
MMC: 733 AA PLAN TABLE
MMC: 735 AA USE TABLE
MMC: 736 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH
MMC: 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC: 750 VM CARD RESTART
MMC: 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX
MMC: 752 AUTO RECORD
MMC: 753 WARNING DESTINATION
MMC: 754 VM HALT
MMC: 755 VM ALARM
MMC: 756 ASSIGN VM MOH
MMC: 757 VM IN/OUT
MMC: 758 VM DAY/NIGHT
CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
1-26 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1.6.7 Diagnosis Function
The MMC programs related to the function of diagnosing the system are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 434 CONNECTION STATUS
MMC: 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC: 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MMC: 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY
MMC: 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME
MMC: 855 SYSTEM OPTIONS
MMC: 890 INITIALIZE PORT
1.6.8 Hotel Function
The MMC programs related to the function of a hotel are as follows:
MMC Program No. Program Description
MMC: 221 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
MMC: 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC: 433 COST RATE
MMC: 513 HOTEL TIMER
MMC: 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN
MMC: 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
MMC: 760 ITEM COST TABLE
MMC: 761 TAX RATE SETUP
MMC: 762 ROOM COST RATE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-1
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.
2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure
Here, the order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming method
of each list. Please read the description carefully before programming.
The programming order is as follows:
1) Make the programmable state.
Press the Transfer button at pause.
Enter the program number, either 200 or 800.
Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode.
Press 1 dial button to ‘enable’ the programming mode.
In case of Program 800 Technician Program Mode Setting, enter the tenant number
to be programmed.
2) Make the program number selectable state.
If the Speaker button is pressed, the program selection mode appears.
Or, if the Transfer button is pressed, the programming state ends and the pause state
begin.
3) Select a program.
Enter the program number.
Or, select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker button.
Or, Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number.
4) Start programming the corresponding program.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-2 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
2.2 Programming Procedure
This section describes a procedure of each program. Refer to the programming procedure
corresponding to the MMC.
[100] STATION LOCK
Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all
stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows:
No Type Description
0 UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station.
1 LOCKED OUT The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make
and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When
in this mode the Hold button of the phone will flash slow RED.
2 LOCKED ALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the
Hold button of the phone will light steady RED.
CONDITIONS
Check if the station lock function is disabled at ‘MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS’.
If so, the station cannot be locked, but a locked station can be unlocked.
A station can be locked or unlocked under any condition when the station is in
Operator Level Programming or Technician Level Programming.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 100.
Display shows:
[201] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] STN LOCK
?
3) Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock.(e.g., 1)
OR
[205] STN LOCK
LOCKED OUT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-3
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-4 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE
Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its default
value of ‘1234’. This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to
default.
Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or
unlock the phone for toll restriction(call barring) override and to access the DISA feature.
CONDITIONS
The passcode of a station performing Operator Level Programming or Technician
Level Programming cannot be changed while the program mode is ‘ENABLE’.
An Operator or Technician Level can only delete the passcode of a station and reset the
passcode to the default value, ‘1234’, not permitting to know the passcode.
Default passcodes
Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATION PASSCODES: 1234
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 101.
Display shows:
[201] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:****
2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:****
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right.
3) Press Hold button to reset passcode. [205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:1234
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 100 STATION LOCK
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-5
[102] CALL FORWARD
Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station
users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered.
Allows several types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO ANSWER,
FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option, FORWARD
BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time,
provided that destinations have been entered for both.
No Type
0 FORWARD CANCEL
1 FORWARD ALL CALL
2 FORWARD BUSY
3 FORWARD NO ANSWER
4 FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER
5 FORWARD DND
CONDITIONS
When ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ is selected, calls are forwarded to stations set
at ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’. Thus, the destination number
must be set for both ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’ to select
‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’.
If the ‘FORWARD’ is set to ‘OFF’ at ‘MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS’, call
forward cannot be set but can be canceled.(Default: ‘OFF’)
The ‘FORWARD’ and ‘EXT FWD’ must both be set to ‘ON’ at ‘MMC 701 ASSIGN
COS CONTENTS’ in order to forward a call to an external number. If only the
‘FORWARD’ is set to ‘ON’, calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers.(Default:
‘OFF’)
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-6 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 102.
Display shows:
[201] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 0-5 to select forward type.
OR
[205] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:NONE
Press Volume button to select forward type l
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Dial destination number.(e.g., 201)
OR
[205] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:201
Press Volume button to select destination and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO.
OR
[205] FORWARD
CURRENTLY SET :YES
Press Volume button to select YES or NO
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 502 STATION TIMERS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-7
[103] SET ANSWER MODE
Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone.
Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options:
No Type Description
0 RING MODE The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls
are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS Button or by lifting
the handset.
1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone, the phone will
automatically answer calls on the speakerphone. When a
Trunk line is transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the
screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer, but the
phone will ring when the transfer is complete if you have not
pressed the ANS/RLS Button or lifted the handset.
2 VOICE ANNOUNCE The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers
can make an announcement but the ANS/RLS Button or
handset must be used to answer calls.
CONDITIONS
Since the DS-12B digital phone is not equipped with a microphone, the phone operates in
voice announcement mode when a call arrives while set to auto answer mode. Users must
use the handset to reply to the caller.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL PHONES: RING
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 103.
Display shows:
[201] ANS MODE
RING MODE
2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] ANS MODE
RING MODE
Press Volume button to select phone and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] ANS MODE
?
3) Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode.
OR
[205] ANS MODE
VOICE ANNOUNCE
Press Volume button to select ring mode and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-8 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-9
[104] STATION NAME
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11-character name to identify an
individual station.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial
pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is ‘SAM
SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’
once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete
your message. Pressing ‘A’ button will change the letter from upper case to lower case.
Volume Up/Down keys
When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the
Volume Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered by
using these keys.
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 < > . ) 0
DIAL 1 Space ? , ! 1
DIAL 2 A B C @ 2
DIAL 3 D E F # 3
DIAL 4 G H I $ 4
DIAL 5 J K L % 5
DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6
DIAL 7 P Q R S 7
DIAL 8 T U V * 8
DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9
DIAL * : = [ ] *
The # button can be used for the following special characters:
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, , ’. \.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-10 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 104.
Display shows:
[201] STN NAME
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] STN NAME
_
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter the station name using the procedure
described above and press Right Soft button
[205] STN NAME
SAM SMITH
to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-11
[105] STATION SPEED DIAL
Allows the system administrator or technician to program the personal speed dial locations
assigned to a station. This must be done for single line telephones because these stations
cannot access programming.
CONDITIONS
Each station may have up to 50 locations or bins assigned to it in MMC 606 Assign Speed
Block.
The speed dial bins are numbered 00~49. Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or
trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dial. These dial
digits may consist of 0~9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group
access number, it will automatically insert the separator.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
B Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
C Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
D Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
E Used to mask/unmask following digits(shows as ‘[’or ‘]’)
F Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 106)
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 105.
Display shows:
[201] SPEED DIAL
00:
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] SPEED DIAL
00:
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
If selected station has no speed dial bins,
the display will be as shown and a new station
[205] SPEED DIAL
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
may be selected.
3) Dial location number.(e.g., 05)
OR
[205] SPEED DIAL
05:_
Press Volume button to select location and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-12 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Enter trunk access code(e.g., 9) followed by
the number to be dialed.(e.g., 4264100)
[205] SPEED DIAL
05:9-4264100_
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
Press Hold button to clear an entry.
If an error is made, use DOWN arrow to step back.
5) Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106 Station Speed
Dial Name.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-13
[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
Allows an 11-character name to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This name
enables the speed dial number to be located when the directory dial feature is used. The
directory dial feature allows the display phone user to select a speed dial location by
viewing its name.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 106.
Display shows:
[201] SPEED NAME
00:
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] SPEED NAME
00:
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display
will be as shown and a new station may be selected.
[305] SPEED NAME
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
3) Dial speed dial location.(e.g., 01)
OR
[205] SPEED NAME
01:_
Press Volume button to scroll through location
numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter the location name using the procedure
described above and press Right Soft button to
[205] SPEED NAME
01:SAM SMITH
return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-14 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[107] KEY EXTENDER
Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to phone station.
In addition, it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys that
will make a general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have
extenders are listed below.
Feature Extender
AB Absence(extension number)
ACC Account code bin(000-999)
BOSS Boss and Secretary(1-4)
CR VM Call Record
CS UCD Call Status(UCD group number)
DIR Directory dial by name type(1-3)
DP Direct Pickup(extension or station group number)
DS Direct Station Select(station number)
FWRD Call Forward(0-7)
GPIK Group Pickup(01-99)
IG IN/Out of Group(station group number)
MMPG Meet Me Page(0-9, * )
MW Message Waiting(extension or station group number)
PAGE Page(0-9, * )
PARK Park Orbits(0-9)
RP Ring Plan(1-6)
RSV Room Status View(1-5)-Available in Hotel/Motel enabled only
SG Station Group(station group number)
PMSG Programmed Station Messaging(01-20)
SP UCD Supervisor(UCD group number)
SPD Speed Dial(00-49, 500-999)
VG SVM-800 Group Message(station group number)
VM VM Memo(extension or station group number)
VT Voice Transfer(VM group number)
When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are
attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-15
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
<24 Button Digital Phone>
<48 Button AOM>
CALL1 CA L1
CALL1 DT705
CALL1 DT7 1
CALL1 CONF
CALL1 CA L2
CALL1 DT706
CALL1 DT7 2
CALL1 SPD
CALL1 DT701
CALL1 DT7017
CALL1 DT7 3
CALL1 NONE
CALL1 DT702
CALL1 DT708
CALL1 DT7 4
CALL1 PAGE
CALL1 DT703
CALL1 DT709
CALL1 DT7 5
CALL1 CBK
CALL1 DT704
CALL1 DT7010
CALL1 DT7 6
CALL1 GPIK01
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-16 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 107.
Display shows first station:
[201] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1
Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Press Right Soft button to program the phone.
[201] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through the phone and
AOM’s and use Right Soft button to move the cursor.
[201] EXT (AOM1)
01:DS
4) Enter key number.(e.g., 18)
OR
[205] EXT (MAST)
18:DS
Use Volume button to scroll through keys and
use Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press the key to be programmed.
Dial extender according to above table.
[205] EXT (MAST)
18:DS207
System will return to this step. If no more entries,
press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-17
[108] STATION STATUS
Displays the following attributes of a station port. This is a READ-ONLY MMC:
No Status Description
0 PORT NO Cabinet(1~3)/Slot(1~9)/Port(1~16)
1 TYPE Phone Type
2 PICKUP GROUP None, 01~99
3 SGR Station Group Number
4 BOSS-SECR None, 1-4
5 PAGE None, Page Zone(0~4, * )
6 COS 1, COS 2 COS(1-30) per Ring Plan(01-06)
9 TENANT GROUP Tenant Group Number(1~2)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
PORT #: FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION
TYPE: DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE
PICKUP GRP: NONE
SGR: NONE
BOSS-SECR: NONE
PAGE ZONE: NONE
COS NUMBER: 01 IN ALL RING PLANS
TENANT GRP: 1
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 108.
Display shows first station:
[201] STN STATUS
PORT:C1-S3-P01
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] STN STATUS
PORT:C1-S3-P05
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 0~9 to select station status type.
OR
[205] STN STATUS
PICKUP GROUP:01
Press Volume button to select status and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-18 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 302 PICKUP GROUPS
MMC 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-19
[109] DATE DISPLAY
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a
per-station basis or system-wide.
No Mode Description
0 COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options:
0 = ORIENTAL MM/DD DAY HH:MM
1 = WESTERN DAY DD MON HH:MM
1 CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options:
0 = 12 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00
1 = 24 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00
2 DISPLAY Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options:
0 = UPPER CASE Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR
1 = LOWER CASE Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
COUNTRY: WESTERN
CLOCK: 12 HOUR
DISPLAY: LOWER CASE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 109.
Display shows:
[201] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all phones.
[ALL] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:?
3) Dial 0~2 to select mode.
OR
[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:ORIENTAL
Press Volume button to scroll through modes and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Press Volume button to scroll through formats and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-20 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-21
[110] STATION ON/OFF
Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below.
No Feature Default Description
00 AUTO HOLD OFF Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if
a CALL button, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed
during that call.
01 AUTO TIMER ON Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk
Line call.
02 HEADSET USE OFF When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing
a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the
ANS/RLS button.
03 HOT KEYPAD ON When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory
numbers without having to first lift the handset or press
the Speaker button.
04 KEY TONE ON Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons
on phone.
05 PAGE REJOIN ON Allows you to hear the latter part of page announcements
if phone becomes free during a page.
06 RING PREF. ON When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button
to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.
07 CALL COST OFF When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the
upper right corner of the phone display instead of
duration of the call.
08 AUTO CAMPON OFF When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to
camp-on to other phones without having to press a
CAMP-ON key.
09 AME BGM OFF This feature selects whether a station using Answer
Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or
BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting.
A BGM source must be selected for this to work.
10 AME PASSCODE OFF When ON, station users who have AME set must enter
their station password to listen to messages being left.
11 DISP SPDNAME OFF When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed
dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD
display when using speed dial.
12 CID REVW ALL ON When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an
extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls
that were not answered at the extension or by voice mail.
13 SECURE OHVA ON When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the
handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be
heard over the phone speaker.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-22 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Feature Default Description
14 NOT CONT.CID ON When OFF, the Caller ID will be continue display after the
phone user answered call.
15 AUTO ANS CO OFF When On, the incoming CO call will be answered follows
phone answer mode.
16 ENBLOCK 2LCD OFF When ON, 2 LINE LCD Keyset with navigation buttons
works as Enblock dialling mode. This option only works
when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is set to ENABLE in
MMC 861.
17 STN NO RING OFF Sets whether to ring a specific station when a
intercom/external call arrives. If set to ON, the phone will
not ring even if a call arrives. Nevertheless, the LED and
LCD will still indicate that a call has arrived.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 110.
Display shows:
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD :OFF
2) Dial the option number from above list.(e.g., 4)
OR
[201] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :OFF
Press Volume button to select the option and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Press Volume button to select ON or OFF.
Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[201] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :ON
OR
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-23
[111] PHONE RING TONE
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone.
There are eight ring tones available at each phone. A short tone burst of the selection will
be heard when the dial keypad is pressed.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
FREQUENCY: 5
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 111.
Display shows:
[201] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] RING TONE
SELECTION ?
3) Dial 1~8 to select ring tone.
OR
[205] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
Press Volume button to select ring tone and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME
MMC 316 DISTINCTIVE RINGING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-24 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment
reminder feature for any station. This must be done for single line telephones, as they
cannot access programming. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may
be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm, as described below. The
TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every
day at the same time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Secondary Pair
assignments(MMC 220) the alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not
ring the paired station.
No Type Description
0 NOTSET No alarm
1 TODAY Alarm only once
2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 112.
Display shows:
[201] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.
3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 1)
OR
[205] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
Press Volume button to select alarm and
press Right Soft button.
4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)
[205] ALM CLK(2)
HHMM:1300 NOTSET
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-25
5) Dial entry from above list for alarm type.(e.g., 2)
OR
[205] ALM CLK(2)
HHMM:1300 DAILY
Press Volume button to select alarm type and press
Right Soft button to move cursor and return to
step 2.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-26 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER
Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user. A memo can be left by
entering it via the dial keypad using the table below. A memo of up to and including 13
characters can be entered.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 113.
Display shows:
[201] VIEW MEMO
1:
2) Press Right Soft button to move cursor and add
memo via dial keypad using procedure above.
[205] VIEW MEMO
1:NEED BREAD
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-27
[114] PHONE VOLUME
Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume, off hook ring
volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page
volume for any or all phones.
No Type Description
0 RING VOLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight volume
levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.
1 OFF-RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped
on to your phone. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest
and level 8 the highest.
2 HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver.
There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the
highest.
3 SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker
phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest
and level 16 the highest.
4 BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone
speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are
16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
5 PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker
when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume
levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
RING VOLUME: 4
OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4
HANDSET VOLUME: 4
SPEAKER VOLUME: 13
BGM VOLUME: 13
PAGE VOLUME: 13
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-28 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 114.
Display shows:
[201] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :4
2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :4
3) Press Volume button to select volume type. [205] STN VOLUME
SPEAKER VOL :13
4) Press Volume button to select volume. [205] STN VOLUME
SPEAKER VOL :08
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-29
[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all phones.
There are 20 messages available. The last five message are can be modified by each phone user.
CONDITIONS
The first ten are pre-programmed and the remaining entries can be customized in MMC
715, Programmed Station Message.
DEFAULT DATA
NO MESSAGES SELECTED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 115.
Display shows:
[201] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] PGMMSG(??)
3) Dial an entry number to select message
Number.(e.g., 05)
[205] PGMMSG(05)
PAGE ME
OR
Press Volume button to select message and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 715 PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-30 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment
reminder feature for any station. This must be done for single line telephones because they
cannot access programming. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may
be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm, as described below.
The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings
every day at the same time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is
sounded.
No Type Description
1 NOTSET No alarm
2 TODAY Alarm only once
3 DAILY Alarm daily at set time
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 116.
Display shows:
[201] ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 2)
OR
[205] ALM REM(2)
HHMM: NOTSET
Press Volume button to select alarm and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-31
4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)
[205] ALM REM(2)
HHMM:1300 NOTSET
Display will automatically advance to step 5.
5) Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type.
(e.g., 2)
[205] ALM REM
HHMM:1300 DAILY
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
6) Enter messages using above table and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[205] ALM REM
Sam SMITH
7) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-32 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text message for any station.
One station can use up to 10 text messages.
CONDITIONS
In MMC 611 Text Message Station set USED station only uses this feature. In case of a
large LCD phone, system set to USED automatically.
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
BLANK MESSAGE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 117.
Display shows:
[201] TXTMSG(01)
Blank Message
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] TXTMSG(01)
Blank Message
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 01~10 to select message.
OR
[205] TXTMSG(02)
Blank Message
Press Volume button to select message and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter messages using above table and press
Right Soft button to return to step 3.
[205] TXTMSG(02)
SAME TIME
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 611 TEXT MESSAGE STATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-33
[118] CONFERENCE GROUP
Allows the system administrator or technician to set one touch conference group using
GCONF key for any station. One station can use up to 5 conference groups, and each group
can be set 4 member except self station.
On conference member, allows both internal station or station group number and outgoing
access code plus external telephone number.
CONDITIONS
In MMC 612 Conference Group Station set USED station only uses this feature.
Only phones with large LCDs may be assigned to a conference group.
In case of a large LCD phone, system set to USED automatically.
INPUT CONFERENCE GROUP
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
Conference group names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character.
Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position.
For example, if the group name is ‘SAMSUNG’, press the number ‘7’ four times to get the
letter ‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters
from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable
button will change the letter from upper case to lower case.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 118.
Display shows:
[201] GRP(1)NAME
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[203] GRP(1)NAME
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1~5 to select group.
OR
[203] GRP(1)NAME
Press Volume button to select group and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-34 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Dial 0 to select name or dial 1~4 to select member. [203] GRP(1)MBR1
NONE
OR
Press Volume button to select name or member
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
5) Enter conference member dial number and
press Right Soft button to return to step 4.
[203] GRP(1)MBR1
9-2794296
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 612 CONFERENCE GROUP STATION
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-35
[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY
Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per station basis.
Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no display
depending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options:
No Type Description
0 NO DISPLAY No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed.
1 NUMBER FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office
will be displayed first.
2 NAME FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first.
In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the
CLIP translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide names.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NUMBER FIRST
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 119.
Display shows first station:
[201] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
Press Volume button to scroll through stations
and press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all and press
[ALL] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
the Right Soft button..
3) Dial display option 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 2)
OR
[205] CID DISP
NAME FIRST
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-36 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
MMC 414 ASSIGN CID TRUNKS
MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS
MMC 728 CALLER ID TRANSLATION TABLE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-37
[120] LARGE LCD OPTION
Allows the system administrator to set any of the large LCD phone for the following options.
No Option Description
0 IDLE DISPLAY Sets whether to display ‘CALENDAR’ or ‘INFORMATION’ on LCD
at idle state
1 DS KEY DISPLAY Sets whether to display ‘Dial Number’ or ‘Directory Name’ for ‘DS’
key on LCD
2 DIAL MODE Sets dial mode ENBLOCK or OVERLAP of phone
3 CONV DISP Sets whether to display first SOFT menu screen or AOM menu
screen on LCD at conversation state
4 CALENDAR Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR
screen on LCD at idle state
5 AOM CURSOR Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen(01~99, PREV POSITION)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
IDLE DISPLAY: CALENDAR
DS KEY DISPLAY: TEL NUMBER
DIAL MODE: ENBLOCK
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 120.
Display shows:
[201] IDLE DISP
CALENDER
2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[203] IDLE DISP
CALENDER
Press Volume button to scroll through stations and
press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all and press
[ALL] IDLE DISP
CALENDER
the Right Soft button..
3) Dial the option number from above list.(e.g., 4)
OR
[203] DS KEY DSP
TEL NUMBER
Press Volume button to select the option and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-38 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Press Volume button to select ON or OFF.
Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[203] DS KEY DSP
EXT NAME
OR
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
5)
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-39
[121] PHONE LANGUAGE
Allows phone users the ability to assign an LCD display based on user’s own language.
No Language
00 ENGLISH
01 GERMAN
02 PORTUGAL
03 NORSK
04 DANISH
05 DUTCH
06 ITALY
07 SPANISH
08 SWEDISH
09 SPANISH/USA
10 FRENCH/CANADA
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ENGLISH
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 121.
Display shows:
[201] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] LANGUAGE
?
3) Dial 00~10 for language required.
OR
[205] LANGUAGE
GERMAN
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-40 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-41
[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED
Used to set the Smart news display speed. This timer is only related to the Smart News PC
Application Package.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
03
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 122.
Display shows first station:
[201] CALL SPEED
03
2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] CALL SPEED
03
Press Volume button to scroll through stations
and press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
3) Dial speed option.(03~10)
[205] CALL SPEED
03 04
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-42 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[125] EXECUTIVE STATE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set executive station’s the following
options.
No Option Description
0 EXEC STATE When inter-working with EASYSET, the state of executive station can
be displayed.
1 STATE(IN) If EXEC STATE sets to OTHERS(IN), the EASYSET display this
message.
2 STATE(OUT) If EXEC STATE sets to OTHERS(OUT), the EASYSET display this
message.
3 ANSWER MODE When the secretary call by BOSS key, the executive station ringing or
automatically answer follows this option.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
State display messages are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character.
Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the
message is ‘CONFERENCE’, press the number ‘2’ three times to get the letter ‘C’.
Now press the number ‘6’ three times to get the letter ‘O’. Continue selecting characters
from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable
button will change the letter from upper case to lower case.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 125.
Display shows:
[201] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
2) Dial executive station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-43
3) Dial 0~3 for selects option.
OR
[205] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
4) Dial 0~9 for selects state.
OR
[205] EXEC STATE
IN A MEETING
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-44 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
Used to open(enable) and close(disable) customer-level programming.
If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC,
the error message [NOT PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is required to
access this MMC. Each digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all
MMCs allowed in MMC 802 Customer Access MMC Number.
No Mode Description
0 DISABLE Open(enable) customer-level programming
1 ENABLE Close(disable) customer-level programming
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 200.
Display shows:
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE:
2) Enter passcode. ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE:
Correct code shows. ENABLE CUS.PROG.
DISABLE
Incorrect code shows. ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE ERROR
3) Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE
or DISABLE and press Right Soft button.
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
ENABLE
OR
Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.
4) Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level
and press Volume button to select MMC.
201:CUS.PASSCODE
SELECT PROG. ID
OR
Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button
to enter MMC.
5) Press Transfer button to exit.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-45
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-46 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200 Open Customer Programming
from its current value.
CONDITIONS
The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9.
The current(old) passcode is required for this MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
PASSCODE: 1234
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 201.
CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
2) Enter new passcode via dial keypad.
(maximum four digits)
CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:****
3) Verify new passcode via dial keypad. CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :****
Passcode verified.(go to step 4)
OR
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS
Passcode failure.
Return to step 2.
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-47
[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
Used to change the passcodes for the following features.
No Feature Description
0 RING PLAN This is the passcode required to place the system in different ring
plans(RP) or change the ring time override(RTO).
1 DISA ALARM This is the passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when
the number of DISA attempts are exceeded.
2 ALARM CLR This is the passcode required to clear a ALARM generated by the
disconnection of BI-PMS SIO. -Available in Hotel/Motel enabled only.
3 AA RECORD This is the passcode required to record prompts for use with the AA
ports on the Auto Attendant card.
5 DELETE This is the passcode required to registration of DECT phone.
6 WLAN REGST This is the passcode required for registration of a WIP phone.
CONDITIONS
The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0~9.
The current passcode is required for this MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN: 0000
DISA ALARM: 5678
ALARM CLR: 8765
AA RECORD: 4321
DECT REGST: 4321
DELETE: 9999
WLAN REGST: 0000
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 202.
Display shows:
CHANGE PASSCODE
RING PLAN :0000
2) Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry.
CHANGE PASSCODE
AA RECORD :4321
3) Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
CHANGE PASSCODE
AA RECORD :9999
Continue to change other passcodes.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-48 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 722 STATION KEY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-49
[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE
Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer(UA) key is pressed or the
UA pickup code is dialed. UA assignment is made in MMC 601 Assign Station Group for a
group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by
the directory number(DN) entered.
Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one
item(e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all
four zone codes must be created.
Recipient Description
NONE-NO UA When there is no phone number
STATION Station number
STN GROUP Station group number
RING PAGE External speaker phone number
COMMON BELL Common bell phone number
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 203.
Display shows current assignment:
ASSIGN UA PORT
NONE-NO UA
2) Dial DN of UA device.(e.g., 205)
OR
ASSIGN UA PORT
205 -STATION
Use Volume buttons to scroll through
available devices.
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-50 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL
Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous
closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal Trunk Line
ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open.
CONDITIONS
When the common bell is not used for night time ring, the common bell must be set to
station group.
Common bell not set to night time ring should be set to station group so that all
stations of the group ring when one station rings.
DEFAULT DATA
CONTINUOUS
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 204.
Display shows current setting:
[3801]COM. BELL
CONTINUOUS
2) Dial common bell number.
OR
[3801]COM. BELL
CONTINUOUS
Press Volume button to make selection of common
bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance
cursor.
3) Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation.
OR
[3802]COM. BELL
INTERRUPTED
Use Volume button to scroll through options and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-51
[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL
Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MISC board. Each MISC
board can have up to a loud bell outputs.
The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station. Only a station can be
assigned to control the loud bell; a station group cannot be assigned.
CONDITIONS
The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station. Only a station can be
assigned to control the loud bell; a station group cannot be assigned.
DEFAULT DATA
UNASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 205.
Display shows current setting.
[3901]LOUD BELL
RING PAIR:NONE
2) Dial loud bell number.(e.g., 3902)
OR
[3902]LOUD BELL
RING PAIR:NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell
numbers and press Right Soft button to move the
cursor.
3) Enter station number.(e.g., 201)
OR
[3902]LOUD BELL
RING PAIR:201
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-52 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[206] BARGE-IN TYPE
Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.
No Type Description
0 NO BARGE-IN Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in
status.
1 WITH TONE Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the barged-in
on station.
2 WITHOUT TONE Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the
barged-in on station and the barging-in station will be muted.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NO BARGE-IN
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 206.
Display shows:
BARGE IN TYPE
NO BARGE IN
2) Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type.(e.g., 2)
OR
BARGE IN TYPE
WITHOUT TONE
Press Volume button to select barge-in type and
press Right Soft button.
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-53
[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VMAA. VMAA ports receive digits
designated in MMC 726 VM/AA Options and also receive a true disconnect signal upon
completion of a call. Only SLI cards, not key daughter boards, support disconnect signal.
Do not make VMAA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice
mail integration. VMAA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program
and are protected against tones.
This MMC is not used to assign voice mail card ports. Voice mail card ports are
assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects a CADENCE
or a SVMi-8/16 card.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL PORT
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 207.
Display shows:
[209] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1 or 0 to select port type.
(1:VMAA, 0:NORMAL)
[205] VMAA PORT
VMAA PORT
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
MMC 601 STATION GROUP
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-54 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE
Provides the flexibility to program single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line ringing
and data secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be
met. All devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports
data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration.
No Type Description
0 ICM RING Follows normal SLI ring cadence.
1 CO RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence.
2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and not supports off hook ring.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ICM RING
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 208.
Display shows:
[209] RING TYPE
ICM RING
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] RING TYPE
ICM RING
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1, 2 or 0 to select port type.(e.g., 2)
OR
[205] RING TYPE
DATA RING
Press Volume button to select option and press
Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-55
[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
Designates to which phone an add-on module(AOM) is assigned.
There is no limit to the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system. The maximum
number of AOMs that can be assigned to a keyset is 4.
No OHVAED Status Description
0 OHVAED OFF Off-hook announcement is not played to the add-on-module
1 OHVAED ON Off-hook announcement is played to the add-on-module
CONDITIONS
AOM cannot be designated as master. If no AOM exists in a tenant, the ‘AOM NOT
EXIST’ message is displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE FOR MASTER
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 209.
Display shows first AOM:
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:NONE
2) Dial AOM number.
OR
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers
and use Soft buttons to move cursor.
3) Enter station number.(e.g., 301)
OR
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:201
Use Volume button for selection of stations and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-56 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
Allows the system administrator to set in system features on a per-tenant basis.
Each system option has a corresponding dialling number, as listed below. All options toggle
ON/OFF.
No Option Default Description
00 DISA PSWD ON When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA
password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF, extension
number and DISA password are not required and the caller
has full access to all features allowed on this trunk.
01 LCR ENABLE OFF This option determines whether the system will or will not
route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR
routing tables.
03 PERI UCD RPT OFF Periodic UCD Information provider. Enables UCD Statistics
data on a per UCD group basis to print out on the IO port
which has been set as PERI UCD in real time(every 3~99
seconds). This allows the information to be interfaced and
manipulated by an external package or third party provided
software.
04 CID CODE INS OFF When ON, the system will insert the country code when
receiving CID information. This feature can use the CID
display call back feature.
05 DISA MOH OFF When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial
tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the
caller dials a digit.
06 TRANSFER
MOH
OFF When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of
ring back tone from the time a transfer is completed until the
call is answered by an internal party.
08 DID BSY ROUT OFF When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will re-route
to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk if CW is set to
OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the call will
camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF, the
call will re-route to the operator.
09 ALARM MOH ON When ON, if station user answer alarm ring, will hear station
MOH instead of dial tone.
12 CONF TONE OFF When ON, provides conference tone every conference tone
time.(Available in Australia or Italy only)
13 RECALL PIKUP ON When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up using
Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group features.
This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls
recalling to a station.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-57
(Continued)
No Option Default Description
14 ICM EXT FWD OFF When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom calls
are placed to a station that has Call Forward External
programmed and set.
16 DID ERR TONE OFF This option was added to provide error tone when an invalid
DID number is received.
18 KTS DISC ALM OFF When ON, generates system alarm when a phone
disconnect or connect.
19 OFF HOOK ALM OFF When ON, generates system alarm when a phone maintains
off hook condition longer than timer.
20 SL SELF RING OFF When ON, generates ring during 10 seconds when a single
line phone dials self number and hang up.
21 SGR INC BUSY OFF When ON, generates busy tone when all station group
member busy for group call. This setting does not work for
Station Groups which have Unconditional Ring Mode.
24 TRANSFER
CANCEL
OFF When OFF, a single line phone will be able to handle 2 calls
simultaneously. Using the hook-flash to toggle between
them. When ON, a single line telephone will be able to
connect to the second call, but pressing the hook flash will
not toggle between the two calls it will disconnect the second
call and reconnect the single line telephone to the first call.
26 RECALL DISC OFF When ON, the system disconnects a call when transfer
recall.
29 ARD TONE CHK ON When OFF, the system use time for checking destination is
busy when auto retry.
30 VPN ENABLE OFF When ON, the Australia type VPN enabled.
31 IN TOLL CHK OFF When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict when incoming call.
32 ISDN
PROGCON
OFF When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS
message from ISDN trunk, the call will connect without
CONNECT message.
33 INCLUDE VAT OFF When OFF, not printed VAT total line when Hotel
Report.(Available in Hotel/Motel enabled only)
36 DSS KEY DPU OFF When ON, directed pick-up the call when press ringing DS key.
37 BEGN DGT DSP OFF When ON, an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR
where more than 11 digits are dialed then the first dialed
digits are shown on the phone display.
38 ONE TCH
FACC
OFF When OFF, the forced account mode user can not use one
touch account code(ACC) key.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-58 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Option Default Description
39 SGR ALL OUT OFF When ON, the last of station group member can out of group.
40 CHAIN FWD ON When ON, a call is directed to a station that may be
forwarded to another station that is call forwarded to a
VMAA, then the caller will be directed to the last station’s
mailbox it reached. When OFF, the caller will be directed to
the first station’s mailbox instead of the last.
41 TRK MONITOR OFF When ON, can override to trunk and a call is connected
override extension when a original caller hang on. When
OFF, can override to extension only and a call is
disconnected when a original caller hang on.
42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF When ON, a MFR assigned for VoIP tandem call when a call
incoming from VoIP trunk to another trunk outgoing.
43 NTWK
AUTOTMR
OFF When OFF, a call duration timer disabled via networking
intercom call.
45 NO STAFF
COD
OFF When ON, the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in
HOTEL operation.
46 PERI UCD SIO OFF When ON, the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO port.
47 AUTO
CLEANED
OFF When the room is checked-out, the room status is changed
to NEED CLEAN. When the option is set to ON, the room
status will be changed to AVAILABLE.
48 REDIAL REVW OFF When ON, the CALL LOG review status will be appeared
when LNR button is pressed.
51 ISDN KEYFAC OFF When ON, if phone user press ‘*’ or ‘#’ during conversation
via BRI trunk, system send information message instead of
digit message.
52 CHK SPV TRK OFF When ON, if both trunks don’t have supervision feature then
cannot make outgoing transfer or unsupervised conference.
53 PRE FWD
BUSY
OFF When ON, a call arrives busy station, that is not set forward
busy, if preset no answer destination is available, a call reroute to that destination immediately.
54 ORG DIAL LOG OFF When ON, originally dialed digit will be saved as outgoing
call log in Large LCD phone. When OFF, invalid dialling such
as dialling of not exist station number will not be saved as
outgoing call log in Large LCD phone.
55 TIE TRSF RCL ON When ON, the trunk call is transferred to the TIE line and is
not answered within transfer recall time, the call is recalled to
the original transferring station.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-59
(Continued)
No Option Default Description
56 VOIP REALRBT OFF When ON, the system will connect real path of outgoing
trunk to the incoming VOIP Trunk user instead of providing
the virtual ringback tone.
62 SMDR
AUT2ACC
OFF When ON, the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in
ACCOUNT field of SMDR.
64 IPNW REAL RB OFF Sets whether to play a virtual tone or the ring-back tone
returned from the other party, for a VoIP networking call.
66 TRK AUTO
MOH
OFF If this option is set to ON and if a call arrives through a C.O.
line whose AUTO ANSWER option is set to ON by MMC 400
(DID DESTINATION must also be set to A if the incoming call
adheres to the DID reception table.), the call will be
answered automatically after the DISA ANSWR TIME
defined by MMC 400 elapses. The system plays the sound
defined by MMC 408 to the caller and connects the call to
the destination defined by MMC 406. If the call is not
answered within the MMC 501 TRK AUTOMOH DISC TIME,
the system disconnects the call automatically.
67 TRSF VT KEY ON If set to ON, pressing this key will be same as pressing the
VT key when switching to Voice Mail.
68 PAIR NO RING OFF If set to OFF while a call is camping on an extension, the
system services off-hook ring to the connected station and
disables the idle paired extension from ringing.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 210.
Display shows:
TEN. ON AND OFF
DISA PSWD :OFF
2) Dial option number.(e.g., 00)
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
TEN. ON AND OFF
DISA PSWD :OFF
3) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
TEN. ON AND OFF
DISA PSWD :ON
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-60 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Repeat steps 2-3 for other options.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
MOH PROGRAMMING
MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
MMC 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH
CID PROGRAMMING
MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
MMC 414 ASSIGN CID TRUNKS
MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS
MMC 728 CALLER ID TRANSLATION TABLE
DID PROGRAMMING
MMC 416 ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
VM/AA PROGRAMMING
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
MMC 601 STATION GROUP
ALARM PROGRAMMING
MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-61
[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door box button is pressed.
If the ring plan destinations are not input the default ring plan 1 is used. Available Ring
Plan inputs are 1 through 6.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
STATION GROUP: 500
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 211.
Display shows first door phone:
[229] DOOR RING
1:500 2:500
2) Dial door phone number.(e.g., 230)
OR
[230] DOOR RING
1:500 2:500
Press Volume button to scroll through door phone
numbers and use the Right Soft button to move
cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select All door ring.
ALL] DOOR RING
1:500 2:500
3) Enter new ring plan number selection via dial
Keypad.
[250] DOOR RING
1:301 2:500
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-62 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who
can clear the alarm also receives the notification.
CONDITIONS
A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station.
The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLAN: 500
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 214.
Display shows:
DISA ALARM RING
1:500 2:500
2) Enter in valid destination number for ring plan.
(e.g., 217)
DISA ALARM RING
1:217 2:500
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Enter in valid destination number for another
ring plan.(e.g., 249)
DISA ALARM RING
1:217 2:249
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-63
[215] VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
Assigns either two(2) channels and seven(7) users or one(1) channel and five(5) users to
the VDIAL card. When changing channel size, you will be prompted to ‘clear RAM’. This
is only for Voice Dialler, not the system.
This will prevent accidental usage of pre-recorded names. It is advised that you clear RAM
before assigning users in MMC 216.
No Voice Dial Option Description
0 2CH-7USER-20BIN Two ports can be used for a voice dial device card. A port can
accommodate up to 7 subscribers and up to 20 names per
subscriber.
1 1CH-5USER-40BIN One port can be used for a voice dial device card. A port can
accommodate up to 5 subscribers and up to 40 names per
subscriber.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 215.
Display shows:
[3551]VDIAL OPTN
2CH-7USER-20BIN
2) Enter Voice Dialler number(e.g., 3551)
via dial keypad.
[3551]VDIAL OPTN
2CH-7USER-20BIN
OR
Press Volume button to select Voice Dialler and
use Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 0 or 1 for Voice Dialler channel select.
OR
[3551]VDIAL OPTN
1CH-5USER-40BIN
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBER PLAN
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-64 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[216] VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS
Allows a station to be assigned to a channel of the VDIAL, card, to dial a personal speed
dial number. The number of users assigned to this feature is controlled by MMC215,
VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS, which allows either two(2) channels with seven(7) users or
one(1) channel with five(5) users.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 216.
Display shows:
[3551]VDIAL DIAL
USER 1:NONE
2) Enter Voice Dialler number(e.g., 3551) via dial
keypad.
[3551]VDIAL DIAL
USER 1:NONE
OR
Press Volume button to select Voice Dialler and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1-7 for user index number.
OR
[3551]VDIAL DIAL
USER 1:NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
4) Dial extension number.
OR
[3551]VDIAL DIAL
USER 1:201
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBER PLAN
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-65
[217] ISDN SERVICE TYPE
Assign the ISDN service type of single line telephone port. Service consist of BC(Bearer
Capability) and HLC(High Layer Capability).
No Type Description BC HLC
0 VOICE Voice service Speech 1 FAX 3 G3 FAX service 3.1 kHz Audio FAX G2/G3
2 AUDIO 3.1 3.1 kHz Audio service 3.1 kHz Audio None
3 MODEM MODEM service 3.1 kHz Audio Telephony
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
VOICE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 217.
Display shows:
[209] ISDN SVC
VOICE
2) Enter the station number.(e.g., 210)
OR
[210] ISDN SVC
VOICE
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.
3) Select service type.(0-3)
OR
[210] ISDN SVC
AUDIO 3.1
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-66 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[220] STATION PAIR
Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a phone or single line
port. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of Service, LCR Class, and
DND attributes of the primary station.
If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301 the change affects both
stations. Secondary stations when dialed will also ring the primary extension.
Message from secondary extension will display that(secondary) extension
numbers. Callback to extension(secondary) as well.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 220.
Display shows:
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE
2) Enter the primary station number via dial
keypad.(e.g., 201)
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.
3) Enter the secondary station number via dial
keypad.(e.g., 205)
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:205
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 STATION FORWARDING
MMC 301 STATION COS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-67
[221] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be
printed upon demand, every hour, at a programmed time of each day, or up to three
separate timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.
When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are:
No Option Description
0 PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.
1 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved.
2 CANCEL PRINTOUT The program return to previous menu if no report is ended.
When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are:
No Option Description
0 AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled.
1 DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the
totals are reset to ‘0’
2 EVERY HOUR A Traffic report will be printed every hour
3 TIME SHIFT Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to
report traffic within certain times of a day. A report is printed at the
end of each End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’
When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the
last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING
D & T.
If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NO REPORT
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-68 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 221.
Display shows:
TRAFFIC REPORT
MANUAL PRINTOUT
2) Dial 0 for demand or 1 for automatic print.
OR
TRAFFIC REPORT
AUTO PRINT OPTN
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.
3) Dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic print option.
OR
TRAFFIC REPORT
DAILY HHMM:2359
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
4) Enter daily report time.(HHMM)
TRAFFIC REPORT
DAILY HHMM:2200
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 804 SYSTEM I/O
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-69
[222] EXTENSION TYPE
This MMC enables station ports to be defined for a specific use. Each telephone can be
designated as being one of the five(5) following types. These types can be changed by
dialling the type number or by scrolling through the types and pressing the Right Soft
button to select the type desired.
No Type Description
0 NORMAL STATION This is the default setting. The station will operate in the normal
manner associated with this type of station. Ports designated as
VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC.
1 GUEST SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room
status and check in features as a smoking room.
2 GUEST NO SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room
status and check in features as a non smoking room.
3 MEETING ROOM Stations designated as Meeting room stations will have the same
attributes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied
status but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists.
4 ADMINISTRATOR Only stations designated as administrator stations can use the
hotel motel features such as check in etc.
5 FAX STATION When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned to
pair station of GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO
SMOKING ROOM in MMC 223.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL STATION
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 222.
Display shows:
[201] PHONE USE
NORMAL STATION
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 214)
OR
[214] PHONE USE
NORMAL STATION
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-70 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
3) Dial 0 to 5 to select station type.
OR
[214] PHONE USE
GUEST NO SMOKING
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-71
[223] FAX PAIR
This MMC enables a guest room to have a additional FAX line.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 223.
Display shows:
[201] FAX PAIR
NONE
2) Enter the room station number via dial keypad.
(e.g., 202)
[202] FAX PAIR
NONE
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.
3) Enter the fax station number via dial keypad.
(e.g., 2902)
[202] FAX PAIR
290
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-72 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT
This MMC is enhance Wake Up feature. The system will play a recorded message when a
Wake Up call is answered by the user. The Wake Up Announcement feature will require an
Automated Attendant(AA) card be installed in the system. When a Wake Up call is
answered, the system will access the customized Wake Up message(1-48) that has been
recorded in the AA card. The end user will record this message and have the ability to
change it when desired Auto Attendant operation. The Wake Up message will have no
default ROM message assigned to it. However a ROM message(49-64) may also be
assigned as the Wake Up message if desired.
This MMC has three options.
No Option Description
0 AA GROUP Determines which AA group will be connected when a Wake Up
call is answered. This destination can be a any AA groups.
1 MESSAGE NO Determines which message will be played when a Wake Up call is
answered. This destination can be a custom recorded message
(1-48) or one of the pre-programmed messages(49-64).
2 GROUP BUSY Determines which tone source will be connected when a AA group
members are all busy. This destination can be a NONE, TONE or
extern music on hold.
If NONE set then dial tone connected, if TONE set then hold tone
connected.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
AA GROUP: NONE
MESSAGE NO: NONE
GROUP BUSY: NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 224.
Display shows:
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
AA GROUP :NONE
2) Dial 0, 1 or 2 for option select.
OR
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
AA GROUP :NONE
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-73
3) Enter the AA group number.
OR
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
AA GROUP :520
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-74 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
Allows the following features to be enabled on a per-station basis.
No Option Default Description
00 ACCESS DIAL ON Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk
group by dialling its directory number(DN).
This selection should be turned to off when using LCR.
01 MICROPHONE ON Allows all 12 and 24 button phones to be used in the
speakerphone mode.
02 OFF-HOOK RING ON Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.
03 SMDR PRINT ON When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and
from this station, the station will not print on SMDR.
This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from
hold or park.
04 TGR ADV.TONE ON When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be
heard each time LCR advances to the next route.
05 VMAA FORWARD ON This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be
forwarded to voice mail. When ON, Permits forward to
voice mail. When OFF, No forward to voice mail.
07 NGT PASSCODE ON When ON, the steps verifying the RING PLAN
passcode will be added in Ring Plan change.
08 INTRCOM SMDR OFF When the station is set to OFF, the station will not print
intercom calls on SMDR.
09 FWD DLY USE OFF When the station is set to ON, if the station has no
answer forward number without no answer forward set
then a call both ringing original extension and no
answer forward number when a incoming call is
directed to the station and the station does not answer
until no answer forward time.
11 FORWARD OVRD OFF When the station is set to ON, if the station call to
forwarded station, the call will not forward.
12 RECL TO OPER OFF When the station is set to ON, if the station transfer a
call and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will be
recall to operator instead of the station.
13 SLT LP OPEN OFF When the normal phone is set to ON, if the station
receives real disconnect signal instead of busy tone or
error tone. In case of VMAA ports or DATA RING ports
are not reference this option, this type SLI ports are
always receives real disconnect signal.
15 CID TO SLT OFF When RCM2 card is installed and this option is set to
ON, the system will provide the CID signal to the SLT.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-75
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 300.
Display shows:
[201] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
Press Volume button to select station.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
3) Press Volume button to select feature and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :OFF
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.
5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-76 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[301] ASSIGN STATION COS
Used to assign class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of service that
are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. There are 6 ring plans based on the Ring
Plan Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01-30.
Default is COS 01.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLANS 1-6: 01
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 301.
Display shows first station:
[201] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through stations.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations and
press Left Soft button to advance step 4.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
3) Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad.
OR
[205] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)
OR
[205] STN COS
1:05 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to advance
the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service
and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-77
5) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)
OR
[205] STN COS
1:05 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to move cursor
to the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to
previous step.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 220 SECONDARY STATION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-78 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[302] PICKUP GROUPS
Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 99
pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can
only be in one pickup group at any given time.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 302.
Display shows:
[201] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:NONE
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:NONE
Use Volume button to select station number and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:??
3) Dial pickup group number.(e.g., 05)
OR
[205] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:05
Press Volume button to select group number.
4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to
enter more stations.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-79
[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to and
including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and
including four BOSS stations.
CONDITIONS
A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone(s).
A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone.
A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another boss.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 303.
Display shows:
BOSS STN:NONE
SECR 1:NONE
2) Dial BOSS station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:NONE
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.
3) Dial SECRETARY number.(1, 2, 3 or 4)
OR
BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:NONE
Press Volume button to select number and press
Right Soft button.
4) Dial SECRETARY station number.(e.g., 201)
OR
BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:201
Press Volume button to select station.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to
enter more SECR numbers.
BOSS STN:205
SECR 2:202
5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and
continue entries.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-80 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
Allows trunk use groups on a per-station use group basis the ability to answer incoming
calls, to dial out or to do both.
CONDITIONS
Stations are set within the use group number 001~300 and trunks are within the use
group number 301~500 at ‘MMC 614. ASSIGN USE GROUP’.
If a station is set to NO Dial, the station will not have the ability to place a call.
If the station is set to NO Answer, the station cannot answer an incoming call.
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES
ANS: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 304.
Display shows:
(001) USE (301)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
2) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 005)
OR
(005) USE (301)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Press Volume button to select station use group
and press Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all station use
(ALL) USE (301)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Group.
3) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 304)
OR
(005) USE (304)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Press Volume button to select trunk use group
and press Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunk use
(005) USE (ALL)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Group.
4) Press Volume button to select YES/NO option.
OR
(005) USE (304)
DIAL:NO ANS:YES
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right
Soft button to move cursor to ANS option.
Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option.
OR
(005) USE (304)
DIAL:NO ANS:YES
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-81
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 313 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 318 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-82 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE
This MMC allows only one of the four options to be selected; the assignment of account
code with verification, account code without verification, authorization codes, or none on a
per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authorization codes.
The system supports 999 account codes that are verified when account codes verified is
selected. If account codes without verification is selected, then there will be no table used.
No Type Description
0 NONE No Account or Authorization code required(NOT forced strictly
voluntary).
1 AUTHORIZE CODE Forces user to enter a valid over four digit Authorization code
listed in AUTHORIZATION CODE Table(MMC 707).
2 ACCT VERIFIED Forces user to enter a valid account code listed in ACCOUNT
CODE Table(MMC 708).
3 ACCT NO VERIFIED Forces user to enter an account code but this code is NOT
verified. User can make up any code(any account code up to
12 digits including ∗ and #).
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 305.
Display shows:
[201] FORCD CODE
NONE
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] FORCD CODE
NONE
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial a feature option 0-3.(e.g., 2)
OR
[205] FORCD CODE
ACCT VERIFIED
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE
MMC 708 ACCOUNT CODE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-83
[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
Allows a station the ability to make a predetermined call similar to a ring down circuit,
upon the expiration of a timer(see MMC 502 STN TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer).
CONDITIONS
The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an
external number.
There can be a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for the external number.
The access code for the trunk or trunk group access code is not counted as part of the 18.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
B Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
C Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
D Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
E Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 306.
Display shows:
[201] HOT LINE
NONE
2) Dial station number.
OR
[205] HOT LINE
NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through stations.
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Enter the hot line destination i.e. a station or
trunk ID(e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of
[205] HOT LINE
9-1305P4264100_
18 outgoing digits after the access code for
the CO call. (see above list of options if needed)
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 502 STN TIMERS, OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-84 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
Assigns a background music source to the phones. There are 6 possible music selections
depending on the number of MISC(daughter) boards that are installed in the system.
CONDITIONS
You may also select an Auto Attendant(AA) port to provide continuous play of a
specific recording. The AA port selected must be the last port on the card. If selected,
the BGM source will be the message defined in MMC 739 from the port defined in this
MMC.
For example, if this MMC selects 201’s music source as 3966(the last port on the
second AA card) and MMC 739 selects Message 20 for the second AA card, when
extension 201 is placed on hold, 201 will hear message 20 from the second installed
AA card.
If you have a SVMi Voice Mail System installed you may also select a SVMi
recording as a music. The recording must already been defined in MMC 756 and will
show up here as the SVMi port assigned with the recording.
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the terminal box to
the external sound source of the MISC card. If ‘NONE’ is set for background music or
if a sound source is not connected to the external sound source port designated as the
background music source, music will not be played even if the background music
function is enabled.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 308.
Display shows current setting.
[201] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:NONE
2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through phone
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:?
3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)
OR
[205] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:371
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-85
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
MMC 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-86 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
Assigns a Music on Hold source to the phones. Any BGM source may be selected. Only
one external music source is provided per MISC(daughter) board.
CONDITIONS
In addition to TONE or a music a source from a MISC daughter board, you may also
select an AA port to provide continuous play of a specific recording. The AA port
selected must be the last port on the card. If selected, the Music on Hold will be the
message defined in MMC 739 from the port defined in this MMC.
For example, if this MMC selects 201 music source as 3966(the last port on the second
AA card) and MMC 739 selects Message 20 for the second AA card, when extension
201 is placed on hold, 201 will hear Message 20 from the second installed AA card.
If you have a SVMi Voice Mail System installed you may also select a SVMi
recording as a music. The recording must already been defined in MMC 756 and will
show up here as the SVMi port assigned with the recording.
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the terminal box to
the external sound source of the MISC card.
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 309.
Display shows current setting:
[201] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:NONE
2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:?
3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)
OR
[205] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:371
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-87
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
MMC 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-88 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station/per-trunk basis. There are eight
classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to trunk advance
up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
LEAST COST ROUTING COS: 1
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 310.
Display shows:
[201] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 1
2) Dial station/trunk number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 1
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select All stations.
[ALL] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS ?
3) Dial 1-8 to select class type.(e.g., 3)
OR
[205] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 3
Press Volume button to select class type and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-89
[312] ALLOW CALLER ID
Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be sent or
displayed at with LCD phones.
Option Description
RCV Set whether to display CID.
SEND Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
RCV: YES
SND: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 312.
Display shows:
[201] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
3) Dial 0 or 1 to select receive option.
OR
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
Press Volume button to select receive option and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Dial 0 or 1 to select send option.
OR
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
Press Volume button to select send option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
MMC 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-90 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[313] COPY STN/TRK USE
Provides a tool for duplicating station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station
user group to another. This can be done on a per-station use group basis or on all station use
groups.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 313.
Display shows:
(001)COPY USABLE
FROM:NONE
2) Enter station use group number.(e.g., 005)
OR
(005)COPY USABLE
FROM:NONE
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter station use group number to copy from
Cursor is returned to step 2.
(005)COPY USABLE
FROM:003
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 318 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-91
[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
Allows the outgoing call restricted by call duration time, disconnect or confirm with tone.
No Type Description
0 NONE No action
1 CONFIRM TONE When a Trunk Line confirms tone time expiration, a call user
heard system confirmation tone and next a Trunk Line confirms
tone time started.
2 DISCONNECT When a Trunk Line confirm tone time expire, a call is
disconnected.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 314.
Display shows:
[201] CO CONFIRM
NONE
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] CO CONFIRM
NONE
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] CO CONFIRM
NONE
3) Dial a feature option 0-2.
OR
[205] CO CONFIRM
CONFIRM TONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM WIDE TIMER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-92 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[315] BRANCH GROUP
Allows the assignment of stations into branch groups. There is a maximum of 99 branch
groups. When CO ring is ringing at station assigned the same branch group can answer the
incoming call by off hook.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 315.
Display shows:
[201] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:NONE
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:NONE
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:??
3) Dial a branch group number.(01-99)
OR
[205] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:10
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-93
[316] DISTINCTIVE RINGING
Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific
station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. There is also a cadence control option to
perform a similar function for single line sets. There are eight ring tones available along
with a Follow Station(NO) option for the phones. There are 5 cadences and a follow station
option for SLT’s.
It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a
specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. When calls into station group
come and group members are all busy, the system will assign a priority to a specific station
or a specific trunk so that calls from a high priority call will be placed at the front of the
group queue. If this option sets NO, the longest call that placed at the group queue has the
highest priority. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the
lowest.
Option No Description
Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency. TONE
Option 1~8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring phones with this ring
frequency.
Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.
1 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the intercom ring
cadence.
2 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the CO ring
cadence.
3 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the DOOR ring
cadence.
4 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the ALARM ring
cadence.
CADENCE
Option
5 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the CALLBACK
ring cadence.
CONDITIONS
Rings of digital phones are distinguished by their tone. If the T(TONE) of the
originating internal/external station is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the
‘MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE’ of the terminating station. If the T is set to 1-8, the
bell rings according to the designated ring tone.
Rings of common phones are distinguished by their ringing interval. If the
C(CADENCE) of the originating internal/external station is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings
according to the interval of ‘MMC 510 SLI RING CADENCE’ for each originating
station type. If the C is set to 1-5, the bell rings according to the interval set at ‘MMC
510 SLI RING CADENCE’ regardless of the originating station type.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-94 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
DEFAULT DATA
T: NO FOLLOW STATION SETTING
C: NO FOLLOW STATION SETTING
PRI: NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 316.
Display shows first station:
[201] RING TONE
T:NO C:NO PRI:NO
2) Dial trunk or station number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] RING TONE
T:NO C:NO PRI:NO
Press Volume button to select trunk or station
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1-8 to select ring tone.
OR
[705] RING TONE
T:5 C:NO PRI:NO
Press Volume button to select ring tone and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence.
OR
[705] RING TONE
T:5 C:3 PRI:NO
Press Volume button to select ring cadence and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.
(1-9 or NO)
[705] RING TONE
T:5 C:3 PRI:NO
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-95
[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
This MMC is used to allow or restrict stations from making intercom calls to each other
within the same tenant.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 317.
Display shows:
(001) USE (001)
DIAL:YES
2) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 005)
OR
(005) USE (001)
DIAL:YES
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all station use
(ALL) USE (001)
DIAL:YES
Groups.
3) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 004)
OR
(005) USE (004)
DIAL:YES
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.
4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
(005) USE (004)
DIAL:NO
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 313 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 318 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-96 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[318] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to each other
within the same system.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 318.
Display shows:
(301) USE (301)
DIAL:YES
2) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 305)
OR
(305) USE (301)
DIAL:YES
Press Volume button to selection and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunk use groups.
(ALL) USE (301)
DIAL:YES
3) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 304)
OR
(305) USE (304)
DIAL:YES
Press Volume button to selection and press Right
Soft button.
4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
(305) USE (304)
DIAL:NO
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 313 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-97
[319] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
Customer Set Relocation allows System Administration level or Technician level access to
relocate or exchange similar stations in the system without wiring changes(see Allow Table
below). This program is a one for one exchange with like stations(e.g., Single line to single
line, 6 button phone to 6 button phone etc.) All individual station assignments such as trunk
ring, station group, station COS, station speed dial, button appearances, etc. will follow the
Customer Set Relocation program. 12 button phones and 24 button phones can be
exchanged. 48 button modules and 64 button modules can also be exchanged. Single line
stations numbers can be exchanged. If incompatible set types are selected the system will
provide an ERROR: NO MATCH message. If 48 or 64 button module units are to be
exchanged the Master assignment must be removed prior to using Customer Set relocation.
If the 48 or 64 button module Master station is not removed the error code ERROR: NOT
ALONE will appear on the LCD display. A station must be in the idle state(on hook) to
perform Customer Set Relocation. If a wired location has a station port connected but no
telephone instrument the Customer Set Relocation program will allow set relocation as
long as the station types are similar.
12 button and 24 button assignments should be taken in consideration when relocating
these types of sets due to the button configurations of the instruments.
If a 12 button set and a 24 button set are exchanged using the Customer Set Relocation
program the first twelve buttons on the 24 button set will have the button programming of
the 12 button set. The 12 button set will then have the programming of the first twelve
buttons of the 24 button set. In other words, when exchanging 12 and 24 button set only the
first twelve buttons will swapped.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-98 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Table 2.1 Customer Set Relocation Allow Table
S/L DS-
6B
DS-
12B
DS-
24B
DS-
48B
DS-
64B
DS-
28B
DS-
18B
DS-
8B
DS-
21D
DS-
14D
DS-
12L
IP-
21D
IP-
14D
IP-
12L
S/L Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
DS-
6B
N Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N
DS-
12B
N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N
DS-
24B
N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N
DS-
48B
N N N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N
DS-
64B
N N N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N
DS-
28B
N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N N
DS-
18B
N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N N
DS-
8B
N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N
DS-
21D
N N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N
DS-
14D
N N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N
DS-
12L
N N N N N N N N N N N Y N N N
IP-
21D
N N N N N N N N N N N N Y Y N
IP-
14D
N N N N N N N N N N N N Y Y N
IP-
12L
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-99
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 319.
Display shows:
SET RELOCATION
EXT_ EXT
2) Enter first station number.(e.g., 202)
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
SET RELOCATION
EXT202 EXT_
3) Enter second station number.(e.g., 210)
Press Right Soft button to enter data.
SET RELOCATE
EXT202 EXT210
4) Display will return to step 1.
Go to step 2.
SET RELOCATION
EXT_ EXT
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-100 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[320] PRESET FWD NO ANSWER
Allows a technician to assign a default destination for FNA to each station on the system.
These destinations may be different for each station or they may be the same. The preset
FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different FNA
destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination will once more be in
effect. Preset Forward No Answer time follows the station no answer forward timer.
Preset forward no answer can be assigned respectively for each type of call.
No Type Description
0 INT Preset forward no answer applies only to intercom call.
1 EXT Preset forward no answer applies only to incoming call.
2 BOTH Preset forward no answer applies to both intercom and incoming call.
When setting PRE FWD BUSY in MMC 210
If MMC 210. PRE FWD BUSY sets ON, the forward busy follows this feature.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 320.
Display shows:
[201] PRESET FNA
NONE OPT:BOTH
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] PRESET FNA
NONE OPT:BOTH
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.
[ALL] PRESET FNA
NONE OPT:BOTH
3) Dial valid number via keypad.
OR
[205] PRESET FNA
202 OPT:BOTH
Press Volume button to select call type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-101
4) Dial call type.(0, 1 or 2)
OR
[205] PRESET FNA
202 OPT:EXT
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 FORWARDING
MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
MMC 502 STATION FWD NO ANS TIMER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-102 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER
Allows a maximum 16 digits number to be entered and associated with a station or trunk
number on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI, the
maximum 16 digits number entered will be the Calling Party Number sent on this outgoing
PRI call. There are 4 tables for system.
In case of empty, system use MMC 405: CO TRUNK NUMBER for the Calling Party
Number.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
EMPTY
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 323.
Display shows:
[201] SEND CLIP
1:
2) Dial extension or trunk number.(e.g., 230)
OR
[230] SEND CLIP
1:
Press Volume button to select extension and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Dial table number.
OR
[230] SEND CLIP
2:
Press Volume button to select table number and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
4) Enter the Calling Party Number.
[230] SEND CLIP
2:3055922900
5) Repeat step 3 & 4 to enter other tables and Calling
Party Numbers.
OR
Repeat steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or trunk
and Calling Party Numbers.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-103
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 427 PRI OPTIONS
MMC 428 BRI OPTIONS
MMC 834 VOIP H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 VOIP SIP OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-104 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[324] SLI2 GAIN CONTROL
Allows gain value of port in SLI2 card. It’s possible to control gain value by each port, but
to enable the gain value, first select gain value and download the gain value.
CONDITIONS
To use this command, 16SLI2 card must be installed.
DEFAULT DATA
-1.5 dB
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 324.
Display shows:
[201] SLI2 GAIN
DOWNLOAD ? NO
2) Dial first port number of SLI2 card.(e.g., 201)
OR
[201] SLI2 GAIN
DOWNLOAD ? NO
Press Volume button to select port number and
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Dial port number to change the gain
OR
[201] SLI2 GAIN
01:-1.5dB -1.5dB
Press Volume button to select port number and
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
4) Dial gain value([0]-[9]: -7 ~ +11 dB)
OR
[201] SLI2 GAIN
01:-1.5dB +1.5dB
Press Volume button to select gain value and
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
5) Dial(00:DOWNLOAD) to save gain value and enabled.
OR
[201] SLI2 GAIN
DOWNLOAD ? NO
Press Volume button to select DOWNLOAD and
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
6) Dial ([0]:NO, [1]:YES) to verify DOWNLOAD
OR
[201] SLI2 GAIN
DOWNLOAD ? YES
Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-105
[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
Assigns several options(listed below) on a per-trunk basis.
No Option Default Description
0 1A2 EMULATION OFF When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations
can participate in a conversation on this trunk by
pressing the trunk key.
1 TRUNK INC DND OFF When this option is set to ON a trunk that is
programmed to ring a specific station(a private line or
DIL) will ring at that station if the station is in DND.
2 TRUNK FORWARD ON When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a
ringing stations call forwarding.
6 EFWD EXT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be
sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.(Station or
Received CLI from Trunk)
7 REPEAT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be
sent to the trunk to trunk call.(Trunk or Received CLI
from Trunk)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 400.
Display show:
[701] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF
Press Volume button to select trunk.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all trunks and press
Right Soft button to move cursor to options.
[ALL] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:?
3) Dial option number from above list.(0-4)
OR
[704] TRK ON/OFF
TRK FORWARD:ON
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-106 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
[704] TRK ON/OFF
TRK FORWARD:OFF
Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
CALL FORWARD
MMC 102 CALL FORWARD
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 502 STATION TIMERS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-107
[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
Used to select the mode of the Trunk line. If the PBX mode is chosen, this allows PBX
access codes to be recognized, thus allowing more complete toll restriction(call barring).
This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNK LINES
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 401.
Display shows:
[701] PBX LINE
CO LINE
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] PBX LINE
CO LINE
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk
numbers and press Right Soft button to move.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] PBX LINE
?
3) Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for Trunk Line.
OR
[704] PBX LINE
PBX LINE
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-108 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE
Used to determine the dialling type of each Trunk line. There are three options:
No Type Description
0 DTMF TYPE Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
1 DIAL PULSE TYPE DIAL PULSE
2 R2MFC TYPE R2- Frequency
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: DTMF
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 402.
Display shows:
[701] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] DIAL TYPE
?
3) Dial 0 for DTMF, 1 for PULSE or 2 for
R2MFC TYPE.
[704] DIAL TYPE
DIAL PULSE TYPE
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 YSTEM TIMERS
MMC 503 RUNK-WIDE TIMERS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-109
[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS
Assigns toll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night
condition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of
service defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table.
The toll classes that are available are listed below with their entry numbers.
No Class Description
0 F-STN Follow station toll restriction
1 CLS-A Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)
2 CLS-B Follow toll class B
3 CLS-C Follow toll class C
4 CLS-D Follow toll class D
5 CLS-E Follow toll class E
6 CLS-F Follow toll class F
7 CLS-G Follow toll class G
8 CLS-H Follow toll class H(All restricted)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: F-STN
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 403.
Display shows:
[701] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F_STN
3) Dial ring plan number(1~6)
OR
[704] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-110 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Enter day toll class.(e.g., 2 for CLS-B)
OR
[704] TOLL CLASS
1:CLS-B 2:F-STN
Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and
use Right Soft button to move the cursor.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to store data and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 SSIGN STATION COS
MMC 507 SSIGN AUTO RING PLAN TIME
MMC 701 SSIGN COS CONTENTS
TOLL RESTRICTION
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
MMC 709 TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-111
[404] TRUNK NAME
Allows an 11-character name to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 404.
Display shows:
[701] TRUNK NAME
2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] TRUNK NAME
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Enter trunk name using the procedure
described above Press Right Soft button to
[704] TRUNK NAME
TELECOMS
return to step 2.
4)
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104 TATION NAME
MMC 405 RUNK NUMBER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-112 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
Allows an 11-digit number to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT NUMBERS
Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a digit. Pressing the
desired key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory number is
426-4100, press the number 4 once to get the number 4. Now press the number 2 once for
number 2. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your number.
When the number you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
number, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the
Volume Down button to move the cursor left. A space can be entered by using
these keys.
COUNT 1 2 3 4 5
DIAL 0 0 < > . )
DIAL 1 1 Space ? , !
DIAL 2 2 A B C @
DIAL 3 3 D E F #
DIAL 4 4 G H I $
DIAL 5 5 J K L %
DIAL 6 6 M N O ^
DIAL 7 7 P Q R S
DIAL 8 8 T U V *
DIAL 9 9 W X Y Z
DIAL * * : = [ ]
The # button can be used for special characters:
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ”, ~.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-113
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 405.
Display shows:
[701] CO TEL NO.
2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] CO TEL NO.
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Enter trunk number using the procedure described
above.
[704] CO TEL NO.
3054264100
4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-114 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are
received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan
destinations are not input the default ring plan is ring plan 1. Station group 500 is default in
Ring Plan 1.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 406.
Display shows:
[701] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all.
[All] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
3) Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to
move the next step.
[704] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
4) Dial station number or station group number.
(e.g., 205)
[704] TRK RING
1:205 2:500
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor to the
next ring plan destination and repeat step 5.
[704] TRK RING
1:205 2:501
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 5.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-115
[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a
trunk lock-up.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 407.
Display shows:
[701] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
2) Dial in trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
Press Volume button selected trunk and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.
[ALL] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
3) Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO.
(Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2)
[704] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-116 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold(MOH) source can be
heard on each trunk. If the trunk AUTO ANSWER function is enabled, this program can be
used for selecting the music source. The trunk AUTO ANSWER function can be enabled
only when the TRK AUTO MOH option of [MMC 210] is set to ON and when the AUTO
ANSWER option of [MMC 400] is set to ON. (If an incoming call adheres to the DID
reception table, the DID DESTINATION must also be set to A.)
In this MMC, you can also assign the sound source when TRUNK AUTO ANSWER
feature is activated.
For the five types of selections, see below :
Type Description
TONE An intermittent tone is played to the caller.
NONE No Music on Hold selection.
37X If X is zero(0), a chime tune is played. If X is another number, an
external source from a MISC(daughter) board is played.
39XX(when AA is used) The MOH source is provided by the AA card. See MMC 739.
SVMi PORT NUMBER If you have a SVMi Voice Mail System installed you may also select a
SVMi recording as a music source. The recording must already been
defined in MMC 756 and will show up here as the SVMi port associated
with the recording.
CONDITIONS
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the terminal box to the
external sound source of the MISC card.
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 408.
Display shows: current setting.
[701] TRK MOH
MOH:TONE AA:TONE
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] TRK MOH
MOH:TONE AA:TONE
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] TRK MOH
MOH:? AA:?
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-117
3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)
OR
[704] TRK MOH
MOH:371 AA:TONE
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
4) Enter AA source number.(e.g., 371)
[704] TRK MOH
MOH:371 AA:371
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-118 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[409] TRUNK STATUS READ
Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to
quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk. This is a read-only MMC.
No Type Description
00 PORT Port Number(Cabinet/Slot/Port)
01 TYPE LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP
02 1A2 EMULATE 1A2 Emulation On/Off
03 TRK FORWARD Trunk Forward On/Off
04 LINE CO/PBX
05 DIAL DTFM/Dial Pulse
06-11 TOLL TYPE 1-6 Ring Plan Toll Restriction(1-6)
12-17 RING PLAN 1-6 Ring Plan Ring Destination(1-6)
18 MOH SOURCE MOH Source
19 DISA LINE DISA Status
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW TRUNK
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 409.
Display shows:
[701] TRK STATUS
PORT:C1-S5-P01
2) Enter trunk number via dial keypad.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] TRK STATUS
PORT:C1-S5-P04
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Enter in desired option 00-12.(e.g., 02)
OR
[704] TRK STATUS
TYPE:LOOP TRUNK
Press Volume button to make selection.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-119
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC 406 TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-120 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
Allows the system the ability to have Direct Inward System Access(DISA).
Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several
safeguards have been added. The end user must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary
service calls. DISA can lockout when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are
attempted. Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired.
CONDITIONS
The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call.
The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office
line. DISA lines must be assigned to the Ring Plan(s).
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 410.
Display shows:
[701] 123456
DISA LINE:000000
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] 123456
DISA LINE:000000
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.
[ALL] 123456
DISA LINE:000000
3) Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.
OR
[704] 123456
DISA LINE:001000
Using the dial pad press 1 to apply and 0 not to apply
to a particular Ring Plan and press Right Soft button
to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLANS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-121
[411] ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
Defines the type of signaling for each E1 trunk assigned to the card. There are four kinds of
trunks as detailed below. There are three types of signaling associated with E & M and DID.
E1 channels(1-30) that are not used should have TYPE programmed as UNUSED.
Trunk Signaling Comments
LOOP BR_14301_NOT
BR_14301_OPT
RU_LOOP
BRAZIL, L, I, ERICSSON, 1/1914, FOR TEST
BRAZIL, L, I, ERICSSON, 2/1914, FOR TEST
RUSSIA, L, I/O, LOOP START
E & M IMMEDIATE
DELAYED
ITU_WINK
ITU_WINK_MPD
BR_CONTINU
BR_PULSED
BR_R2_DIGIT
BR_BLD_160
BR_BLD_157
BR_14102_NOT
BR_14102_OPT
RU_ADSE
RU_HARRIS_UK
RU_USER_ROM
AR_WINK
AR_WINK_MPD
CHINA_NO1
POL_WINK_MPD
COMMON, E/D, I/O, IMMEDIATE START
COMMON, E/D, I/O, DELAY
COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START
COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START WITH MPD
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, CONTINUE
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, PULSED
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, R2 DIGITAL
BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 2/1914, 14102_N
BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 2/1914, 14102_O
BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 1/1914
BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 1/1914
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, PABX
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, HARRIS, PABX, UK_EM
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, USER ROM
ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK
ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK-MPD
CHINA, E/D, I/O, NO.1 OF CHINA
POLAND, E/D, I/O, POLAND WINK MPD
DID
IMMEDIATE
DELAYED
ITU_WINK
ITU_WINK_MPD
BR_CONTINU
BR_PULSED
BR_R2_DIGIT
RU_ADSE
RU_HARRIS_UK
RU_USER_ROM
AR_WINK
AR_WINK_MPD
CHINA_NO1
POL_WINK_MPD
COMMON, E/D, I/O, IMMEDIATE START
COMMON, E/D, I/O, DELAY
COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START
COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START WITH MPD
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, CONTINUE
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, PULSED
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, R2 DIGITAL
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, PABX
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, HARRIS, PABX, UK_EM
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, USER ROM
ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK
ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK-MPD
CHINA, E/D, I/O, NO.1 OF CHINA
POLAND, E/D, I/O, POLAND WINK MPD
UNUSE - -
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-122 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
CONDITIONS
An E1 card must be installed in the OfficeServ 500 system. Otherwise, the ‘NO E1
TRUNK CARD’ message is displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 411.
Display shows:
[701] E1 SIGNAL
UNUSE
2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] E1 SIGNAL
UNUSE
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.
[ALL] E1 SIGNAL
?
3) Press Volume button to trunk type select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[705] E1 SIGNAL
E&M:IMMEDIATE
4) Press Volume button to signaling select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[705] E1 SIGNAL
E&M:ITU_WINK
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
MMC 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS READ
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-123
MMC 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
MMC 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
MMC 413 VMS CALL TYPE
MMC 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
MMC 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
MMC 416 ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN
MMC 418 R2MFC SIGNALING
MMC 419 TRUNK NIGHT GROUP
MMC 420 PRS SIGNAL
MMC 421 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
MMC 422 TRUNK TMC GAIN
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING
MMC 425 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
MMC 426 E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
MMC 427 PRI OPTIONS
MMC 428 BRI OPTIONS
MMC 429 MSN DIGIT
MMC 430 TRUNK COS
MMC 433 COST RATE
MMC 434 CONNECTION STATUS
MMC 436 INSERT DIGIT
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-124 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
Allows for the assignment of analog DID or E & M cards for proper signaling.
This MMC is only for analog types of DID/E & M trunks. These trunks can also use the
translation tables in MMC 714. The signaling condition types are as follows:
No Signaling condition type
0 IMMEDIATE START
1 DELAYED START
2 WINK START
CONDITIONS
An analog E & M/DID Trunk card must be installed in the OfficeServ 500 system.
Otherwise, the ‘NO E & M/DID TRUNK’ message is displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
IMMEDIATE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 412.
Display shows:
[701] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START
2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.
[ALL] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START
3) Enter desired trunk type selection from above list.
OR
[705] TRK SIGNAL
WINK START
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 416 E & M/DID RINGDOWN
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-125
[413] VMS CALL TYPE
Defines the type of signaling for voice mail assigned trunk.
Type Description Default
AP ANSWERING PHONE NO
AT AUDIO TEX NO
AA AUTO ATTENDANT YES
VM VOICE MAIL NO
CONDITIONS
This program needs when VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT(SVM-800) is used.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 413.
Display shows:
[701] CTYPE AP:N
AT:N AA:Y VM:N
2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 702)
OR
[702] CTYPE AP:N
AT:N AA:Y VM:N
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.
3) Enter 1 for YES, or 0 for NO.
OR
[702] CTYPE AP:N
AT:N AA:Y VM:N
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-126 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[414] ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS (Malaysia and Israel Only)
Allows the system administrator or technician to activate analog loop trunk Caller ID on a
per-trunk basis. Activating Caller ID will delay the incoming ring indication at the operator
by two ring cycles to allow for the collection of the calling party data.
Each trunk has the following options:
No Option Description
0 NORMAL This is not a Caller ID trunk.
1 CID TRUNK This is a Caller ID trunk.
Bellcore type data
Supports Bellcore type data only for Caller ID, others type will not supports.
Available in Australia, Israel and Italy only.
CONDITIONS
Before setting CID display, check if the RCM or RCM2 option card is mounted on the
MCP card of the OfficeServ 500 system.
The trunk line must be that of a phone service provider that provides CID.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 414.
Display shows:
[701] CID TRUNKS
NORMAL
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] CID TRUNKS
NORMAL
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] CID TRUNKS
?
3) Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change options.
OR
[705] CID TRUNKS
CID TRUNK
Press Volume button to select an option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[705] CID TRUNKS
CID TRUNK
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-127
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-128 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of
abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CID, CLIP information has been collected on a pertrunk basis. There are two options for this MMC as follows:
No Option Description
0 REPORT: NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID information will not
be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These
records will continue to be stored in the station review list.
1 REPORT: YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID information will be
printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list.
These records will also be stored in the station review list.
CONDITIONS
In order for these abandoned call records to print on SMDR, MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS
Option 11 Print Abandoned Call Records must be set to YES.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS REPORT: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 415.
Display shows:
[701] TRK ABNDN
REPORT:YES
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] TRK ABNDN
REPORT:YES
Use Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
[705] TRK ABNDN
REPORT:NO
Use Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS
MMC 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-129
[416] ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN
This MMC defines which ring destination table an E & M or DID trunk will follow
for incoming calls. There are three options for each trunk as defined below.
No Option Description
0 FOLLOW INCOM DGT When a trunk is set to this option calls will ring at the
destination that matches the digits received from the Trunk line.
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS When a trunk is set to this option calls will ring at the
destination defined in MMC 714 that matches the digits
received from the TRUNK LINE
2 FOLLOW TRK RING If this option is selected, press the Right Soft button and ‘NO.
RCV DIGIT’: will appear on the display. Here is where the
number of incoming digits from Trunk Line must be entered
(0 through 4). When a trunk is set to this option calls will ring at
the destination defined in MMC 406 for that trunk. If the
destination defined in MMC 406 is a VMAA port or group then
the system will repeat the digits received from the CO to the
port when it answers.
CONDITIONS
R2MFC trunk lines only support the ‘FOLLOW INCOM DGT’ and ‘FOLLOW DID
TRANS’ options.
DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW INCOMING DIGIT
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 416.
Display shows:
[701] EM/DD RING
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] EM/DD RING
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.
[ALL] EM/DD RING
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
3) Dial option number.(0~2)
OR.
[705] EM/DD RING
NO. RCV DIGIT:00
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return step 2.
If the FOLLOW TRK RING is selected, the
LCD display shows step 4.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-130 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Enter the number of incoming digits. [705] EM/DD RING
NO. RCV DIGIT:00
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-131
[418] R2MFC SIGNALING
Use this MMC to program each trunk’s R2MFC signal procedure.
Below explain the meaning of each option;
No Option Description
0 CLG CLS REQ Calling Party Class Request Option about called party wants to ask
calling party class or not
1 CLG NUM REQ Calling Party Number Request Option about called party wants to ask
calling party Identification(tel. Number)
2 CLD STS RESP Called Party status Response Option about called party wants to send
his status or not for calling party’s class request
3 CLG CLS RESP Calling Party Class Response Option about calling party wants to
send his class or not for called party’s class request
4 CLG NUM RESP Calling Party Number Response Option about calling party wants to
reply to called party’s calling party number request or not
5 CLD STS REQ Called Party Status Request Option about calling party wants to ask
called party’s status or not
6 CLG EXT RESP Calling Party wants to send his Extension number or not for Called
Party’s Calling Party Number Request
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
CLG CLS REQ: ON
CLG NUM REQ: OFF
CLD STS RESP: ON
CLG CLS RESP: ON
CLG NUM RESP: ON
CLD STS REQ: ON
CLG EXT RESP: OFF
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-132 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 418.
Display shows:
[701] R2MFC SIG
CLG CLS REQ :ON
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] R2MFC SIG
CLG CLS REQ :ON
Press UP or DOWN to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all.
[ALL] R2MFC SIG
CLG CLS REQ :ON
3) Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[701] R2MFC SIG
CLG NUM REQ :ON
4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select ON/OFF and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-133
[419] TRUNK NIGHT GROUP
Allows the assignment of trunks to NIGHT group. When night start time is different from
each other office, they can change the RING PLAN mode of the CO line. There are 10
night groups.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 419.
Display shows:
[701] NIGHT GRP
NIGHT GRP :NONE
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] NIGHT GRP
NIGHT GRP :NONE
Press UP or DOWN to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter in valid group(0-9)
OR
[704] NIGHT GRP
NIGHT GRP :5
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
[ALL] NIGHT GRP
NIGHT GRP :?
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-134 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[420] PRS SIGNAL
Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse(MPD) or
a Polarity Reversal Signal(PRS) trunk.
A Meter Pulse Trunk will detect a C.O provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will
detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line When the other
party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call.
There are three types of PRS mode: PRS 1, PRS 2 and PRS 3.
Type Description
PRS 1 When first PRS is detected, call duration is started. When second PRS is detected,
call duration timer stopped. The call is not released until hanging-on.
PRS 2 When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is
detected, call duration timer is stopped and call is released.
PRS 3 The call duration timer starts based on the timer. When first PRS is detected, call
duration timer is stopped and call is released.
CONDITIONS
If the trunk is designated as PRS detection, the call duration timer will be started and
the results printed on the SMDR record.
PRS detection is also essential for dropping a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is
unsupervised by an internal party.
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL(NONE)
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 420.
Display shows:
[701] TRK PRS
NONE
2) Dial desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] TRK PRS
NONE
Press Volume button to select trunk and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3 or 3
for MPD or 4 for NORMAL.
[705] TRK PRS
PRS 2
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through options and
use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-135
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-136 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[421] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per trunk basis. There are two adjustments available
in this MMC. ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the
receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk. See the Trunk Gain Setting Tables for
level option definitions.
There are four types of adjustments as shown below:
No Trunk Gain Description
0 +0.0 No adjustment
1 +1.9 Up 1.9 dB
2 -6.0 Down 6.0 dB
3 -2.5 Down 2.5 dB
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
TX: +0.0
RX: +0.0
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 421.
Display shows:
[701] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
2) Enter desired trunk number(e.g., 705)
via the dial pad.
[705] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[705] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
4) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor and
[701] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5
return to step 1.
5) Press ANS/RLS button to select all. [ALL] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-137
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-138 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[422] TRUNK TMC GAIN
Allows loss levels of TMC for analog trunks to be adjusted on a per trunk basis. There are
two adjustments available in this MMC. ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk
to the station. ‘RX’ is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk.
CONDITIONS
This MMC works with 8TRK card only.
This MMC is not to correct low volume. To be used with the support of Samsung
Electronics Co. local distributor.
DEFAULT DATA
TX: +0 dB
RX: +0 dB
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 422.
Display shows:
[701] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
2) Enter desired trunk number(e.g., 705) via the
dial pad.
[705] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
3) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[705] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
4) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor and
[701] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:-2 dB
return to step 2.
5)
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-139
[423] S/T MODE
Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port.
No Type Description
0 TRUNK The BRI trunk port use ISDN trunk.
1 STATION The BRI trunk port use for ISDN phone.
CONDITIONS
The BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is
displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 423.
Display shows first BRI:
[725] S/T MODE
TRUNK
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 727)
OR
[727] S/T MODE
TRUNK
Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] S/T MODE
TRUNK
3) Enter Circuit type.
OR
[727] S/T MODE
STATION
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 424 S0 MAPPING
MMC 425 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
MMC 428 BRI OPTION
MMC 429 MSN DIGIT
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-140 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[424] BRI S0 MAPPING
This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the BRI card is installed in the system.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 424.
Display shows first terminal number:
[8701]S0 MAPPING
NONE
2) Dial terminal number.
OR
[8704]S0 MAPPING
NONE
Press Volume button to make selection of terminal
numbers and press Right Soft button to advance
cursor.
3) Dial BRI port number.
OR
[8704]S0 MAPPING
712
Use Volume button to scroll through ports and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 428 BRI OPTION
MMC 423 S/T MODE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-141
[425] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
This MMC is used to restart a BRI and a PRI card at the card level. This action is required
to update the processor on the BRI and PRI card to any changes in the card setup MMC’s
and to put these changes into effect.
CONDITIONS
A BRI card or TEPRI card must be installed in the system.
Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI board must be set ‘ON’ to
PRI mode.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 425.
Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit:
[725] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
2) Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card.(e.g., 733)
OR
[733] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
Press Volume button to select the first trunk
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO.
Pressing 1 will advance to step 4.
[733] RESTART
CARD RESTART?YES
4) Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO.
Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2.
[733] RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?YES
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 428 BRI OPTIONS
MMC 427 PRI OPTIONS
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-142 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[426] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking.
CONDITIONS
It is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only PCM30
framing.
After changing this option, MMC 425 must be used to restart the card to make the
change effective.
DEFAULT DATA
CRC4: ON
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 426.
Display shows:
[701] E1/PRI CRC
ON
2) Enter first trunk number in PRI card.(e.g 701)
OR
[701] E1/PRI CRC
ON
Press Volume button to select trunk and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF.
OR
[701] E1/PRI CRC
OFF
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 425 CARD RESTART
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-143
[427] PRI OPTIONS
This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk board.
No Option Description
0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to
NO, you will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy
channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free.
PRI MODE PRI access mode select.
NORMAL Point to Point NORMAL. This operates like a standard telephone line
with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.
1
DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an
analog DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel
and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.
DLSEND PRI dial sending mode select.
ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cell phone.
2
OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialed by the user.
3 CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. In case
of NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network. In
other cases, MMC 323 Calling Party Number entry corresponding with
the selected number is sent to the network.
NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.
UNKNOWN Unknown number
INT.NAT International number
NATIONAL National number
NETWORK Network specific number
SUBSCRIB Subscriber number
EXTEN Local number
4
ABBREV Abbreviated number
NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the
network.
UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan
ISDN ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)
DATA Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)
TELEX Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)
NATIONAL National standard numbering plan
PRIVATE Private numbering plan
5
EXTEN Local numbering plan
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-144 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Option Description
6 CLIR w NUMB When this option is set to ON, the CLIP number is sent to the network
even though the CLIP restriction flag is set.
0. OFF
1. ON
CONDITIONS
Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI board must be set to ‘ON’
for PRI mode.
After changing this program, execute ‘MMC 425 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART’ to
apply the new setting.
DEFAULT DATA
CHANNEL ANY: YES
PRI MODE: DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE: NONE
NB TYPE: UNKNOWN
NB PLAN: UNKNOWN
CLIR w NUMB: OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 427.
Display shows:
[701] PRI OPTION
CHANNEL ANY:YES
2) Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 730)
OR
[730] PRI OPTION
CHANNEL ANY:YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
3) Enter option number to make selection.
OR
[730] PRI OPTION
PRI MODE:DDI
Press Volume button to make selection.
4) Press Volume button to make selection.
Then press Right Soft button.
[730] PRI OPTION
PRI MODE:NORMAL
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-145
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 425 CARD RESTART
MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-146 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[428] BRI OPTIONS
Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis and there are different options depending on
whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423.
OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS
No Option Description
0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to
NO, you will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy
channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.
BRI MODE BRI access mode select.
P-P NOR Point to Point Normal. This operates like a standard telephone line with
one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.
P-P DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an
analog DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel
and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.
P-M NOR Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar
manner to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the
circuit. Ringing is defined in MMC 406.
1
P-M MSN Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the
MSN supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 429.
DLSEND BRI dial sending mode select.
ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cell phone.
2
OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialed by the user.
3 CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. In case
of NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network. In
other cases, MMC 323 Calling Party Number entry corresponding with
the selected number is sent to the network.
NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.
UNKNOWN Unknown number
INT.NAT International number
NATIONAL National number
NETWORK Network specific number
SUBSCRIB Subscriber number
EXTEN Local number
4
ABBREV Abbreviated number
NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the
network.
5
UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-147
(Continued)
No Option Description
ISDN ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)
DATA Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)
TELEX Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)
NATIONAL National standard numbering plan
PRIVATE Private numbering plan
5
EXTEN Local numbering plan
6 CLIR w NUMB When this option is set to ON, the CLIP number is sent to the network
even though the CLIP restriction flag is set.
0. OFF
1. ON
OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS
No Option Description
0 ANY CHANNEL When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy(e.g.,
Preferred channel selection). If set to NO, the user will receive a busy
signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel
on that BRI is free(e.g., Exclusive channel selection).
1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied.
(YES or NO)
CONDITIONS
A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message
is displayed.
If any changes are made in this MMC, the BRI card that is affected by these changes
MUST be restarted using MMC 425 in order for the changes to become effective.
DEFAULT DATA
For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks:
CHANNEL ANY: YES
BRI MODE: P-P DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE: NONE
NB TYPE: UNKNOWN
NB PLAN: UNKNOWN
CLIR w NUMB: OFF
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-148 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
For BRI Ports programmed as Stations:
CHANNEL ANY : YES
POWER FEED : NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 428.
Display shows first BRI channel.
[725] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:YES
2) Dial BRI trunk number.(e.g., 727)
OR
[727] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:YES
Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and
press Right Soft button.
3) Select option item.
OR
[727] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:NO
Press Volume button to select option item and
Press Right Soft button. [727] BRI-TRK
BRI MODE:P-M MSN
[727] BRI-TRK
DLSEND :OVERLAP
[727] BRI-TRK
CLIP TABLE :NONE
[727] BRI-TRK
NB TYPE:UNKNOWN
4) Select option.
OR
[727] BRI-TRK
CLIP TABLE:1
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button.
5) Dial BRI station number.(e.g., 729)
OR
[729] BRI-STN
CHANNEL ANY:YES
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button.
6) Select option item.
OR
[729] BRI-STN
CHANNEL ANY:YES
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button. [729] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :NO
7) Select option.
OR
[729] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :YES
Press Volume button to select option item and
press Right Soft button.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-149
8) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 425 CARD RESTART
MMC 429 MSN DIGITS
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-150 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[429] MSN DIGIT
Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in
MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number,
either the specific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is
cleared if it is programmed to reject the call.
If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table,
MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is released by option.
You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select call waiting option:
when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the
station(which is alerted to the call).
There is a total of eight entries on a trunk basis and each entry consists of the following fields:
Field Description
DIGIT Digits to be received. There is a maximum of 12 digits
RING 1-6 These numbers correspond to the six ring plan destinations for this MSN.
The destinations can be either stations or station groups.
CALL WAIT Toggles YES or NO: if YES then the call will be camped-on at busy destination
while NO gives busy indication.
OPTION if Accept then the selected destination party will be alerted. If Reject then the call
will be cleared.
CONDITIONS
A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message
is displayed.
For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value
for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-151
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 429.
Display shows:
[701] MSN DGT (1)
DGT:
2) Enter trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] MSN DGT (1)
DGT:
Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN
PORT and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter the location 1-8.(e.g., 4)
OR
[704] MSN DGT (4)
DGT:
Press Volume button to select location and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 4603881) via
dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move
[704] MSN DGT (4)
DGT:4603881
to the destination selection.(Max. Digit is 12)
5) Enter destinations for 6 ring plan via dial
keypad.(e.g., 204 for ring plan 1)
[704] MSN DGT (4)
1:204 2:NONE
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
6) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
[704] MSN DGT (4)
CW:NO OPT:ACEPT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
7) Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT.
OR
[704] MSN DGT (4)
CW:NO OPT:ACEPT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
8) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 428 BRI OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-152 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[430] TRUNK COS
Used to assign a class of service to each trunk during one of the 6 different ring plans
available. There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701 Assign
COS Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on Tandem
connections.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS COS 01
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 430.
Display shows first trunk:
[701] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and
press Left Soft button to advance step 4.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.
[ALL] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
3) Enter day class of service.(e.g., 05)
OR
[705] TRK COS
1:05 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to advance
step 4.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Enter the next ring plan class of service. (e.g., 05)
OR
[705] TRK COS
1:05 2:05 03:01
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to return to
step 2.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to the
previous step.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-153
5) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLANS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-154 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[433] COST RATE
In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk.
DIAL PLANs are defined in MMC 748 Costing Dial Plan. RATE CALCULATION
TABLES are defined in MMC 749. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates.
Enter one or more of the eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call
costing will be calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN.
Call type 8 is fixed for incoming. Apply a cost rate under type 8 only to a trunk if you want
incoming call costing.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS NO COST RATE ASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 433.
Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate
[701] :12345678
CR :00000000
table numbers:
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
[705] :12345678
CR :00000000
Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right
Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all.
3) Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until
the cursor is under the Cost Rate mark.(e.g., 2)
[701] :12345678
CR :01000000
Enter 1 for YES or O for NO and press Right Soft
button to return to step 1.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN
MMC 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-155
[434] CONNECTION STATUS
This read only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks.
Display status actually displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested.
If a conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station the display will show one of
the conference parties and an arrow( ). The technician or system administrator can then
display the next parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state the display
will show ‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection the display will
show ‘INVALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU the display will
show ‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display
will show ‘BUSY’ only.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
Display trunk connection status
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display show connection status:
DISPLAY STATUS
702 227
3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
DISPLAY STATUS
702 227
Press Transfer button to exit.
Display station connection status
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display show connection status.
DISPLAY STATUS
235 715
3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
DISPLAY STATUS
235 715
Press Transfer button to exit.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-156 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Display trunk status in conference
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display shows connection status:
DISPLAY STATUS
702 227 ,215
3) Press Right Soft button to display the next
station or trunks involved.
DISPLAY STATUS
702 216
4) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
DISPLAY STATUS
216 702 ,227
Press Transfer button to exit.
Display status no connection
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display show connection status.
DISPLAY STATUS
702 NONE
3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
DISPLAY STATUS
702 NONE
Press Transfer button to exit.
Display status no connection
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
2) Enter invalid station or trunk number.
Display show INVALID DATA:
DISPLAY STATUS
INVALID DATA
3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
Press Transfer button to exit.
Display connection status with invalid trunk
or station number
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
2) Enter invalid station or trunk number
Display show INVALID DATA:
DISPLAY STATUS
INVALID DATA
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-157
3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
Press Transfer button to exit.
Display connection status with trunk or station
number in maintenance busy
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display show connection status:
DISPLAY STATUS
725 MADE BUSY
3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
DISPLAY STATUS
725 MADE BUSY
Press Transfer button to exit.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 108 STATION STATUS
MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-158 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[436] INSERT DIGIT
This MMC is used to tandem switching. For tandem switching, there is a need to more
digits than received digits from DID or E & M trunk. In this MMC, the inserted digits can
be assigned per trunk bases.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 436.
Display shows:
[701] INSERT DGT
NONE
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 702)
OR
[702] INSERT DGT
NONE
Press UP or DOWN to select trunk.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial maximum 4 digit and press Right Soft button
to store.
[702] INSERT DGT
67
4) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-159
[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief
description of each.
No Counter Default Description
0 ALARM REM.
CNTER
5 The number of times that an alarm reminder will
ring a station before cancelling. RANGE = 1-99.
1 AUTO RDL
COUNTER
3 The number of times the system will redial an
outside number after the auto redial feature has
been activated. RANGE = 1-99.
2 DISA CALL CNTER 99 Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that
can be made after accessing a DISA line.
RANGE = 1-99.
3 DISA LOCK CNTER 3 Number of attempts the system will allow to
incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out
the DISA line. RANGE = -99
4 NEW CALL
COUNTER
99 Number of times the system will allow a user to
signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call.
RANGE = 1-99.
5 UCDS VISUAL
ALARM
0 Used to set the Visual alarm threshold. It is
triggered when the number of calls waiting to be
answered in the UCD group reaches this value.
RANGE = 0-25.
6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 Used to set the Audio alarm threshold. It is
triggered when the number of calls waiting to be
answered in the UCD group reaches this value.
RANGE = 0-25.
7 UCD CS LEVEL 1 0 Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of
calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches
this value. RANGE = 0-25.
8 UCD CS LEVEL 2 0 Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of
calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches
this value. RANGE = 0-25.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-160 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 500.
Display shows:
ALARM REM.CNTER
05
2) Enter number from above list.(e.g., 6)
OR
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
00
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter in new value via dial keypad.
If entry is valid, system will return to step 2.
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
00 02
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-161
[501] SYSTEM TIMERS
Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary.
TIMER TABLE
Timer Name Default Range Unit Description
AA INT DGT TIME 5 1-25 SEC When the AA card is installed, this timer
determines the inter digit time for AA call
processing. If this timer expires before valid
digits are received by the AA card, the call will
be routed to the AA invalid digits destination.
AA NO ACT TIME 10 1-25 SEC When the AA card is installed, this timer
determines the time that the AA card will wait
for a first digit for AA call processing. If this
timer expires before a digit is received, the
call will be routed to the AA no action
destination.
AA TRANS TIME 2 0-25 SEC After this timer, the system will compare
received digits from AA card with the AA
translation table entry and transfer to the
proper destination.
ALARM TIME 100 0-2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start
ringing after the alarm key has been silenced.
ALERT TONE TIME 1000 100-2500
MSEC
This timer sets the duration of the attention
tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice
Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone
will also precede a forced Auto Answer call.
ALM REM.INTERVAL 25 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time length between
ring attempts at a station when alarm
reminder is set.
ALM REM RING OFF 10 1-25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle
duration when alarm reminder is set at a
station.
ATT. RECALL TIME 30 0-250 SEC This is the length of time a transfer recall will
ring at a station before recalling the operator.
AUTO REDIAL INT. 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts
after RETRY dialling is set on a station.
AUTO REDIAL RLS. 45 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No
Answer condition on a retry number dialed
before the auto redial is automatically cancelled.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-162 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Timer Name Default Range Unit Description
CALLBACK NO ANS 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before the
callback is automatically cancelled when a
callback detects Ring No Answer.
CAMP ON RECALL 30 0-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a
camped-on call will stay at a destination
before recalling to the transferring station.
CID MSG RECEIVE 6 1-25 SEC The amount of time that the system will
allow a valid message from the analog CID
trunk.
CID DSP ALLOC TM 500 0-900 MS The delay time that allocate the CID
receiver after trunk incoming detection
CID DISPLAY TIME 5 1-25 SEC The amount of time that the Caller ID
information remains on the phone’s display.
CO CONFIRM TIME 3 0-250 MIN According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type,
the outgoing call will be disconnected after
this timer or the outgoing caller will hear the
confirm tone every this time.
CO-CO
DISCONNECT
20 1-250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an
unsupervised conference; when it expires,
both trunks are disconnected.
CONFIRM TONE TM 1000 100-2500
MSEC
The tone heard when a feature is activated
or deactivated.
CRD TONE INT TM 30 0-250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time.
An entry other than zero will cause a tone to be
heard by all the parties in a recorded
conversation. The range for the tone is
001(every second) to 255(every 255 seconds).
A value of 000 means no tone. Requires SVMi
card.
DIAL PASS TIME 3 0-25 SEC This timer monitors the duration of time
before connecting the transmit of the phone
to the trunk side of an outgoing call.
DISA DISCONNECT 30 1-250 MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a
DISA call.
DISA LOCK OUT TM 30 1-250 MIN This timer controls the duration of time a
DISA call is not allowed to be made after
the DISA error counter has expired(MMC
500).
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-163
(Continued)
Timer Name Default Range Unit Description
DISA NOANS DISC. 30 0-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a
DISA call is disconnected by force when
called party does not answer.
DISA PASS CHECK 30 1-250 MIN This timer defines the time period before
the system clears the incorrect passcode
counter.
DISPLAY DELAY TM 2 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration a display is
shown in the LCD display. This timer also
controls the duration of time that error tone is
heard.
DOOR LOCK
RELES.
500 100-2500
MSEC
This timer controls the duration of time the
door lock relay will be activated.
DOOR RING
DETECT
50 10-250
MSEC
This timer controls the duration of time
before a call is answered by the door
phone.
DOOR RING OFF TM 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at
the door ring destination before
automatically cancelling.
E-HOLD RECALL TM 45 0-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a
call is held exclusively at a station before
recalling.
FIRST DIGIT TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls how long the system will
wait for dialling to begin before dropping
the dial tone and returning the you to error
tone.
HOK FLASH MAX TM 800 20-2500
MSEC
This timer monitors the duration of a hook
switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid
and not a line noise or an accidental
hookswitch bounce LONGEST duration.
HOK FLASH MIN TM 350 20-2500
MSEC
This timer monitors the duration of a
hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is
valid and not a line noise or an accidental
hookswitch bounce SHORTEST duration.
HOOK OFF TIME 100 20-2500
MSEC
This timer controls the time before dial tone
is sent to a single line station.
HOOK ON TIME 1000 20-2500
MSEC
This timer sets the minimum amount of
time that the system will recognize as an
SLT hang up.
INQUIRY RELEASE 30 1-250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the
interaction of the Soft button to determine
when to return the LCD back to a normal
status. This timer affects only display
phones.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-164 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Timer Name Default Range Unit Description
INTER DIGIT TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period
between dialling valid digits before
dropping the call and returning you back to
error tone.
ISDN INT DGT TM 7 1-15 SEC This timer controls the grace period
between dialling valid digits and the end of
the dialling string on an ISDN call.
KMMC LOCK OUT
TM
60 10-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between
programming actions while in a programming
session. The timer automatically returns the
system to secure programming status.
LCR ADVANCE
TIME
5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time
before selecting the next allowable route
when a station is allowed to route advance.
LCR INTER DIGIT 5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between
dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk.
LONG KEY DETECT 600 0-2500 MSEC This timer controls the time a key must be held
down before the key press is repeated.
LONG KEY REPEAT 300 0-2500 MSEC This timer controls the time between
repeated digits on a long key press.
MS LED ON TIME 10 1-10 SEC This timer controls the duration a Manual
Signaling key will remain on after use.
OFF HOOK RING
INT
15 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time
between ring bursts to a user who has a
camped-on call.
OHVA ANSWER
TIME
10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time duration of an
OHVA call before automatic rejection.
PAGE TIME OUT 20 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page
announcement.
PAGE TONE TIME 500 100-2500
MSEC
This timer controls the duration of tone
burst heard over the page prior to the page
announcement.
PARK RECALL TIME 45 0-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a
call is parked before recalling to the call
park originator.
PC-MMC LOCK
TIME
5 1-60 MIN This timer monitors the PCMMC activity,
drops the link if no action is created by
PCMMC and returns the system back to
secure program status.
PERI UCD REPORT 5 3-99 SEC This timer is the interval that a periodic
UCD report is provided to an SIO port.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-165
(Continued)
Timer Name Default Range Unit Description
POWER DOWN
TIME
2000 500-9900
MSEC
This timer monitors the power to the ROM
pack to begin shutdown status.
R2MFC INCOM
TIME
14 10-30 SEC This timer controls the duration of waiting
R2MFC signal before being made error
status in case of R2MFC incoming call.
R2MFC INTER TIME 2500 2000-7000
MSEC
After this time, the system decides the user
finishes his/her dialling and processing
next procedure on R2MFC outgoing call.
R2MFC OUTGO
TIME
14 10-30 SEC This timer controls the duration of waiting
R2MFC signal before being made error
status in case of R2MFC outgoing call.
RECALL
DISCONNECT
2 1-250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring
before being disconnected.
RECALL WAIT TIME 15 0-250 SEC This is the time any recall(hold or transfer)
continues to recall at your station before it
recalls to the operator.
ROUTE OPTIMIZE 5 0-250 SEC When the call is made via Q-SIG signaling, the
route optimization is activated after this time.
SMDR START/DP 30 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR
recording for rotary
SMDR START/DTMF 15 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR
recording for touchtone dialling. This timer
also controls the LCD duration timer on the
phones. The duration time displayed and the
SMDR time duration will be the same.
SYS HOLD RECALL 45 0-250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be
left on hold before recalling back to the
holding station. This is a system-wide
timer. Setting timer to 000 will defeat this
feature and no recalling will take place.
TRANSFER
RECALL
20 0-250 SEC This timer determines the time transferred
calls ring before recalling. This is a systemwide timer.
TRK AUTOMOH
DISC
60 1-250 SEC If the TRK AUTO MOH option is set to ON,
the system will automatically answer
incoming trunk calls and play MOH. In such
a case, the phone will continue to ring
while the MOH is played. If the call is not
answered within the TRK AUTOMOH DISC
time, the call will be disconnected
automatically.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-166 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Timer Name Default Range Unit Description
TSW CONN. DELAY 0 0-10 SEC When incoming trunk makes outgoing call
to another trunk, the system connects
voice path after this time.
UCDS AUDIO
ALARM
0 0-990 SEC When an AA card is installed and the digital
UCD package enabled, this counter
determines the maximum number of seconds
a call has been waiting at the UCD group
before the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to
flash along with an audio alarm. For more
UCD alarm conditions, see MMC 500.
UCDS VISUAL
ALARM
0 0-990 SEC When an AA card is installed and the digital
UCD package enabled, this counter
determines the maximum number of
seconds a call at the UCD group before
the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash
as an alarm. For more UCD alarm
conditions, see MMC 500.
VMS UCD MSG
TIME
5 1-99 SEC When this timer expired, the call return to
idle member. Requires SVM-800.
VOICE DIAL DELAY 8 5-15 SEC This timer monitors the duration of
interaction between main software and
Voice Dialler. If there is no response from
Voice Dial card within this time, the system
decide the voice dialling is fail.
VOIP RE-ROUTE TM 5 2-25 SEC When the outgoing call is made via VOIP
trunk and does not receive ACK message
from called party within this time, the call is
treated as fail.
When the value is ‘0’
Certain timers are disabled when the value is ‘0’.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME TIMERS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-167
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 501.
Display shows first timer value:
AA INT DGT TIME
05 SEC
2) Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
060 SEC
3) Enter new value using keypad; if valid, system
returns to step 2 with new value.
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
060 SEC 250
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-168 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS
Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations.
No Item Description
0 NO ANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No
Answer takes place.(1250 sec)
1 DTMF DUR. This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to
an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system fails
to recognize the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the
SLT port.(1009900 ms)
2 FDGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable
delay before generating DTMF digits for In Band integration.(1009900 ms)
3 OFFHK SEL. This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external call
as programmed in MMC 306.(0250 sec)
4 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a
station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding.
(1250 sec)
5 CC RNG DLY When the station does not answer incoming call within this time, the other
stations with CC key of that station will be ringing together. This feature
only applies to the station call and station group call does not serviced.
(10 sec)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC
DTMF DUR: 100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY: 600 MSEC
OFFHK SEL: 015 SEC
EFWD DELAY: 010 SEC
CC RNG DLY: 010 SEC
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-169
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 502.
Display shows:
[201] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC _
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations and
press Right Soft button.
[ALL] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC _
3) Enter new value(must be three digits) via
dial keypad.(e.g., 020)
[205] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC 020
System will return to step 2.
4) Dial timer number from above list.(e.g., 1)
OR
[205] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS _
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits,
e.g., 0200)
[205] DTMP DUR.
0100 MS 0200
System returns back to step 2.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 CALL FORWARD
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
MMC 306 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-170 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks.
It is not advisable to change these values, with the exception of trunk Flash Time, without
assistance from Technical Support.
No Item Description Range
00 ANS.BAK TM ANSWER BACK TIME. This timer is used for certain
types of E & M signaling and does not affect normal
CO lines.
0-2500 MSEC
01 CLEARING This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at
the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or
receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and
the expiration of this timer.
100-9900 MSEC
02 CO SUPV TM CO SUPERVISION TIME. this is the minimum
length of loop open disconnect received from the
CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the
system.
10-2500 MSEC
03 DTMF DUR. DTMF DURATION. This is the length of the DTMF
digits that will be sent to the CO on this line.
100-9900 MSEC
04 F-DGT DELY First-DIGIT DELAY. This is the length of time the
system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize
after seizure before sending DTMF digits.
100-9900 MSEC
05 FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on
a circuit when FLASH key is pressed.
20-2500 MSEC
06 NO RING TM This is the length of time the system will wait after
detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the
call has disconnected.
1-25 SEC
07 PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait before
sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial
bin.
1-25 SEC
08 PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the
PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is
answered and maintain the status before the
opposite party disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM
must be set to 0.
0-2500 MSEC
09 RNG DET TM RING DETECT TIME. This is the minimum length of
ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring.
10-2500 MSEC
10 WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal
that the system will send on an E & M circuit
100-300 MSEC
11 MF/DP INT This is the interval between sending digit. In case of
DTMF signal, over the 500ms will be serviced as
100 ms.
100-9900 MSEC
12 MFR DLY TM This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after
incoming trunk is detected. This is to prevent the
wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise.
0-25 SEC
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-171
(Continued)
No Item Description Range
13 DISA ANSWR This is a delay time to answer the DISA trunk call or
to answer the trunk when TRK AUTO ANSWER is
set to ON(MMC400)
0-60 SEC
14 CONN DELAY This is a delay time to connect voice path when the
users make outgoing call via loop trunk. This is to
prevent the user hearing noise when loop trunk is
seizured.
0-2500 MSEC
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ANS.BAK TM: 0600 MSEC
CLEARING: 1000 MSEC
CO SUPV TM: 2500 MSEC
DTMF DUR.: 0100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY: 0600 MSEC
FLASH TIME: 0600 MSEC
NO RING TM: 04 SEC
PAUSE TIME: 03 SEC
PRS DET TM: 0000 MSEC
RNG DET TM: 0350 MSEC
WINK TIME: 200 MSEC
MF/DP INT: 0700 MSEC
MFR DLY TIME: 00 SEC
DISA ANSWR: 01 SEC
CONN DELAY: 0000 MSEC
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 503.
Display shows:
[701] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS
2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
[704] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.
[ALL] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS _
3) Dial timer number from the list.
OR
[704] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS _
Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-172 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g., 0200)
System returns to step 2.
[704] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS 0200
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-173
[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the
make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks.
No Item Description
0 MAKE/BREAK RATIO Make/Break ratio of dial pulse(01-99)
1 PLUS PER SECOND Number of dial pulses per second(10 or 20)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
MAKE/BREAK: 33 MAKE
PULSES PER SECOND: 10 PPS
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 504.
Display shows:
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
33 MAKE
2) Dial 0 or 1 for option.
OR
PULSE PER SECOND
10 PPS _
Press Volume button for selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial new value.
System returns to step 2.
PULSE PER SECOND
10 PPS 20
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-174 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.
Type Description Range
YY Year 00-99
MM Month 01-12
DD Date 01-31
W Day 0-6(0: SUN, 1: MON, 2: TUE, 3: WED, 4: THU, 5: FRI, 6: SAT)
HH Hour 00-23
MM Minute 00-59
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW SOFTWARE DATE 12:00
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 505.
Display shows:
OLD:0111095:0901
NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM
2) Enter new time and date using above table.
System returns to step 2.
OLD:0111095:0901
NEW:0111121:1445
3) Verify time and date.
Re-enter if necessary.
OLD:0111121:1445
NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS: AUTO UPDATE TIME
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-175
[506] TONE CADENCE
Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis.
The system can provide eleven types of tone and three types of tones provided from
Central Office or PBX system can be detected. Please call Technical Support before
changing any cadences as some systems may require default settings.
No Item Description
00 BUSY TONE The called station is busy.
01 CONFM/BARGE A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge In with
Tone has been performed.
02 DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialed digits.
03 DND/NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.
04 ERROR TONE An error has been made.
05 HOLD/CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone.
06 MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting.
07 RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing.
08 RING TONE This is the tone heard from ROP device or Loud Bell when these
devices are called.
09 TRANSFERER
TONE
This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT
hook flashes.
10 DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number.
11 CO BUSY TONE This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or PBX
system.
12 CO RINGBACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or
PBX system.
13 CO DIAL This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX
system.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
(a unit: milliseconds)
TONE ON OFF ON OFF
BUSY TONE 500 500 500 500
CONFIRM/BARGE-IN 200 200 200 5000
DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS - - -
(a unit: milliseconds)
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-176 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
TONE ON OFF ON OFF
DND/NO MORE TONE 250 250 250 250
ERROR TONE 500 500 500 500
HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE 500 3500 500 3500
MESSAGE WAIT TONE 1000 250 1000 250
RING BACK TONE 400 200 400 2000
RING TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000
TRANSFER TONE 100 100 100 100
DID RINGBACK TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000
CO BUSY TONE 350 350 350 350
CO RINGBACK TONE 400 200 400 2000
CO DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS - - -
(a unit: milliseconds)
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 506.
Display shows:
BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
2) Dial tone number from above list.(00-13, e.g., 09)
OR
TRANSFERER TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
Press Volume button to select tone, press Left Soft
button and advance to step 3.
3) Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for
INTERRUPT.
TRANSFERER TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
OR
Press Volume button to select tone control and press
Right Soft button to advance step 4.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Dial new value for interrupt times.
(must be four digits)
TRANSFERER TONE:0100
9900 0100 9900
Press Right Soft button advances cursor and
press Left Soft button retreats cursor.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-177
[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate
ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan
is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is
the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan.
A RPO(Ring Plan Override) key is not needed as the system will switch automatically;
however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if
needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans
correlate with all MMC’s that program ring or termination destinations and station and
trunk COS.
Use the following example of assigning Ring Plans:
RING PLAN Start Time End Time
(MON: 1) ST: 0000 END: 23:59
(MON: 2) ST: 0800 END: 2200
(MON: 3) ST: 1000 END: 2000
(MON: 4) ST: 1200 END: 1800
(MON: 5) ST: 1300 END: 1600
(MON: 6) ST: 1400 END: 1500
Using a 24 hour clock in the example above notice that the END time is within the same 24
hour period. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until
the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts the Ring Plan 1 at 00:00. The system will stay
Ring Plan 1 until 08:00 and will stay in Ring Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts. As each ring
Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan.
If a Ring Plan ends and there are no additional Ring Plans the system will default to the
Ring Plan with time that extends past the expired ring plan time.
CONDITIONS
When using a Samsung built-in Voice Mail Card that only has day/night mode, the
day/night must be set for each RING PLAN at ‘MMC 758 VM DAY/NIGHT’.
Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence. IE. RP 1, 2, 3, 4 etc.
A Ring Plan cannot be omitted. IE. RP 1, 2, 5 etc.
A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time before a lower numbered
Ring Plan
Ring Plan 1
Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan of each day. If no Ring Plan destination is
input the operator group is the default destination.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-178 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
DEFAULT DATA
START: NONE
END: NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 507.
Display shows:
RING PLAN (SUN:1)
ST: END:
2) Dial day number.(0-6, e.g., 3)
OR
RING PLAN (WED:1)
ST: END:
Press Volume button to select day.
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3.
3) Dial ring plan number.(1-6, e.g., 2)
OR
RING PLAN (WED:2)
ST:_ END:
Press Volume button to select day.
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4.
4) Dial start time.(e.g., 1030)
If valid, cursor moves to end time.
RING PLAN (WED:1)
ST:1030 END:1800
Enter end time.
If valid, system returns to step 2.
Begin again.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 FEATURE PASSCODE
MMC 509 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 701 STATION COS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-179
[508] CALL COST
Allows the system administrator to set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system
during a call. This information can be displayed on the phone LCD during a call or as an
SMDR record.
No Item Description
0 UNIT COST PER MP When the system is installed to receive MP on a C. O. outgoing
call. It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the
number of pulses. Allows a maximum value of 9999.
1 CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this
rate by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 through 255.
Call Cost
Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate
call cost. This Meter Pulse Detection(MPD) facility requires the MPD version of
the trunk card.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
UNIT COST PER MP 100 PERCENT
CALL COST RATE 100 PERCENT
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 508.
Display shows:
UNIT COST PER MP
0100PESET
2) Dial 0 OR 1.(e.g., 1)
OR
CALL COST RATE
100 %
Press Volume button to select, and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter new value.(e.g., 110 for 110 percent)
System returns to step 2.
CALL COST RATE
110 %
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 110 STATION ON/OFF: CALL COST OPTION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-180 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[509] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the
normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday.
Dates are entered in a month day format. For example July 4th would be 0704. One ring
plan applies to all holidays.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED
FOLLOW RING PLAN 1
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 509.
Display shows the Ring Plan:
RING PLAN
FOLLOW 1
2) Press Right Soft button advance cursor.
Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.
RING PLAN
FOLLOW 2
OR
Use the dial pad to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 2)
3) Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor. RING PLAN
FOLLOW 2
4) Press Volume button to scroll to Assign Holiday
and press Right Soft button to advance cursor
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:
5) Press Volume button to select entry and press Right
Soft button enter and advance cursor
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
05:
6) Dial date using the dial pad for holiday.(e.g., 0704) ASSIGN HOLIDAY
05:0704
7) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-181
[510] SLI RING CADENCE
Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system-wide
basis. There are 5 cadences available. Please call Technical Support before changing any
cadences as some peripheral systems may require default settings.
No Item Description
1 STN RING This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at.
2 TRK RING This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at.
3 DOOR RING This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at.
4 ALM RING This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at.
5 CBK RING This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
(a unit: milliseconds)
Item ON OFF ON OFF
STN RING 1000 3000 1000 3000
TRK RING 0400 0200 0400 2000
DOOR RING 0400 0100 0400 2000
ALM RING 0400 0200 0400 3000
CBK RING 1000 4000 1000 4000
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-182 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 510.
Display shows:
1:STN RING :0400
0200 0400 3000
2) Dial cadence number from above list.(e.g., 3)
OR
3:DOOR RING:0400
0100 0400 2000
Press Volume button to select, press Left
Soft button and advance to step 3.
3) Dial new value for interrupt times.
(must be four digits)
3:DOOR RING:0100
9900 0100 9900
Press Right Soft button advances cursor.
Press Left Soft button retreats cursor.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-183
[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE
This MMC defines the cadence(flash rate) of single line telephone message waiting lamps
on phones connected to an MWSLI supported card. There are two main choices for the
MW lamp cadence available, these being continuous and interrupted as described below.
No Item Description
0 INTERRUPTED The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings.
The shortest on time is 100 ms and the longest on time is 3000 ms.
The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments.
1 CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message, the lamp will be lit steady.
CONDITIONS
MWSLI SUPPORTED CARDS ONLY
DEFAULT DATA
INTERRUPT LED: 1000MS-ON 1000MS-OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 511.
Display shows:
MW LAMP CADENCE
INTERRUPT LED
2) Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE.
OR
MW LAMP CADENCE
INTERRUPT LED
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.
3) Dial new values for interrupt times.(four digits)
Press Right Soft button to move cursor back.
MW LAMP CADENCE
2000 2000
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
Press Left Soft button to move cursor back.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-184 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[513] HOTEL TIMER
This MMC is where the check out time for guest rooms and the room clean timers are set.
These are system wide timers that affects all rooms.
No Item Description
0 CHECK OUT TIME If a room is occupied during the checkout time an additional days
room charge will be automatically added to the room bill.
If a room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional
days room charge will not be added. Setting a room status to
hold is how a late check out can be performed.
1 ROOM CLEAN TIME This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied
rooms as needs cleaning.
2 CHECK IN END TM This time is used to decide an additional days room charge will be
automatically added to the room bill when the first check out time is
reached after check-in.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 513.
Display shows:
CHECK OUT TIME
HH:MM : :
2) Select the timer using the Volume buttons. ROOM CLEAN TIME
HH:MM : :
3) Enter new time using above 24 hour clock
system returns to step 2.
ROOM CLEAN TIME
HH:MM : 11:30
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-185
[514] TONE SOURCE
This program is assigned external tone source instead of system tone. There are 7 types of
tone for external tone source.
No Type
0 BUSY TONE
1 DIAL TONE
2 DND TONE
3 TRANSFER TONE
4 MSG WAIT TONE
5 ERROR TONE
6 RINGBACK TONE
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 514.
Display shows:
BUSY TONE
TONE
2) Enter the system tone number.(0-6)
OR
DIAL TONE
TONE
Press Volume button to select tone number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial a number for external tone source.
OR
DIAL TONE
372
Press Volume button to select tone number and
press Right Soft button to store.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-186 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[515] ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE
Allows the Technician to program the start dates and end dates of daylight saving time on a
system for the current year and the next 9 years. System will automatically add 1 hour to
the system clock at 02.00(2.00 a.m.) on the Start date and subtract 1 hour from the system
clock at 02.00(2.00 a.m.) on the End date.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 515.
Display shows:
NO:YY:START:END
01: : :
2) Enter entry number.(e.g., 01 for current year)
OR
NO:YY:START:END
01: : :
Press Volume button to select entry number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter year.(e.g., 03 for 2003)
OR
NO:YY:START:END
00:03: :
Press Volume button to select year and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter the start date in format MMDD.
(e.g., 30th March would be 0330)
NO:YY:START:END
00:03:0330 :
5) Enter the start date in format MMDD.
(e.g., 26th October would be 1026)
NO:YY:START:END
00:03:0330 :1026
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505 DATE AND TIME
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS: AUTO UPDATE TIME
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-187
[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN 1~6: 500
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 600.
Display shows:
OPERATOR GROUP
1:500 2:500
2) Dial the ring plan number.(1~6)
OR
OPERATOR GROUP
1:500 2:500
Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.
3) Dial the group number.
OR
OPERATOR GROUP
1:501 2:500
Press Volume button to select group and press
Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 406 TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-188 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[601] SIGN STATION GROUP
This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 40 programmable groups available
in a M system and 80 for a L system.
The options for setting up these groups are as follows:
No Option Description
0 TYPE This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the
following:
0 NORMAL: Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can
be stations, common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays.
1 VMAA: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These
must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot
be entered here. Check all programming in MMC 726 to ensure that
the In band DTMF codes are properly set.
2 UCD: Used to build a UCD group. The system will support two
methods of UCD:
- TYPE 1 UCD
The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as
an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement
device to play to callers while they are on hold.
Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations.
a) The announcement device must be able to terminate the
announcement with a hook flash and a transfer back to the
UCD group.
b) Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement.
c) Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the
announcement in its entirety.
d) It is possible that a new caller may ‘jump ahead’ in the queue if
a previous caller is currently connected to the announcement
device.
- TYPE 2 UCD
The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined
as an AA port or group. This will only work if an AA card has been
installed in the system.
The digital announcer in the AA card will supply two recorded
announcements to callers in queue. The first announcement is
played only once, the second announcement will repeat for as long
as the caller is in queue.
This type of UCD group has the following advantages:
a) No external device need be installed to provide an
announcement.
b) Multiple callers can hear the announcement(s) simultaneously.
c) Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free
UCD group member(agent) as soon as the agent becomes
available.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-189
(Continued)
No Option Description
0 TYPE d) The callers place in queue is always maintained.
Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC
607. There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a
system due to availability of system resources.
3 AA: This is used to group a number of AA ports. An Auto
Attendant(AA) card must be installed in the system to do this.
4 BI-VMS: This is the voice mail group for the Built-In Voice Mail Card.
When a Built-In Voice Mail Card is installed, group 529 must be
programmed as a BI-VMS group on a M system and group 549 must
be used for a L system. Group 529(or 549) are fixed for BI-VMS use.
If BI-VMS is not installed in the system, group 529(or 549) can be
used as any other group can be used.
5 MESSAGE: Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a
message desk or message group. When one of the stations in this
type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged
station will return the message to the message group so any
member can answer the call. If a station is a member of more than
one message group, then any message indications made by that
station would be for the first numerical message group they are a
member of. It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple
station groups.
6 S0 STN GRP: This is used to group a number of S0 station for video
conference.
1 RING MODE Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide
how calls are placed to the group.
0 SEQUENTIAL: The stations listed as ‘members’(see below) will be
called on a first available basis. Calls will first go to the first member,
if the first member is busy, calls will go to the second member, if the
second member is busy, calls will go to the third member etc. This
type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls to a
selected individual, with other members only getting the calls when
the first member is busy. The number of members allowed for a
sequential group is 48.
1 DISTRIBUTED: The first call will go to the first member, the second
call will go to the second member, the third call will go to the third
member. This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call
among all group members. The number of members allowed for a
distributed group is 48.
2 UNCONDITIONAL: Calls are placed to all group members
simultaneously.
This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32. If a group
member is busy, they can receive off hook ring if defined in MMC
300. This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups.
The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring
mode.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-190 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Option Description
2 OVERFLOW This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to
begin also ringing the NEXT PORT(see below) after this timer has
elapsed. If set to 000, no overflow will take place.
3 GROUP
TRANSFER
This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred
to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall
will take place.
4 NEXT PORT This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the
OVERFLOW feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW
DESTINATION can be defined as:
1 COMMON BELL There are up to 3 Common bells available on L
system and 1 on M system. Because there is a common bell port on
each MISC card.
2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port.
3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be
defined as the NEXT port.
5 MEMBER List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 48 members for the
system are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to
multiple station groups
6 NEXT HUNT The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next
group member.
7 GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if
all group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring
back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy.
Obviously UCD is an exception to this rule. This option only works when
MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to OFF. When MMC 210 SGR INC
BUSY is set to ON, all station groups will follow this setting.
8 GRP AUTOANS When this option is set to ON, a group call follows auto answer option
also.
Calls to a group
Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any stations in the
group.
CONDITIONS
A station can be assigned to all station groups. A station group can normally
accommodate up to 48 members, but only up to 32 members if the RING MODE is
‘UNCONDITIONAL’.
To enable off-hook ring for calls incoming to busy members, set the OFFHOOK RING
of MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION OFFHOOK RING to ‘ON’.
Even in this case, however, the off-hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is
‘UNCONDITIONAL’.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-191
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL GROUP
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 601.
Display shows:
[501] STN.GROUP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP
2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505)
OR
[505] STN.GROUP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP
Press Volume button to select group and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial feature option number.(0-7, e.g., 0)
OR
[505] STN GROUP
TYPE:VMAA GROUP
Press Volume button to scroll options and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) DIAL group type.(e.g., 1)
OR
[505] STN GROUP
TYPE:VMAA GROUP
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE.
5) Dial feature option number.0-6, e.g., 1)
OR
[505] STN GROUP
RING:DISTRIBUTE
Press Volume button to scroll options and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
6) Dial ring option.0-2, e.g., 0)
OR
[505] STN GROUP
RING:SEQUENTIAL
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Left Soft button to move cursor
back to RING or press Right Soft button to
return to step 2.
7) Dial next feature option and continue.
OR
[505] STN GROUP
RING:SEQUENTIAL
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
8) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-192 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL
MMC 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-193
[602] STATION GROUP NAME
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11-character name to identify an
individual station group.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 602.
Display shows:
[500] SGR NAME
2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505)
OR
[505] SGR NAME
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter in name using above method and table. [505] SGR NAME
TELECOMS
4) Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104 STATION NAME
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-194 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is
very useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several
dialling plans. There are two different modes of operation:(1) sequential and(2) distribute.
There are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 99 members per group.
ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk
member from other groups to prevent accidental access.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS: 9
ALL TIE TRUNKS: 801
ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS: 803
ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS: 804
ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS: 805
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 603.
Display shows:
[9] TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
2) Enter in valid trunk group.(e.g., 9)
OR
[9] TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Press Right Soft button to change mode.
OR
[9] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 01:NONE
Press Volume button to change mode to member.
4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number
of member and enter valid member number
[9] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 05:NONE
(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-195
5) Enter valid trunk number.(e.g., 729)
OR
[9] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 01:729
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6) Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9
if necessary.
7) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
VoIP PROGRAMMING
MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE
MMC 833 VoIP IP TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-196 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones.
Each page zone can have up to 99 members. A phone may be assigned to more than one
zone. Page zone(*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members
of page zone 0.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NO STATIONS ASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 604.
Display shows:
INT.PAGE ZONE(0)
MEMBER 01:NONE
2) Enter the page zone number.(0-4, e.g., 3)
OR
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
MEMBER 01:NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter index number(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.
OR
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
MEMBER 05:NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter station number(e.g., 205) via dial keypad.
OR
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
MEMBER 05:205
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-197
[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.
The OfficeServ 500 system must be equipped with a MISC daughter-board to
allow external paging.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 605.
Display shows first page zone:
EXT. PAGE ZONE(5)
MEMBER 1 :NONE
2) Dial page zone number.(e.g., 6)
OR
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
MEMBER 1 :NONE
Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Dial member number.(e.g., 3)
OR
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
MEMBER 3 :NONE
Use Volume button to select member numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 above.
4) Dial relay number via dial keypad(e.g., 362)
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
MEMBER 3 :362
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-198 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual
phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not be necessary to
waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to
use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned.
A library of up to 2500 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system list can
have up to 500 numbers(950 numbers when MMC 861 SYSTEM SPEED BIN is set to
MAX 950) and each station can have up to 50 numbers. Speed dial numbers are assigned in
blocks of ten. Each speed number may contain up to 24 digits.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES
STATIONS: 1 BLOCKS ASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 606.
Display shows:
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
2) Press Right Soft button to advance next line.
OR
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button. BUSY LIST:180
SYSTEM:20
3) Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume
button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
FREE LIST:20
EXT201:1
4) Enter desired extension number via dial keypad.
(e.g., 205)
FREE LIST:20
EXT205:1
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
5) Enter valid number for bins.
(e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM)
FREE LIST:20
EXT205:5
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-199
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC 106 STATION SPD NAME
MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-200 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[607] UCD OPTIONS
Sets up UCD options when an AA card has been installed. MMC 601 must have already
been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group.
(A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA card
and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When a group overflow timer in
MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the AA card It is here that the caller is played
the UCD ‘FIRST MESSAGE’ and ‘SECOND MESSAGE’ while in queue. This will
continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination.
This MMC includes options to select messages to play to a caller. These messages can be
as follows:
Message Description
MESSAGES 01-48 These can be created using the AAREC Soft button(programmed on
phones by using MMC 722 or 723). A total of two minutes of message time
is available and can be divided up into 1 to 48 messages.
MESSAGES 49-64 These are pre-programmed as follows:
49 ‘Thank you for calling, please dial your party’s extension number’.
50 ‘Invalid number, please try again’.
51 ‘I’m sorry, there is no answer’.
52 ‘I’m sorry, that station is busy’.
53 ‘One moment please’.
54 ‘Transferring’.
55 ‘I’ll transfer you’.
56 ‘Good-bye’.
57 ‘Thank you’.
58 ‘Please hold for the operator’.
59 ‘Please hold for assistance’.
60 ‘Thank you, good-bye’.
61 ‘I’m sorry, all stations are presently busy’.
62 ‘I’m sorry, all stations are still busy’.
63 ‘Please call back later’.
64 ‘I’m sorry, not a valid selection’.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-201
The following program options apply:
No Option Description
00 FIRST MESSAGE After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first
message will immediately play. For instructions on how to make
these recordings, see the User Instructions Section, Auto
Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution System Administration.
The default message is #61 ‘I’m sorry, all stations are presently
busy’.
This message will only be played once for the caller.
01 SECOND MESSAGE If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time(see UCD
Recall), the caller will be played the second message.
For instructions on how to make these recordings, see the User
Instructions Section, Auto Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution
System Administration. The default message is #62 ‘I’m sorry, all
stations are still busy’.
This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in
queue, at an interval specified in the UCD Recall Timer below.
02 EXIT CODE While the caller is hearing a message(but not during MOH),
the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be
transferred immediately to the final destination(see Final
Destination). The exit code is optional and does not need to be
used. If used, the first and second messages may be modified to
provide instructions on its use.
03 RETRY COUNT The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a ‘final
destination’ after a programmable number of ‘loops’ through the
UCD message. The range of this counter is 0 to 99. 00 means
that there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the
UCD queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller
through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final
destination. The UCD will route calls to the final destination
immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or
in DND.
Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy
group will hear the first UCD message, be placed on hold, hear
the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and finally hear
the second message again before being transferred to the final
destination.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-202 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Option Description
04 FINAL DESTINATION This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a
UCD agent.
This destination is only reached if(a) the caller dials an exit digit
during a message or(b) the retry count has expired. The final
destination can be a station number, a group number,
a disconnect or another plan. Plans are entered by pressing
A button plus two digits 01-12. A disconnect is entered as a
destination of NONE(Hold button).
If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a
FWD from UCD group integration message. The final destination
will forward or overflow.
If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will
receive FWD from UCD group integration message. If the final
destination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the
final destination indefinitely.
To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call
buttons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make
the final destination a group(even if the group has only one
station in it.)
05 RING NEXT TIME This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601.
If a higher value is entered, the display will show invalid entry. In
the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000,
an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is
answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing
process, but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in
MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers.
This will simulate a circular hunt group.
06 UCD RECALL TIME After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, he/she will be
placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD
recall timer expires. When the UCD recall timer expires, the
caller will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is
00-99. The default is 10.
07 MOH SOURCE This option determines what Music on Hold source the callers will
be connected to between messages. The choice is either an
external source, AA message defined in MMC 739, or a Built-In
Voice Mail Card message defined in MMC 756.
08 WRAP-UP TIME This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive
additional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one. This is to
allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call
before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The
default is 010.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-203
(Continued)
No Option Description
09 AUTO LOG OUT This YES/NO option determines if a station will automatically log
out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires.
This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000.
10 ALLOUT FINAL This YES/NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final
destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group.
If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will
disconnect.
11 AGENT PIN NO This YES/NO option determines if an agent is required to enter
an Agent ID when logging on to this group. The Agent ID can be
entered in MMC 717.
12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES/NO option determines if all agents are busy, specifies
whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
FIRST MSG: 61
SECOND MSG: 62
EXIT CODE: NONE
RETRY COUNT: 03
FINAL DEST: 500
RING NEXT: 30 SEC
UCD RECALL: 10 SEC
MOH SOURCE: NONE
WRAP-UP: 10 SEC
AUTO LOG OUT: ON
ALL OUT TO FINAL: OFF
AGENT PIN NO: OFF
GBUSY NEXT: OFF
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-204 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 607.
Display shows:
[530] UCD OPTION
FIRST MSG :61
2) Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial
group number.
[542] UCD OPTION
FIRST MSG :61
OR
Press Left Soft button to position cursor under
message number and enter new message.
[530] UCD OPTION
FIRST MSG :25
OR
Press Right Soft button and advance to next option
using the Volume buttons to select an option.
[530] UCD GROUP
UCD RECALL:10 SEC
3) Press Right Soft button and advance to next option.
Use the Volume buttons to make a Selection.
[530] UCD OPTION
UCD RECALL:10 SEC
OR
Make a selection using the dial pad.
4) Press Left Soft button to ENTER the selection and
to return to step 1.
[530] UCD OPTION
EXIT CODE :NONE
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 733 AA PLAN PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-205
[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
Provides means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone. With the
ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to waste these on
such items as voice mail, DPIMs or for phones that do not have displays. The free list will
show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 2000 total bins. Each phone
may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
PHONES: 10 BINS
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 608.
Display shows first station:
[201] REVIEW BLK
10:0060 FREE
2) Enter desired EXT number(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] REVW BLOCK
10:0060 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 5)
OR
[205] REVW BLOCK
50:0010 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-206 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[609] CALL LOG BLOCK
Provides means of adding or deleting Call LOG blocks to an individual phone. With the
ability to delete a block or blocks, it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as
voice mail, DPIMs or for phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how
many bins are left that be assigned. The system has 2000 total bins. Each phone may be
assigned a maximum of 50 bins.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
PHONES: 10 BINS
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 609.
Display shows first station:
[201] LOG BLOCK
10:0070 FREE
2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] LOG BLOCK
10:0070 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 5)
OR
[205] LOG BLOCK
50:0030 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-207
[610]ASSIGN R2 CALL TYPE (China Only)
In China, the R2MFC signaling is different from according to dialling digit. This MMC is
used to assign the call types for each dialling digit.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 610.
Display shows first station:
R2 CALLTYPE(001)
DGT: TYPE:1
2) Dial code index number 1-100.(e.g., 005)
OR
R2 CALLTYPE(005)
DGT:_ TYPE:1
Press UP or DOWN key to selected index number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter digit via dial keypad(maximum of four digits,
e.g.,002) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
R2 CALLTYPE(001)
DGT:002 TYPE:1
4) Enter call type.(1-6, e.g., 5)
OR
R2 CALLTYPE(001)
DGT:002 TYPE:5
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 418 R2MFC SIGNALING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-208 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
This program allows you to send a text message to a busy station or during an OHVA.
Up to 100 stations can be set to the system.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ITP-5012L sets are automatically set to USED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 611.
Display shows:
[201] TMSG STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
2) Enter the number of a station.
OR
[202] TMSG STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Specify whether text message will be used or not. [202] TMSG STN
USED
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 117 TEXT MESSAGE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-209
[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
This program allows a station to use the Group conference call feature. Up to 100 stations
can be allowed in the system. Each user can have up to 5 pre programmed conferences.
This feature is only for Large LCD phone(ex: ITP-5012L,DS-5012L. WIP-5000M)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
Large LCD phone sets are automatically set to USED
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 612.
Display shows:
[201] CONF STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
2) Enter the number of a station.
OR
[202] CONF STN
NOT USED :100 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Specify whether a group conference be used
or not.
[205] CONF STN
USED
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-210 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
This program allows you to set a call group in which each station or Trunk line is included.
It is useful if you want to limit a call between stations, outgoing calls through a Trunk line,
or call-pickup.
CONDITIONS
Call group can be set from 001 to 300 for station, and from 301 to 500 for trunk.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS: 001
ALL TRUNKS: 301
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 614.
Display shows first station:
STATION GROUP
201 :001
2) Enter [0] if you want to set a call group to a station.
Enter [1] if user want to set a call group to a trunk.
TRUNK GROUP
701 :301
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Enter a number you want.
OR
TRUNK GROUP
702 :301
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
4) Enter the number of the call group you
want to set.
TRUNK GROUP
702 :302
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 313 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 318 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-211
[615] MGI GROUP
This optional program sets designated MGI ports for specific services. This allows
‘grading’ of MGI card(s) for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into
groups. Keep in mind that any entries made here can be ineffective,
if conflicting entries exist in MMC616.
No Type Description
0 LOCAL ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a
private IP network
1 PUB IP ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a
public IP network.
2 VOIP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 500 systems across a
private IP network.
3 PUB IP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 500 systems on a public
IP network
4 VOIP TRUNK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard
H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network
5 PUB IP TRK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard
H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network
6 MGI3 NEEDED This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile
communications across a private network.
7 PUB IP MGI3 This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile
communications on a public network.
8 ITP PAGED This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP
phones across a private IP network
The MGI ports can be allow two selection modes: Sequential or Distributed.
The members of each selection are the actual ports on the MGI card(s).
CONDITIONS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-212 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
DEFAULT DATA
LOCAL ITP: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP ITP: MGI2, MGI3
VOIP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3
VOIP TRUNK: MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP TRK: MGI2, MGI3
MGI3 NEEDED: MGI3
PUB IP MGI3: MGI3
ITP PAGED: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 615.
Display shows the first available option:
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
2) Press Volume button to select an user type.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
3) Press Volume button to select an option and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
4) Press Volume button to select an data and
press Right Soft button to store data and
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
move cursor to return to step 1.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 616 MGI USER
MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC 840 IP SET INFORMATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-213
[616] MGI USER
This optional program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port
basis for IP station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not utilized, allocation of MGI ports will
be controlled by MMC615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk
selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned for digital
stations(2XX~2XXX), private and public ITP stations(32XX), VoIP Networking
trunks(83XX), H.323 trunks(84XX), SIP trunks(85XX) and MGI3 facsimile. Only one
assignment per MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries made in
MMC615.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 616.
Display shows the first available option:
[3801] MGI USER
NONE
2) Enter MGI dial number.
OR
[3801] MGI USER
NONE
Press Volume button to select an MGI port and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter MGI user dial number.
OR
[3801] MGI USER
NONE
Press Volume button to select an MGI user and
press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 616 MGI USER
MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC 840 IP SET INFORMATION
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-214 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[700] COPY COS CONTENTS
This MMC allows the technician to duplicate a class of service to make it easier to have
multiple similar classes of service.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
‘F’ KEY Used to advance MMC 701
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 700.
Display shows:
COPY COS ITEMS
COS01 COS01
2) Dial selected COS to copy.(e.g., 05)
OR
COPY COS ITEMS
COS05 COS01
Press Volume button to select COS and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor and advance
to next step.
3) Dial target COS.(e.g., 06)
OR
COPY COS ITEMS
COS05 COS06
Press Volume button to select COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2.
4) Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press
Right Soft to advance cursor.
COS CONTENTS(06)
TOLL LEVEL:A
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-215
[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily used for
creating a new class of service. If the unsupervised conference feature is allowed, a
programmed CONF key must be available to allow re-entry into a conference call.
There are 30 classes of service available.
This MMC is divided into 5 categories.
No Category Description
TOLL LEVEL 0 TOLL LEVEL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)
B Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703
C Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703
D Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703
E Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703
F Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703
G Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703
H Follow toll class H(All restricted)
1 USABLE FEATURES No COS Default Description
00 AA CALER YES Auto answer control by caller
01 ABSENCE YES Absence
02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear
03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy
04 CALLBACK YES Callback
05 CLIP ABN YES Caller ID Abandon
06 CLIP INQ YES Caller ID Inquire
07 CLIP INV YES Caller ID Investigate
08 CONFER. YES Conference
09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear
10 DIRECT. YES Directory dial
11 DISA YES Allow DISA use
12 DND YES Do Not Disturb
13 DND FWRD YES Forward Do Not Disturb
14 DND OVRD YES Do Not Disturb override
15 DOOR YES Door ring answer
16 DSS YES Direct station select
17 DTS YES Direct trunk select
18 EXT AREC NO Intercom call automatic record
(SVM-800)
19 EXT FWD YES External call forward
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-216 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Category Description
1 USABLE FEATURES No COS Default Description
20 FEATURE YES Transfer button
21 FLASH YES Trunk flash
22 FOLLOW-ME YES Call forward-follow me
23 FORWARD YES Call forwarding
24 FWDTOVMS YES Call forward to SVM-800
25 GRP I/O YES Group in/out
26 HOLD YES Hold
27 HOTLINE YES Hot line and Off hook selection
28 INTERCOM YES Intercom call
30 MESSAGE YES Message
31 MM PAGE YES Meet me page
32 NEW CALL YES New call
33 OHVAED YES Receive Off hook voice
announcement
34 OHVAING YES Make Off hook voice
announcement
35 ONEA2 YES 1A2 emulation
36 OPERATOR YES Call to Operator
37 OUT TRSF YES Outgoing transfer
38 OVERRIDE NO Barge-In
39 PAGE 0 YES Page zone 0 Paging
40 PAGE 1 YES Page zone 1 Paging
41 PAGE 2 YES Page zone 2 Paging
42 PAGE 3 YES Page zone 3 Paging
43 PAGE 4 YES Page zone 4 Paging
44 PAGE 5 YES Page zone 5 Paging
45 PAGE 6 YES Page zone 6 Paging
46 PAGE 7 YES Page zone 7 Paging
47 PAGE 8 YES Page zone 8 Paging
48 PAGE 9 YES Page zone 9 Paging
49 PAGE * YES Page zone * Paging
51 PICKUP YES Call pickup
52 PRB YES Privacy Release and Bridge
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-217
(Continued)
No Category Description
1 USABLE FEATURES No COS Default Description
53 REM. HOLD YES Remote Hold
54 RNG PLAN YES Ring Mode Change
55 SECURE YES Barge-In secure
56 SET RLOC NO Set Relocation
57 SSPD TOL YES System Speed dial toll check
58 STN LOCK YES Station Lock
59 SYS SPD YES System Speed dial
60 TRK AREC NO Trunk call automatic record
(SVM-800)
61 TRK EHLD YES Trunk call exclusive hold
62 UNCO CNF YES Unsupervised Conference
63 VM AREC NO Auto Record(SVMi)
64 VM AME NO Answer Machine
Emulation(SVMi)
65 VM REC NO Call Record(SVMi)
66 VMS PSWD NO VMS password(SVM-800)
67 VMS REC NO VMS Call Record(SVM-800)
2 CALL STATION
GROUPS
STN GROUP 01-80 YES Station group 01~80 calling
3 CALL TRUNK
GROUPS
TRK GROUP 01-30 YES Trunk group 01~30 calling
4 CALL TO
BIVMS STN(SVMi).
BIVMS STN 01-16 YES SVMi port 01~16 calling
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-218 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 701.
Display shows:
COS CONTENTS(01)
TOLL LEVEL:A
2) Dial COS.(e.g., 06)
OR
COS CONTENTS(06)
TOLL LEVEL:A
Press Volume button to select COS number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial COS contents categories.
(e.g., 1 for usable feature)
COS CONTENTS(06)
00:AA CALER :YES
OR
Press Volume button to select COS categories and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Dial COS usable feature option.(e.g., 12)
OR
COS CONTENTS(06)
12:DND :YES
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.
OR
COS CONTENTS(06)
12:DND :NO
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 4.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
TOLL RESTRICTION
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
MMC 709 TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-219
[702] TOLL DENY TABLE
Provides a way to make toll restriction(call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500
entries allowed in the deny and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each
index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704 Assign Wild Character),
more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the
dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704.
There are six toll levels, B to G, that are programmable. Toll level A is set as unrestricted by
default and toll level H is set as in-house only by default.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0
PROGRAM BUTTONS
A Used to wild card X entered
B Used to wild card Y entered
C Used to wild card Z entered
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 702.
Display shows:
DENY(001):BCDEFG
:000000
2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
DENY(005):BCDEFG
:000000
Press Volume button to select index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 212)
OR
DENY(005):BCDEFG
212 :000000
Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) from above list and press
Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options.
DENY(005):BCDEFG
21X :000000
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-220 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line until
under toll class mark.(e.g., E)
DENY(001):BCDEFG
212 :000100
Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press
Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-221
[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 250 allowable
entries in the allow table for a OfficeServ 500-M system and 500 allowable entries for a
OfficeServ 500-L system and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each
index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704 Assign Wild
Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. There are six toll levels, B to G,
that are programmable. Toll level A is set as unrestricted by default, and toll level H is set
as in-house only by default.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0
PROGRAM BUTTONS
A Used to wild card X entered
B Used to wild card Y entered
C Used to wild card Z entered
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 702.
Display shows:
ALOW(001):BCDEFG
:000000
2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
:000000
Press Volume button to select index and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 202)
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
202 :000000
OR
Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) from above list and
press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
20X :000000
Options.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-222 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line
until under toll class mark.(e.g., E)
ALOW(001):BCDEFG
202 :000100
Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press
Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-223
[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
Provides flexibility to toll restriction(call barring) when a specific numbering plan is so
desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table
if needed.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
X ENTRIES SET TO 1
OTHER ENTRIES SET TO 0
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 704.
Display shows:
:0123456789*#
X:111111111111
2) Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z(e.g., Z)
and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to
:0123456789*#
Z:000000000000
option line.
3) Press Volume button to move cursor to option
digit desired(e.g., 5) and enter 1.(put under other
:0123456789*#
Z:000001000000
digits as required)
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-224 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 500 entries
available(950 entries when MMC 861 SYSTEM SPEED BIN is set to MAX 950) for
programming(see MMC 606). Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group
access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialed. These dialed digits
may consist of 0-9, and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access
number, it will automatically insert the separator.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
B Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
C Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
D Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
E Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’
F Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 706)
ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the MMC 728 CID
translation table.
ACTION DISPLAY
1)
Press Transfer button and enter 705.
Display shows:
SYS SPEED DIAL
500:
2) Dial speed index desired.(e.g., 505)
OR
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter access code(e.g., 9/701) plus the phone
number up to 24 digits(digits will scroll under)
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:9–121223456789
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter
name.
SYS SPEED NAME
505:
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-225
5) If you want to save the speed dial number and name
data to the MMC 728 CID translation table.
SYS SPEED DIAL
ADD CLI XLT ?NO
Press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial name must be exist)
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
MMC 728 CLIP NAME TRANSLATION
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-226 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
Allows an 11-character name to be entered for each system speed dial location.
This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial
feature. The directory dial feature allows the display phone user to select a speed dial
location by scanning its name.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
NO NAMES
PROGRAM BUTTONS
ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the MMC 728 CID
translation table.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 706.
Display shows:
SYS SPEED NAME
500:
2) Dial system speed entry number.(e.g., 505)
OR
SYS SPEED NAME
505:
Press Volume button to select entry number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter name using dial keypad and above table and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
SYS SPEED NAME
505:TELECOMS
OR
Press the F key to toggle to speed dial number
to return to MMC 705, step 3.
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:
4) If you want to save the speed dial number and name
data to the MMC 728 CLI translation table.
SYS SPEED NAME
ADD CLI XLT ?NO
Press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial number must be exist)
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-227
5) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC 728 CLIP NAME TRANSLATION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-228 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE
Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500
available entries. Authorization codes can be up to 4 to 10 digits.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 707.
Display shows:
AUTHOR.CODE(001)
C:01
2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
C:01
Press Volume button to selected index number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter authorization code(minimum of four digits and
a maximum of 10 digits via dial keypad
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
1234567890 C:01
(e.g., 1234567890)
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter class of service number 01-30.(e.g., 05)
OR
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
1234567890 C:05
Press Volume button to select COS and press Right
Soft button to select and return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-229
[708] ACCOUNT CODE
Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 708.
Display shows:
ACCOUNT CODE
001:
2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
ACCOUNT CODE
005:
Press Volume button to selected index number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter account code(maximum 12 digits) via
dial keypad.(e.g., 1234)
ACCOUNT CODE
005:1234
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
back to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-230 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
This MMC provides a means to program three trunk code tables as described below.
No Special Code Description
0 PBX CODE This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the
trunk access codes needed for toll restriction to be properly
applied when the system is used either behind a PBX or with
CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll restriction will only be applied
on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC 401 if a trunk access code
entered in this table is dialed. Toll restriction will be applied to
the digits following the trunk access code.
1 SPECIAL CODE This table identifies to the system dialling rules the special
feature codes used to activate central office custom calling
features such as CID Block and call waiting disable. The special
feature codes can be used on a per call basis without affecting
LCR or toll restriction programming. There is a maximum of
ten(10) entries available each of which may be up to four digits
long.
2 TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify to the system
numbers that will bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass
includes Toll restriction, Trunk access and forced authorization
or account codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits
long.
3 OVER USE TRK GRP This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will
access.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-231
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 709.
Display shows:
PBX ACCESS CODE
1:
2) Select PBX, SPECIAL CODE, TOLL OVERRIDE
or OVRD USE TRK GRP.
TOLL OVERRIDE
1:
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter index number.(e.g., 3)
OR
TOLL OVERRIDE
3:_
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter via dial keypad the desired access/
feature code.(e.g., 911)
TOLL OVERRIDE
3:911
Press Right Soft button to enter and return
to step 3 and enter more entries.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 305 FORCED CODES
TOLL RESTRICTION
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-232 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE
The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call
placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME
TABLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 with a digit string
length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in
numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for use with feature codes.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 710.
Display shows:
LCR DIGIT (0001)
DIGIT:
2) Dial LCR entry.(e.g., 0005)
OR
LCR DIGIT (0005)
DIGIT:_
Press Volume button to select entry and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and
press Right Soft button.
LCR DIGIT (0005)
DIGIT:305426
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 1.
4) Enter digit length.(max: 31)
Cursor will move to RT.(route selection)
LCR DIGIT (0005)
LENGTH:10 RT:01
5) Enter RT.(01-32)
Valid entry will return you to step 1.
LCR DIGIT (0005)
LENGTH:10 RT:01
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-233
[711] LCR TIME TABLE
This table gives the flexibility to the system, through the LCR ROUTES, to allow calls
placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available. When
LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive
trunks on any given time of day. There are four possible time entries per day; the start time
of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 711.
Display shows:
LCR TIME (SUN:A)
HHMM: LCRT:-
2) Dial day of week.(SUN-SAT, e.g., WED)
OR
LCR TIME (WED:A)
HHMM: LCRT:-
Press Volume button to make day selection and
press Right Soft button.
3) Dial time band.(A-D, e.g., B)
OR
LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM: LCRT:-
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
4) Dial time via keypad.(24-hour format, e.g., 0800)
Cursor moves to LCRT.(reference MMC 712)
LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM:0800 LCRT:-
5) Dial time table number.(1-4)
OR
LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM:0800 LCRT:1
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-234 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE
The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the
completion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT
TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE.
After you dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a
specific predetermined trunk group. There is a maximum number of 32 routes available.
If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first
designated trunk group and then starts to utilize succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk
groups are busy in a selected route, call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they
become available.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 712.
Display shows:
LCR ROUTE (01:1)
C:1 G:NONE M:---
2) Dial LCR ROUTE table number.(e.g., 05)
OR
LCR ROUTE (05:1)
C:1 G:NONE M:---
Press Volume button to selected table and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4.(e.g., 2)
OR
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:1 G:NONE M:---
Press Volume button to selected index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Dial LCR COS number 1-8.(e.g., 4)
OR
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:NONE M:---
Press Volume button to selected COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Dial TRUNK GROUP access code.(e.g., 801)
OR
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801 M:---
Press Volume button to selected access code and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-235
6) Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number.(e.g., 050)
OR
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801 M:050
Press Volume button to selected index number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801 M:---
cursor to step 2.
7) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-236 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
This program entry is also referred to as Outgoing dial Rules. This will give the system the
ability to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. A perfect
example is the adding of a digit ‘1’. An advantage is to insert a common carrier network
access code of 1010288. With these digits inserted, a long distance call will be placed over
a local line utilizing the common carrier network. The characters * and # can also be
entered. There are 200 modify digit entries available.
Option Maximum Number Of Digit Entries
Number of digits to delete 15
Insert(before dialling string) 14
Append(after dialling string) 14
DIGIT STRING KEY
Insert String + Digit String(delete) + Append String
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 713.
Display shows:
LCR MODIFY (001)
NOF DEL DGT:00
2) Enter index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
LCR MODIFY (005)
NOF DEL DGT:00
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter number of digits to delete.
OR
LCR MODIFY (005)
NOF DEL DGT:01
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move
cursor to next step.
4) Enter digits to be inserted.(e.g., 10288)
OR
LCR MODIFY (005)
I:10288_
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store
information and advance to next step.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-237
5) Enter digits to be appended.(e.g., 45678)
OR
LCR MODIFY (005)
A:_
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store
information and return to step 2.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-238 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call
waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is
also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed
on hold. An 11 character name can be added to the number. There are a maximum of 999
entries. If there is no matching number on DID service the call is routed to the operator
group.
Definitions of option are as follows:
Option Description
DGT Digits to be received from Trunk line Up to 16 digits may be entered.
MOH SOURCE Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear in regards to
that DID/DNIS number if the call is placed on hold. There are a total of 6
possible music selections(see below).
NONE Follows the setting in MMC 408 for the trunk the call comes in on.
TONE A repeated tone is played to the outside party.
INTERNAL CHIME
‘OLD FOLKS AT
HOME’
This is entered as the directory number of the music source on the MCP2
(371).
EXTERNAL DEVICE Music Source or Digital announcer. This is entered as the directory
number of an external music source.
DIGITAL
ANNOUNCEMENT
ON AA CARD
This is entered as the directory number of the last AA port of an AA card.
For further details on using an AA port as an MOH source please see
MMC 739.
VOICE MAIL SOUND
FILE
If the system has an optional SVMi card installed, up to 100 custom
recorded sound files from the Voice Mail card can be used for MOH
sources. Select the SVMi port assigned in MMC 756. For information on
creating the sound files see SVMi System Administrator ManualRecording greeting by number. If you select this option be advised that
each VMMOH source requires a dedicated SVMi port/channel.
PRI DID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest
and priority 9 is the lowest.
When calls into station group come and group members are all busy, the
system will assign a priority to the DDI number so that calls from a high
priority DDI number will be placed at the front of the group queue.
If this option sets NO, the longest call that placed at the group queue has
the highest priority.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-239
(Continued)
Option Description
1: XXX, 2: XXX,
3: XXX, 4: XXX,
5: XXX, 6: XXX
Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a
station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If trunk or trunk group is
selected the trunks must be programmed as E & M trunks to allow the
received digits to be re-sent on the facility(s). This is referred to as DID
Repeat digits over tie line.
An entry of the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits.
‘A’ setting indicates AUTO ANSWER, and ‘D’ setting indicates DISA.
CW Call waiting Yes/No . Allow a second DID call to be received
MC The number of maximum call count. When this sets 99, this feature will not
works. When this sets 0, if a call comes that matched DID digits and DGT field
then the system will be reject call. When this sets between 1 to 98, if a call
comes that matched DID digits and DGT field then the system counts same DID
digits call, and in case of the count is same or higher than this value, the system
sends busy signal to caller.
DC The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching,
mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum
number of digits that can be deleted is 16.
NAME Input up to 11 characters to identify call.
Refer to ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’ for descriptions on INPUT
CHARACTERS.
CONDITIONS
If an E & M line is designated as FOLLOW DID TRANS at ‘MMC 416 ASSIGN E &
M/DID RINGDOWN’, calls are terminated according to the station direct dial translation
table of ‘MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION’.
DEFAULT DATA
INDEX DIGIT MOH PRI 1-6 CW MC DC NAME
001 2*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE
002 3*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE
003 5*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE
004 8*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-240 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 714.
Display shows:
DID DIGIT (001)
DGT:
2) Enter valid index number(e.g., 005) via dial keypad.
OR
DID DIGIT (005)
DGT:
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 5065) via dial
keypad and press Right Soft button to move
DID DIGIT (005)
DGT:5065
cursor.
4) Enter the MOH source for this entry.
OR
DID DIGIT (005)
MOH:NONE PRI:NO
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 3 above.
5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.
(1-9 or NO)
DID DIGIT (005)
MOH:NONE PRI:NO
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft buttons to advance next step.
6) Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan
destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 530)
DID DIGIT (005)
1:530 2:
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.
7) Enter call wait option via dial keypad.
(1 for YES, 0 for NO)
DID DIGIT (005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.
8) Enter maximum call count via dial keypad.(00-99)
OR
DID DIGIT (005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-241
9) Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad.(0-16)
OR
DID DIGIT (005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance next step.
10) Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right
Soft button to return to step 1.
DID DIGIT (005)
NAME:
11) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
Refer to ‘RELATED ITEMS’ of MMC 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-242 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[715] ROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
There are 15 messages in the system.
MESSAGES 01-10 are 16 character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them can
be changed.
MESSAGES 11-15 are 16 character blank messages that can be created.
DEFAULT DATA
Ten programmed messages as detailed below:
01. IN A MEETING
02. OUT ON A CALL
03. OUT TO LUNCH
04. LEAVE A MESSAGE
05. PAGE ME
06. OUT OF TOWN
07. IN TOMORROW
08. RETURN AFTERNOON
09. ON VACATION
10. GONE HOME
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-243
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 715.
Display shows:
PGM.MESSAGE (01)
IN A MEETING
2) Enter index number.(e.g., 11)
OR
PGM.MESSAGE (11)
_Blank Message
Press Volume button arrow to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter message via dial keypad using the above
Table.(maximum 16 characters)
PGM.MESSAGE (11)
SunBathing
Use A button to toggle upper case/lower case.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-244 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[717] UCD AGENT ID
This MMC defines UCD agent ID number or PIN numbers. These numbers are used to log
UCD agents into the UCD groups. There are 300 available entries on L system and 100
available entries on M system. Each entry is tied to a specific UCD group. Agent ID codes
can be up to 4 digits long.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 717.
Display shows:
AGENT PIN (001)
ID: GRP:NONE
2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
AGENT PIN (005)
ID:_ GRP:NONE
Press Volume buttons to select index number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter ID code via dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
AGENT PIN (005)
ID:1234 GRP:NONE
4) Enter group number.(e.g., 505)
OR
AGENT PIN (005)
ID:1234 GRP:505
Press Volume button to select group and
press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-245
[718] MY AREA CODE
This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used for
caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC removes
the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 718.
Display shows:
MY AREA CODE
AREA :
2) Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA.
OR
MY AREA CODE
AREA :
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter area code(maximum 4 digits) via dial
keypad(e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to
MY AREA CODE
AREA :2
move cursor back to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
Refer to ‘RELATED ITEMS’ in ‘MMC 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE’
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-246 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[719] IDLE DISPLAY
This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Use dial buttons to enter guidance data in English. Press a dial to display characters below
on LCD depending on the number of pressing the same dial. Press another dial to save the
displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character. Press ‘A’ to change
uppercase/lowercase input modes.
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 719.
Display shows:
IDLE DISPLAY (01)
2) Press the location of the line of a large LCD
phone(01~12) on which guidance data is to be
IDLE DISPLAY (02)
displayed.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press
Right Soft button to save and move to step 2.
IDLE DISPLAY (02)
WELCOME TO ABC
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-247
[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
Provides a tool for duplicating key assignment from one phone to another.
This can be done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations.
One limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same type(e.g., same
number of buttons).
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 720.
Display shows:
[201] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE
2) Enter the station number to copy.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for select all station.
3) Enter station number to copy from(e.g., 203)
and cursor returns to step 2.
[205] COPY KEY
FROM:203
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-248 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Provides a service tool which will minimize the accidental loss of programmable buttons
on the phones. The method of operation is simple, first the data is saved and then the
station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other
features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data can be restored to the
individual station, providing the same type is in place.
CONDITIONS
This program uses carefully. Because key programming data save to common key
programming database. When new phone connect, system copy from common key
programming database to new phone key programming database.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 721.
Display shows:
[201] SAVE KEY
RESTORE
2) Enter desired station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] SAVE KEY
RESTORE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
3) Press Volume button to make function selection
and press Right Soft button to enter and return to
[205] SAVE KEY
SAVE
step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-249
[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific electronic phones, AOM, or
64 button module on the system. For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by
default. For AOM’s and 64 button DSS box’s all buttons are set as DS keys by default.
Features are entered via dial pad keys by pressing the dial pad number the required number
of steps to select the feature. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three times.
If the BOSS key is required, press 2 for the first letter B and then use the Volume button to
change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT 1 2 3 4
DIAL 2 AAPLAY BARGE CAD -
DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO -
DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG -
DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ -
DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA -
DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND
DIAL 8 TG UA VDIAL -
DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP
Programmable button Assignments:
Feature Description Feature Description
AAPLAY AUTO ATTENDANT PLAY
(Requires AA card)
MMPG MEET ME PAGE
AAREC AUTO ATTENDANT
RECORD(Requires AA card)
MS MANUAL
SIGNALING
AB ABSENCE MSG MESSAGE
ABAND ABANDONED CALL MUTE MUTE
ABW AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP MW MESSAGE WAIT
ACC ACCOUNT NEW NEW CALL
ALARM ALARM NIGHT NIGHT
AN/RLS ANSWER/RELEASE NND NAME NUMBER
DATE
BARGE BARGE-IN NOCLIP NO CID SEND
BILL BILL(Related to Hotel/Motel Features) NPG NETWORK PAGE
BLOCK OHVA BLOCK NS NETWORK
STATION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-250 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Feature Description Feature Description
BOOTH BOOTH(Related to
Hotel/Motel Features)
NXT CID NEXT
BOSS BOSS/SECRETARY OHVA OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
CAD CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY OPER OPERATOR
CALL CALL BUTTON PAGE PAGE
CAMP STATION CAMP-ON PAGPK PICKUP PAGE HOLD
CANMG MESSAGE CANCEL PARK CALL PARK ORBIT
CBK CALLBACK PAUSE PAUSE
CC CALL COVERAGE PMSG PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
CHIN CHECK IN(Related to
Hotel/Motel Features)
PRB PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE
CHOUT CHECK OUT(Related to
Hotel/Motel Features)
PROG SET PROGRAM
CHOICE CHOICE
(Related to News Server)
PTHR PATH REPLACEMENT
CID CALLER ID RB ROOM BILL
(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CONF CONFERENCE REJECT OHVA REJECT
CONP CONNECTED NAME
DISPLAY
RETRY AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY
CR CALL RECORD
(Requires SVMi card)
REVW REVIEW
CREDIT CREDIT(Related to
Hotel/Motel Features)
RP RING PLAN
CS CALL STATUS RSV ROOM STATUS VIEW
(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CSNR CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER
REDIAL
RTO RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE
DGPALM EASY ALARM SET TO
REMOTE STATION
SETDND SET DO NOT DISTURB
DICT DICTATION SETMG SET MESSAGE W/O RING
DIR DIRECTORY SG STATION GROUP
DIVERT EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT
TO SECRETARY
SLOCAT STAFF LOCATOR
(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
DLOCK DOOR LOCK SNR SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
DNDO DO NOT DISTURB
OVERRIDE
SP UCD SUPERVISOR
DP DIRECT PICKUP SPD SPEED DIAL
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-251
(Continued)
Feature Description Feature Description
DROP CALL DROP SPKR SPEAKER
DS DSS KEY STATE SET EXECUTIVE STATE
DT DTS KEY STORE STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER
EP ESTABLISHED CALL
PICKUP
SYSALM SYSTEM ALARMS
EXTMIC EXTERNAL MIC TG TRUNK GROUP
FAUTO FORCED AUTO ANSWER TIMER TIMER
FLASH FLASH TRARPT TRAFFIC REPORT
FWRD CALL FORWARD TRSF TRANSFER
GCONF GROUP CONFERENCE UA UNIVERSAL ANSWER
GPIK GROUP PICKUP VDIAL VOICE DIAL(Requires VDIAL card)
HDSET HEADSET MODE VG VMS GROUP MESSAGE
(Requires SVM-800)
HLDPK HOLD PICKUP VM VOICE MAIL MEMO
(Requires SVMi card)
HOLD HOLD VMADM VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION
(Requires SVMi card)
HOTEL HOTEL(Related to
Hotel/Motel Features)
VMAME ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION
(Requires SVMi card)
IG IN/OUT GROUP VMMSG VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY
(Requires SVMi card)
INFDSP INFORMATION DISPLAY
(Requires News/Call Plus)
VMSCMT VMS COMMENT(Requires SVM)
INQIRE INQUIRE VMSMSG VMS MESSAGE(Requires SVM)
ISPY CID SPY VMSOUT VMS OUT CALL(Requires SVM)
LANREQ LAN REQUEST VMSREC VMS RECORD(Requires SVM)
LCR LEAST COST ROUTING VMSVAC VMS VACANT(Requires SVM)
LISTN GROUP LISTENING VREC VOICE RECORD(Requires VDIAL card)
LNR LAST NUMBER REDIAL VT VOICEMAIL TRANSFER
LOG CALL LOGGING WAKEUP WAKE UP(Related to Hotel/Motel
Features)
MMPA MEET ME PAGE ANSWER XCHIN EXPRESS CHECK IN
(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CONDITIONS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-252 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
DEFAULT DATA
<24 Button Digital Phone>
<48 Button AOM>
CALL1 CALL1
CALL1 DT705
CALL1 DT7 1
CALL1 CONF
CALL1 CALL2
CALL1 DT706
CALL1 DT7 2
CALL1 SPD
CALL1 DT701
CALL1 DT7017
CALL1 DT7 3
CALL1 NONE
CALL1 DT702
CALL1 DT708
CALL1 DT7 4
CALL1 PAGE
CALL1 DT703
CALL1 DT709
CALL1 DT7 5
CALL1 CBK
CALL1 DT704
CALL1 DT7010
CALL1 DT7 6
CALL1 GPIK01
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
CALL1
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
DS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-253
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 722.
Display shows:
[201] KEY (MAST)
01:CALL1
2) Enter selected station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] KEY (MAST)
01:CALL1
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter selected key number.(e.g., 18)
OR
[201] KEY (MAST)
18:NONE _
Press Volume button to select key number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Using above chart, press dial pad key number to
make selection.
[201] KEY PROG.
18:NONE GPIK_
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to
enter extender if required or to return to step 2.
5) If required, enter extender.(e.g.,03)
OR
[201] KEY PROG.
18:NONE GPIK03
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-254 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
This MMC is much like MMC 722, Station Key Programming. The main difference is that
this MMC is system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are entered via the
dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table. For example, for OHVA the
number 6 is pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, press 2 for the first letter B,
and then use the Volume button to change selection from BARGE to BOSS.
TYPE OF PHONE
No Type of Phone Description
00 24 BTN SETS Phone with 24 program buttons
01 12 BTN SETS Phone with 12 program buttons
02 US 7B SETS US phone with 7 program buttons
03 EU 6B SETS EU phone with 6 program buttons
05 40-64B AOMS AOM with 40-64 program buttons
06 20 BTN SETS Phone with 20 program buttons
07 28 BTN SETS Phone with 28 program buttons
08 18 BTN SETS Phone with 18 program buttons
09 8 BTN SETS Phone with 8 program buttons
10 99 BTN SETS Phone with 99 program buttons
11 38 BTN SETS Phone with 38 program buttons
12 21 BTN SETS Phone with 21 program buttons
13 14 BTN SETS Phone with 14 program buttons
14 DS-07S SETS DS phone with 7 program buttons
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT 1 2 3 4
DIAL 2 AAPLAY BARGE CAD -
DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO -
DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG -
DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ -
DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA -
DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND
DIAL 8 TG UA VDIAL -
DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP
See Programmable button Assignments on MMC 722.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-255
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DEFAULT DATA ON MMC 722
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 723.
Display shows:
TYPE:24 BTN SETS
01:CALL1
2) Enter type of set via dial keypad.(e.g.,1)
OR
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
01:CALL1
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
3) Enter key number.(e.g., 03)
OR
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
4) Using table above, press dial keypad number to
make selection.
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:NONE GPIK
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step
5 to enter extender, if required.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
5) If required, enter extender.(e.g.,03)
OR
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:GPIK GPIK03
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-256 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station
groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be pre-programmed with a
default three or four digit numbering for station, station groups and trunk numbers
depending on the position of the DIP switches on the MCP2 card. There is an error
message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature
access code.
No Type of Dial No Description
00 STN DIAL NO. This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 201-2xx, 3xx(last 319) or 2001-2xxx
01 TRK DIAL NO. This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx
02 AA/VD DIAL NO This is where AA port or Voice Dial port directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: AA ports: 3951-39xx
VD ports: 3981-398x
03 MISC DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the
alarm sensor are changed or assigned.
Default: Internal CHIME: 371
Internal MODEM: 3999
External MOH: 372-377
External PAGE & Relay: 361-369
Common Bell Relay: 3991-3993
Loud Bell Relay: 3995-3997
04 STNG DIAL
NUMBER
This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx
05 TRKG DIAL
NUMBER
This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: The first is 9 or 0, 800-828
06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned.
Dialling codes are entered via the dial pad key by pressing the dial
pad number the required steps to select the feature. For example,
for OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times.
NOTE) Please remember that this program is system-wide.
07 S0 STN DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports mapping
terminal number.
Default: 8701-8748
08 DECT STN DIAL NO This is where directory numbers for DECT terminals.
Default: 8801-8899
09 NTWK LCR DIAL NO This is where additional LCR access codes are entered in the case
when two or more OfficeServ 500 system are networked together.
Default: NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-257
(Continued)
No Type of Dial No Description
10 VIRT EXT DIAL NO This is where virtual station directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: SLT: 3501-3546, DGP: 3401-3480
11 MGI DIAL NO. This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or
assigned.
Default: 3801-38xx
12 IP STN DIAL NO. This is where IP-based station directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: 3201-3299(DESKTOP PHONE),
3301-3399(MOBILE PHONE)
14 VOIP NET DIAL NO This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP
networking trunk signaling port directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: 8301-8380
15 H323 TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signaling port directory
numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8401-8480
16 SIP TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP SIP trunk signaling port directory
numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8501-8580
FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT 1 2 3 4
DIAL 2 ABAND BARGE CAMP -
DIAL 3 DGPALM DGPALM FAUTO -
DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG -
DIAL 5 LCR LCR LCR -
DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA -
DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SELFID
DIAL 8 UA UA VDIAL -
DIAL 9 WAKEUP WAKEUP WAKEUP WAKEUP
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-258 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Feature Code Assignments and Default
Feature Default Description
ABAND 64 ABANDONED CALL
ABS NONE ABSENCE
ABW NONE AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP
ACCT 47 ACCOUNT
ALLCLR NONE ALL CLEAR
ALMCLR 57 ALARM
AUTH NONE AUTHORIZATION CODE
BARGE NONE BARGE-IN
BILL NONE BILL(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
BLOCK NONE OHVA BLOCK
BOSS NONE BOSS/SECRETARY
CAMP 45 STATION CAMP-ON
CANMG 42 MESSAGE CANCEL
CBK 44 CALLBACK
CHIN NONE CHECK IN(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CHOUT NONE CHECK OUT(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CHOICE NONE CHOICE(Related to News Server)
CONF 46 CONFERENCE
CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY
CR NONE CALL RECORD(Requires SVMi card)
CREDIT NONE CREDIT(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION
DICT NONE DICTATION
DIR NONE DIRECTORY
DIRPK 65 DIRECT PICKUP
DISALM 58 DISA ALARM CLEAR
DIVERT NONE EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY
DLOCK 13 DOOR UNLOCK
DND 40 DO NOT DISTURB
DNDO NONE DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE
FAUTO 14 FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH 49 FLASH
FWD 60 CALL FORWARD
GCONF NONE GROUP CONFERENCE
GRPK 66 GROUP PICKUP
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-259
(Continued)
Feature Default Description
HDSET NONE HEADSET MODE
HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP
HOLD 11 HOLD
HOTEL NONE HOTEL(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
IG 53 IN/OUT GROUP
INFDSP NONE INFORMATION DISPLAY(Requires News/Call Plus)
LCR NONE LEAST COST ROUTING
LISTN NONE GROUP LISTENING
LNR 19 LAST NUMBER REDIAL
LOG NONE CALL LOGGING
MMPA 56 MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
MMPG 54 MEET ME PAGE
MSG 43 MESSAGE
MYGRPK * MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP
NEW NONE NEW CALL
NIGHT NONE NIGHT
NOCLIP NONE NO CID SEND
NPAGE NONE NETWORK PAGE
OHVA NONE OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPER 0 OPERATOR
PAGE 55 PAGE
PAGPK 10 PICKUP PAGE HOLD
PARK NONE CALL PARK ORBIT
PMSG 48 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
PTHR NONE PATH REPLACEMENT
RB NONE ROOM BILL(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
REJECT NONE OHVA REJECT
RP NONE RING PLAN
RSV NONE ROOM STATUS VIEW(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
RTO NONE RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE
SELFID NONE SELF SYSTEM ID
SETMG 41 SET MESSAGE W/O RING
SLOCAT NONE STAFF LOCATOR(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
SLTALM EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION
SLTMMC 15 NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-260 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Feature Default Description
SNR 17 SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
SPEED 16 SPEED DIAL
SRELOC NONE SET RELOCATION
STATE NONE SET EXECUTIVE STATE
UA 67 UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VDIAL 681 VOICE DIAL(Requires VDIAL card)
VMADM NONE VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION(Requires SVMi card)
VMAME NONE ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION(Requires SVMi card)
VMMEMO # VOICE MAIL MEMO(Requires SVMi card)
VMMSG NONE VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY(Requires SVMi card)
VMSCMT NONE VMS COMMENT(Requires SVM -800)
VMSMSG NONE VMS MESSAGE(Requires SVM -800)
VMSOUT NONE VMS OUT CALL(Requires SVM -800)
VMSREC NONE VMS RECORD(Requires SVM -800)
VMSVAC NONE VMS VACANT(Requires SVM -800)
VREC 682 VOICE RECORD(Requires VDIAL card)
WAKEUP 18 WAKE UP(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
WCOS 59 WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
FEATURE CODES ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-261
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 724.
Display shows:
STN DIAL NUM:C1
S2-P01:201
2) Dial option number to make selection.(e.g., 06)
OR
FEAT DIAL NUMBER
ABAND :64 _
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3) Dial first letter of feature name.(e.g., 7)
AND
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PAGE :55
Press Volume button to make selection then press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE _
4) Enter digits(e.g., 63) via the dial keypad.
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE 63
5) Press Right Soft button to enter change and
continue to make changes.
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE 63
If an error message appears indicating duplication
of access code, enter 1 for YES for
SAME DIAL EXIST
CHANGE? Y:1,N:0
change or enter 0 for NO for no change.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
ALL MMC
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-262 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[725] SMDR OPTIONS
Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report. The
following options may be selected to print on SMDR:
No Option Default Description
00 PAGE HEADER YES This option determines whether a page header will print
at the top of each page. This would normally be turned
off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine.
01 LINE PER PAGE 60 This option selects the length of each page to determine
when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines
may be in the range 01-99.
02 INCOMING CALL NO This option determines whether incoming calls will print
on SMDR.
03 OUTGOING CALL YES This option determines whether outgoing calls will print
on SMDR.
04 AUTHORIZE
CODE
NO This option determines whether authorization codes will
print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, system make
AUTH field to ‘****’ on SMDR.
05 SMDR START
TIME
YES This option determines whether valid calls will include
the minimum call time in total call duration.
06 IN/OUT GROUP NO This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT
GROUP, to be printed in the digits dialed column each
time a station enters or leaves a group.
07 DND CALL NO This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to
be printed in the digits dialed column each time a station
enters or leaves DND.
08 WAKE-UP CALL YES This option determines whether stations receiving an
alarm reminder call will print on SMDR.
09 DIRECTORY
NAME
NONE This option allows the system administrator to enter a
16 character name which will appear on the SMDR
header.
10 CALLER ID DATA NO This option can be selected to print Caller ID data
received from the Central Office on incoming calls.
This option requires the use of a 132 column(wide carriage)
printer or an 80 column printer set for condensed print.
11 ABANDON CALL NO If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which
CID information was received will print on SMDR.
13 NO. OF DIAL
MASK
0 If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last
digits of the number dialed field will be masked as
asterisks(*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked
digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-263
(Continued)
No Option Default Description
15 INCOMING
ANSWER
NO If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing
before answered will print on SMDR.
16 INTERCOM CALL NO This option determines whether intercom calls will print
on SMDR.
17 KEY MMC IN/OUT NO If set to YES then the SMDR record will show
programming being opened and closed in MMC 200 and
MMC 800.
20 HOTEL PAGE
FEED
END This option determines where the page feed is inserted
on HM REPT.(Hotel/Model Enabled Only)
21 HOTEL START
LINE
0 This option determines that the number of empty lines per
each page on HM REPT.(Hotel/Model Enabled Only)
23 DID NUM/NAME YES If this option is set to YES, received DID information will
print on SMDR.
24 ITP
REGISTRATION
NO If set to YES then the SMDR record will show IP-based
station to system connect and disconnect.
25 SET
RELOCATION
NO If set to YES then the SMDR record will show set
relocated information.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-264 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 725.
Display shows:
PAGE HEADER
PRINT: YES
2) Dial the option number.(e.g., 01)
OR
LINE PER PAGE
60 LINE/PAGE
Use the Volume buttons to scroll through
the options and press Right Soft button
to select an option.
3) Enter the option data.
OR
LINE PER PAGE
50 LINE/PAGE
Use the Volume buttons to press Right
Soft button to save the data and return to step 2.
LINE PER PAGE
50 LINE/PAGE
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-265
[726] VM/AA OPTIONS
This MMC is used to define all the in band DTMF codes sent to voice mail ports. These in
band codes can be 0-9, A, B or C, and performed two functions.
CALL AND TYPE INFORMATION
This is a DTMF signaling string sent to a voice mail port when the voice mail port answers
a call. This DTMF information tells the voice mail port what type of call it is receiving and
where the call is coming from. e.g., call has forwarded from extension 225
CALL PROGRESS TONES
These are sent to the voice mail system to provide information about the progress of the
call. e.g., ring back, busy or disconnect.
Most Voice Mail systems can utilize DTMF in band signaling for more efficient call
processing. This MMC has many parameters that can be programmed according to the type
of automated attendant and/or voice mail system connected.
CALL and TYPE INFORMATION
The format of the DTMF data sent to a VM/AA port is as follows:
[CALL TYPE] + [DN1] + [SEPARATOR] + [DN2]
an example of this would be
[FORWARD ALL] from [225] on trunk [703]
Each field can be programmed individually as follows:
Field Description Default
EXTENSION
FOR DN1
If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a
station is ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will not send station data in the DN1 field.
No TRUNK FOR DN1 If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a
trunk is ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN1 field.
No EXTENSION
FOR DN2
If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the
originating station of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will not send station data in the DN2 field.
No CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-266 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Field Description Default
TRUNK FOR DN2 If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the
originating trunk of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN2 field
No SEPARATOR When both DN1 and DN2 are used, a digit defined here is sent
between DN1 and DN2 so the VMAA system can determine
where DN 1 stops and where DN 2 starts. The separator can be
DTMF 0 through 9, *, #, A, B or C.
No DISCONNECT
SIGNAL
This is the call progress digit sent to the VMAA port in place of a
disconnect open. The digit defined here is sent three times.
C
CALLER ID
NUMBER
If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will send Caller ID data as DTMF tones to the
VMAA port.
No This is the DTMF digit that is sent first in the in band digit string
and can identify any of the following call types
-
No Call Type Description Default
0 DIRECT
CALL
A call originating directly from another
station in the system.
*
1 ALL FWD
CALL
This indicates that a call was forwarded to
the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD ALL set.
#
2 BSY FWD
CALL
This indicates that a call was forwarded to
the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD BUSY set.
#
3 NOA FWD
CALL
This indicates that a call was forwarded to
the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD NO ANSWER set.
#
4 RECALL A call is recalling the VM/AA port after
being transferred and not answered.
#
5 DIR TRK
CALL
A Trunk Line call has gone directly to
VM/AA(e.g., trunk 717 DIL to VM/AA).
*
6 OVERFLOW A call has OVERFLOWED to the VM/AA
port from a station group.
#
7 DID CALL A DID call has called the VM/AA port. B
CALL TYPE ID
8 MESSAGE
CALL
A message button or message reply
feature code has been used to call the
VM/AA port.
*
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-267
(Continued)
Field Description Default
These are the DTMF codes that is sent to the VMAA port in place
of regular progress tones. For example, when a VMAA port goes
off hook to originate or transfer a call, instead of hearing normal
dial tone, it will hear DTMF ‘BA’. Progress tones can greatly
increase the efficiency of a VMAA system because it is easier
and quicker to detect DTMF than a busy, ring back or DND tone.
Progress tones can identify any of the following.
-
No Call Type Description Default
0 DIAL TONE Dial Tone BA
1 BUSY TONE Busy Tone 4
2 RINGBAK
TONE
Ringback Tone 5
3 DND NO
MORE
DND or No More Call Button Error 6
4 HDSET
ANSWER
Off Hook Answer 3
PROGRESS
TONE ID
5 SPKER
ANSWER
On Hook Answer 2
GENERAL RULES
1) 201 is talking to a trunk and presses TRANSFER plus the station number, but the
station is forwarded to VM/AA and VM/AA answers. When this happens, if 201
presses TRANSFER again to return to the trunk, the VM/AA port is not on hold. It is
disconnected.
2) A VM/AA port leaves a message indication for a station. When the station returns the
message, any available port in the VM/AA group should ring, not only the one that
left the message.
3) A VM/AA port leaves a message for a station. When the station returns the message,
the MESSAGE LED is not automatically turned off. If a VM/AA system turns on the
MESSAGE LED, the VM/AA system must turn it off.
4) If DTMF call progress tones are not enabled, the system sends regular call progress
tones.
5) When a VM/AA port calls a station that is in the AUTO ANSWER or VOICE
ANNOUNCE mode, the phone will be forced to ring.
6) All calls to a VM/AA port or group ring with Trunk line ringing cadence, not intercom
ring cadence.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-268 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
EXAMPLES OF VM/AA OPERATION (IN BAND DTMF DIGIT STRING)
In the following example, all call and type data is turned on unless otherwise stated. X is
the separator digit, all-default values are used in these examples and [ ] is not used.
A DIL 701 calls a VM/AA port or group:
[*] + [701] + [ ] + [ ]
In the above example, if Trunk Line information is not used:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is used)
DIL 701 calls a call-forwarded station(205):
[#] + [205] + [X] + [701]
In the above example, if forward information is not used:
[ ] + [205] + [X] + [701]
In the above example, if forward and DN2/Trunk Line information is not used:
[ ] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]
DIL 701 calls group 501 that overflows to VM/AA:
[#] + [501] + [x] + [701]
In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
A DID call rings the VM/AA directly:
[B] + [9999] + [ ] + [ ]
9999 are the DID digits from Trunk Line
In the above example, if did information is turned off:
[ ] + [9999] + [ ] + [ ]
A station transfers(blind or screened) a call(Trunk Line, DID or intercom) to VM/AA group
or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer):
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)
A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a station(225) that is Call Forward All to
a VM/AA group or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer) and the
VM/AA group or port answers:
[#] + [225] + [x] + [702]
A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a group(501) that overflows to a VM/AA
group or port:
[#] + [501] + [X] + [702]
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-269
In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
A station(205) calls a VM/AA port or group:
[Q] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]
In the above example, if direct information is turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
A station(205) calls using MESSAGE key:
[Q] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]
In the above example, if message information is turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
A call(702) recalls back from station 225 to the VM/AA group:
[#] + [225] + [x] + [702]
In the above example, if recall and DN2/CO information are turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
PROGRAM BUTTONS
A Used to input alpha character ‘A’
B Used to insert alpha character ‘B’
C Used to insert alpha character ‘C’
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-270 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 726.
Display shows:
EXT FOR DN1
YES
2) Enter the OPTION number from the above list.
(e.g., 3)
TRK FOR DN2
NO
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
TRK FOR DN2
YES
Press Volume button for selection and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-271
[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE
Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the
central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match
between a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be displayed.
The translation table consists of 1000 entries for a M system and 2000 for a L system.
Each entry is comprised of a ten-digit(14 digits allowed) telephone number and a 16-digit name.
CONDITIONS
NONE
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 728.
Display shows first entry
TRANSLATIO(0001)
DGT:
2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 0005)
OR
TRANSLATIO(0005)
DGT:_
Use Volume button to scroll through entries
and press Right Soft button to select entry.
3) Enter telephone number and press Right Soft
button to advance name entry.
TRANSLATIO(0005)
DGT:3054264100
OR
Enter telephone number and press Let Soft
button to return to step 2.
4) Enter associated name as described above
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
TRANSLATIO(0005)
SAMSUNG TELECOM
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312 ALLOW CID
MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-272 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[730] AA RECORD GAIN
This program is used for adjusting the gain when recording(REC) or playing(PL) on a
built-in auto attendant card.
The adjustments can be made as follows:
Adjustment Description
0. +0.0 No adjustment
1. +1.9 Up 1.9 dB
2. -6.0 Down 6.0 dB
3. -2.5 Down 2.5 dB
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
0 dB
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 730.
Display shows:
[3951]AA GAIN
REC:+0.0 PL:+0.0
2) Dial AA number.(e.g., 3959)
OR
[3959]AA GAIN
REC:+0.0 PL:+0.0
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
3) Press Volume button to select record gain and
press Right Soft button.
[3959]AA GAIN
REC:+1.9 PL:+0.0
4) Press Volume button to select play gain and
press Right Soft button.
[3959]AA GAIN
REC:+1.9 PL:+0.0
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-273
[731] AA RAM CLEAR
Used for making clear AA RAM on a per-AA card basis. Through this MMC,
the system only accepts the first port as a port field and LCD shows its selection.
CONDITIONS
This will erase the whole message that has been programmed previously on the
selected card.
If the system or card is restarted during a recording or right after a recording while the
memory was being rearranged(displays BUSY when played), the memory must be
erased before recording again.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 731.
Display shows:
[3951]RAM CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?NO
2) Dial AA number.(e.g., 3951)
OR
[3951]RAM CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
3) Dial 0(No) or 1(Yes).
OR
[3951]RAM CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
4) Dial 0(No) or 1(Yes) to confirm selection.
OR
[3951]RAM CLEAR
ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-274 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[732] AA TRANSLATION TABLE
AA translation tables are responsible for routing calls based on digits dialed.
There are 12 translation tables available. Each table can be assigned to one or more plans in
MMC 733 Auto Attendant Plan Programming. A translation table consists of a number of
100 entries. Each entry number has two fields to program: the first field is for the digits
received by the caller and the second field is for the destination or action.
The destination field can be a station number, station group or another plan. Plans are
entered by pressing special key A plus two digits 01-12. If a voice mail group is entered,
the call will be transferred to the voice mail system with the appropriate in band digit
packet to indicate a Forward All call from the station number dialed by the caller.
The digits defined in the first field of this MMC [dialed digits] must be a valid station
number.
If the digits programmed as a destination are a voice mail port the voice mail port will
receive an in band packet of DTMF equal to [FWD from EXTENSION NUMBER
DIALED].
There are a number of special characters that are used in translation tables.
They are as follows:
* = Used to represent any digit.
P = (Special Key A) Plan. Used to assign a plan as a destination(P01-P12).
B = (Special Key B) Buffer. When used in the destination field, transfers the call to the
same extension as the digits dialed by the caller.
C = (Special Key C) Change greeting or Ring Plan.
S = (Special Key E) System Speed Dial Number. Used to assign a System Speed Dial
number as a destination.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-275
DESTINATION:
Consider the following entry examples.
Digits Dest Comments
0 0 Caller will be transferred to 0.
2** B If a caller dials any three digit extension number beginning with 2, the call will
be transferred to the extension number dialed.
48#2 C If a caller dials 48#2, the current plan’s greeting may be changed. 48#2 is
essentially a special passcode for changing the current greeting or ring plan.
1 526 If a caller dials 1, the call will be transferred to group 526.
5 P08 If a caller dials 5, the call will be transferred to plan 08.
Number conflicts like 2 and 23 or 56 and 567 are allowed in translation table
programming. In these cases, the system will compare received digits from AA
card after AA TRANS time and transfer to the proper destination.
Entries in the translation table will also provide the following features which are useful if a
mailbox owner does not have a telephone on the system, but does have a SVMi voice
mailbox.
If a caller dials # + nnn he will leave a message directly in the mailbox specified in the
destination.
If a caller dials * + nnn he will log into the mailbox specified in the destination.
If the translation table contains an entry like nnn = D(D is selected using the fourth Soft button)
callers dialling nnn will leave a message directly in the mailbox specified in the destination.
NOTES ABOUT CHANGING RING PLANS AND ALTERNATE GREETING:
MANUAL SERVICE
1) When the phone system changes ring plans, the AA greetings will also change as
programmed in MMC 733.
2) When the AA alternate greeting passcode is entered the caller may input a digit to
change the ring plan. This means that a customer who wants to put the system in
a different ring plan can call in remotely and do it.
3) When the alternate greeting passcode is entered, the system will allow to select a
ring plan. If a RP(ring plan) key is programmed on the system it will FLASH.
The normal status of this light in a ring plan is on steady. A flashing RP key
corresponding to the ring plan indicates the remote ring plan has been set. If a
RTO key is available it will also flash.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-276 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) If the alternate greeting is not activated but the ring plan is changed the system
will remain in the selected ring plan until the next scheduled ring plan change.
If the alternate greeting is activated the system will remain in the existing ring
plan or the selected ring plan until the alternate greeting is manually deactivated.
5) To implement ring plan changes and /or the alternate greeting the caller must enter
the number or ‘passcode’ that implements the special key program. After the
passcode is entered the caller must enter 2 digits. The first digit selects the desired
ring plan to change to(1-6) or 0 for no change. The second digit activates the
alternate message.
0 for no alternate message or 1 for alternate message.
Example: Caller dials into the system and is answered by the AA card. The caller then
input the special code or ‘password’ 48#2. The caller then dials 3 to select ring plan 3
and then dials 1 to turn on the alternate greeting. The system now ring according to
ring plan 3. Ring plan 3 is directed to the AA card and the caller is now answered by
the alternate greeting.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
TABLE 01
Entry Digits Destination
001 0 500
002 2*** B
003 3*** B
004 5*** B
005 8*** B
006 9 P03
ALL OTHER TABLES ARE EMPTY
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-277
PROGRAM BUTTONS
A Used to enter P on destination field
B Used to enter B on digit or destination field
C Used to enter C on destination field
D Used to enter D on destination field
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 732.
Display shows:
AA TRANS TB (01)
001:0 500
2) Dial TABLE number.(01-12, e.g., 02)
OR
AA TRANS TB (02)
001: NONE
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.
3) Dial ENTRY number.(001-100, e.g., 002)
OR
AA TRANS TB (02)
002: NONE
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.
4) Enter Dial DIGIT and press Right Soft button. AA TRANS TB(02)
002:2∗∗ NONE
5) Enter Destination.
OR
AA TRANS TB(02)
002:2∗∗ 201
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 733 AUTO ATTENDANT PLAN PROGRAMMING
MMC 507 RING PLAN TIME
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-278 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[733] AA PLAN TABLE
Used to program each AA plan. A plan is a module that processes a call. There are twelve
plans available in each AA card. Each plan can route a caller to any group, extension or
another plan. Each port can answer calls with a different plan as defined in MMC 735.
This MMC includes options to select messages to play to a caller. These messages can be
as follows:
Message Description
MESSAGES 01-48 These can be created using the AAREC Soft button(programmed on
phones by using MMC 722 or 723). A total of two minutes of message
time is available.
MESSAGES 49-64 These are pre-programmed as follows:
(The announcement may be different according to the AA MSG ROM)
49 ‘Thank you for calling, please dial your party’s extension number’.
50 ‘Invalid number, please try again’.
51 ‘I’m sorry, there is no answer’.
52 ‘I’m sorry, that station is busy’.
53 ‘One moment please’.
54 ‘Transferring’.
55 ‘I’ll transfer you’.
56 ‘Good-bye’.
57 ‘Thank you’.
58 ‘Please hold for the operator’.
59 ‘Please hold for assistance’.
60 ‘Thank you, good-bye’.
61 ‘I’m sorry, all stations are presently busy’.
62 ‘I’m sorry, all stations are still busy’.
63 ‘Please call back later’.
64 ‘I’m sorry, not a valid selection’.
PLAN MESSAGE
(RING PLANS 01-06)
This is the message that will be heard by the caller when the AA port
answers a call if the telephone system is in a particular ring mode or if
another message has been selected by the AA administrator. This
message has a default selection of AA ROM message number 49 but it
can be replaced with a customized message(01-48) or with any other
ROM message(49-64). For instructions on how to create these recordings
see Special Applications, Auto Attendant/Uniform Call Distribution.
ALTERNATE
MESSAGE
This is the message that will be heard by the caller when the AA port
answers a call if this message has been selected by the AA administrator.
This message has a default selection of 49 but it can be replaced with a
customized message(01-48) or with any other ROM message(49-64).
For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special
Applications, Auto Attendant/Uniform Call Distribution.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-279
(Continued)
Message Description
INVALID MESSAGE Determines what message will play if the caller dials invalid digits
repeatedly until the retry counter expires. Invalid digits are digits not
contained in the translation table for this plan. The invalid message will
repeat for the value contained in the retry counter. This message has a
default selection of ROM message 64 but it can be replaced with a
customized message(01-48) or with any other ROM message(49-64).
For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special
Applications, Auto Attendant/Uniform Call Distribution.
NO ANSWER
MESSAGE
Determines what message will play if the caller is recalled to the AA port
because of a no answer. This message has a default selection of ROM
message number 51 but it can be replaced with a customized
message(01-48) or with any other ROM message (49-64). For instructions
on how to create these recordings see Special Applications, Auto Attendant/
Uniform Call Distribution.
TRANSFER
MESSAGE
Determines what message will play if the caller is transferred.
This message has a default selection of ROM message number 53 but it
can be replaced with a customized message(01-48) or with any other
ROM message(49-64). For instructions on how to create these recordings
see Special Applications, Auto Attendant/Uniform Call Distribution.
BUSY MESSAGE Determines what message will play if the caller selects a busy station.
This message has a default selection of ROM message number 52 but it
can be replaced with a customized message(01-48) or with any other
ROM message(49-64). For instructions on how to create these recordings
see Special Applications, Auto Attendant/Uniform Call Distribution.
NO STATION
MESSAGE
Determines what message will play if the caller dials an invalid
extension(not installed). This message has a default selection of ROM
message number 50 but it can be replaced with a customized
message(01-48) or with any other ROM message(49-64). This retry
message will repeat for the value contained in the retry counter. See Retry
Count. For instructions on how to create these recordings see Special
Applications, Auto Attendant/Uniform Call Distribution.
NO ACTION
MESSAGE
Determines what message will play if the caller does not act. This
message has a default selection of ROM message number 59 but it can
be replaced with a customized message(01-48) or with any other ROM
message(49-64).
CAMP-ON Determines if calls will be transferred to busy stations. Calls transferred to
busy stations will be camped-on. The default value is OFF.
ANSWER DELAY Sets how many rings will occur before this plan answers a call. The
default value is 01 second.
RETRY COUNT Determines how many selection errors a caller may make before being
transferred to the invalid digits destination. In case of no action, will not
follow this option.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-280 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
Message Description
TRANSLATION
TABLE
Determines what translation table this plan will use.(see MMC 732 Auto
Attendant Trans Table) The default value is same number of plan number.
BUSY DESTINATION Determines the destination for the call if the selected destination is busy.
This can be another station, station group or plan. Plans are entered by
pressing A button plus two digits 01-12.
NO ANSWER
DESTINATION
Determines the destination for the call if the selected destination does not
answer. This can be another station, station group or plan. Plans are
entered by pressing A button plus two digits 01-12.
NO ACTION
DESTINATION
Determines the destination for the call if the caller makes no response(this
is also the destination for rotary dial callers). This can be another station,
station group or plan. Plans are entered by pressing A button plus two
digits 01-12.
INVALID
DESTINATION
Determines the destination for the call if the caller dials invalid digits after
the retry counter has expired. This destination can be another station,
station group or plan. Plans are entered by pressing A button plus two
digits 01-12.
NOTE ABOUT
TRUNK SIGNALING
UCD is designed to hold a call until an agent is available. It is therefore
essential that a customer gets a disconnect from the Trunk Line when a
caller hangs up. If not the call may be held in the UCD loop until
answered. This could be a long time, and when an agent finally does
answer there would be no one there.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
RETRY COUNT: 3
BUSY DESTINATION: 500
NO ANSWER DESTINATION: 500
NO ACTION DESTINATION: 500
INVALID DESTINATION: 500
PROGRAM BUTTONS
A Used to enter P on destination field
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-281
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 733.
Display shows:
AA PLAN PROG(01)
PLAN MSG1 :49
2) Enter AA plan number via dial keypad.
OR
AA PLAN PROG(05)
PLAN MSG1 :49
Press Volume button to select a plan number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter option number via dial keypad.
OR
AA PLAN PROG(05)
PLAN MSG3 :49
Press Volume button to select a option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter option data via dial keypad.
OR
AA PLAN PROG(05)
PLAN MSG3 :02
Press Volume button to select a data and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 RING PLAN TIME
MMC 732 AUTO ATTENDANT TRANS TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-282 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[735] AA USE TABLE
Determines what plan will answer each call. Each AA is assigned a specific plan and each
AA group assigned in MMC 601 is assigned a specific plan. When a call is received by an
AA port, the appropriate plan will answer the call depending on the port or group that was
called.
Programming what port is called
You are not programming what port answers, but what port is called.
The following example shows how flexible this system is:
AA Port or Group AA Plan to Answer
3951 PLAN 01
3952 PLAN 02
3953 PLAN 03
AA GROUP 510(3951, 3952, 3953) PLAN 04
AA GROUP 511(3951, 3952) PLAN 05
AA GROUP 512(3953, 3954) PLAN 06
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL PORTS AND GROUPS: PLAN 01
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 735.
Display shows first AA group:(e.g., 510)
[518] AA PLAN
PLAN NO:01
2) Enter AA port or AA group number.
OR
[510] AA PLAN
PLAN NO:01
Press Volume button to select a AA port or group
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter AA plan number.
Press Volume button to select a AA plan number
[510]AA PLAN
PLAN NO:04
and press Right Soft button to save and return
step 2.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-283
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 733 AUTO ATTENDANT PLAN PROGRAMMING
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-284 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[736] AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH
It is possible to make 48 customized recordings on the AA ports of the AA card.
For instructions on how to create these recordings, see User Instructions, Auto Attendant
and Uniform Call Distribution System Administration.
It is important to understand the difference between recordings and messages.
For example, you have customized recording 01 as ‘Thank you for calling’ and you have
customized recording #02 as ‘One moment please’. By default, message 01 is recording 01.
When message 01 is selected as part of AA or UCD programming, the caller hears ‘thank
you for calling’(recording 01). When message 02 is selected, the caller hears ‘one moment
please’(recording 02). If you need a new message that says ‘thank you for calling, one
moment please,’ you can record this as recording 03 and play it as message 03 but this uses
some of the RAM storage on the AA card.
An easier way is to link recordings 01 and 02 to produce message 03.
This is the purpose of this MMC. We simply tell the system that message 03 equals
recording 01 plus recording 02. In this MMC, the top line of the phone display indicates a
message number and the bottom line indicates the recording numbers.
CONDITIONS
Not applicable when playing using [AAPLAY] button.
DEFAULT DATA
EACH MESSAGE IS EQUAL TO THE CORRESPONDING RECORDING
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 736.
Display shows:
AA MSG MATCH(01)
01
2) Enter message number via dial keypad.
OR
AA MSG MATCH(05)
05
Press Volume button to select a message and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter one or more recording numbers and press
Right Soft button to return step 2.
AA MSG MATCH(05)
26+14+45+12+02
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS
MMC 733 AUTO ATTENDANT PLAN PROGRAMMING
MMC 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-285
[739] ASSIGN AA MOH
Used to define what message 01-48 plays as a Music on Hold(MOH) source if selected in
MMC 309 or 408. This message will repeat continuously. Only the last AA port on an AA
card can be used as a MOH source. This MMC assigns a message number to the last port of
each card.
CONDITIONS
This MMC must be programmed before AA/MOH data can be assigned in MMCs 309, 408
and 607.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 739.
Display shows:
[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG :NOT USE
2) Enter AA port number.
OR
[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG :NOT USE
Press Volume button to select a AA port and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter AA MOH message number.
Press Volume button to select a AA MOH number
[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG :33
and press Right Soft button to save and return step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS
MMC 736 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-286 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[740] DECT SYSTEM CODE
Used to identify your DECT system and the handsets your register with your system.
The DECT system Code for your system is actually made up of two fields:
the System ID which is three hexadecimal digits in the range 000 to 999; and the Auth
Code(short for Authentication Code) which is four hexadecimal digits in the range 0000 to
9999. The default values are 000 and FFFF respectively.
The DECT System Code/Register handsets Change
Only the system administrator and/or installer should be allowed access to
change the DECT System Code and Register handsets.
CONDITIONS
You must use this MMC to change the default values for the values you have been
provided with by your supplier. If you do not change the defaults you will not be able
to register handsets.
Once you have entered your new System ID and Auth Code using this MMC you can
then begin registering your handsets with the Auth Code. The system checks the Auth
Code entered for each handset against the DECT Auth Code. If it is the same, the
registration procedure continues; otherwise, the system rejects the registration
procedure.
DEFAULT DATA
AUTH CODE: FFFF
SYSTEM ID: 000
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 740.
Display shows:
DECT SYSTEM CODE
AUTH CODE:FFFF
2) Dial 0 for AUTH code or 1 for system ID.
OR
DECT SYSTEM CODE
AUTH CODE:FFFF
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) If option is AUTH code, enter AUTH CODE
via dial keypad.(e.g., 1234)
DECT SYSTEM CODE
AUTH CODE:1234
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-287
If option is system ID, enter system ID via
dial keypad.(e.g., 567)
DECT SYSTEM COD
SYSTEM ID:567
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 741 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
MMC 743 DBS RESTART
MMC 744 BSI STATUS
MMC 745 DBS STATUS
MMC 746 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
MMC 747 BSI RF CARRIER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-288 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[741] DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
Used for deleting previously registered information of DECT handsets.
This MMC has two modes:
Mode Description
FORCED When this mode is programmed, the system clears the registered information by
force.
NORMAL Whenever the system wants to clear the registration of a DECT handset, the
deletion must be confirmed from the handset. If the confirmation is successful, the
system clears the registered information.(If the confirmation fails, the system
cannot clear the information)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
FORCED MODE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 741.
Display shows:
[8801]DECT CLEAR
MODE:FORCED
2) Enter DECT terminal number via dial keypad.
OR
[8801]DECT CLEAR
MODE:FORCED
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
3) Enter 0 for FORCED mode or 1 for NORMAL
mode.
[8801]DECT CLEAR
MODE:NORMAL
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
[8801]DECT CLEAR
DECT CLEAR :NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-289
5) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
[8801]DECT CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 740 DECT SYSTEM CODE
MMC 743 DBS RESTART
MMC 744 BSI STATUS
MMC 745 DBS STATUS
MMC 746 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
MMC 747 BSI RF CARRIER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-290 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[743] DBS RESTART
Provides a method of restarting DBS and BSI card.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 743.
Display shows:.
BSI SLOT:1 DBS:1
RESTART? NO
2) Select the BSI slot via dial button pad.
OR
BSI SLOT:1 DBS:1
RESTART? NO
Press Volume button to select BSI slot and press
Right Soft button.
3) Select the DBS number via dial button pad.
OR
BSI SLOT:1 DBS:3
RESTART? NO
Press Volume button to select DBS number and
Right Soft button..
If you want to restart BSI card, press ANS/RLS
button and press Right Soft button.
BSI SLOT:1 DBS:A
RESTART? NO
4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
BSI SLOT:1 DBS:3
RESTART? YES
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
5) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
BSI SLOT:1 DBS:3
ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-291
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 740 DECT SYSTEM CODE
MMC 741 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
MMC 744 BSI STATUS
MMC 745 DBS STATUS
MMC 746 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
MMC 747 BSI RF CARRIER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-292 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[744] BSI STATUS
This MMC shows the status of the BSI card.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 744.
Display shows:.
BSI STATUS
M:SUCC-SUCC-SUCC
If status of BSI card is good, the display
shows ‘SUCC’.
2) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 740 DECT SYSTEM CODE
MMC 741 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
MMC 743 DBS RESTART
MMC 745 DBS STATUS
MMC 746 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
MMC 747 BSI RF CARRIER
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-293
[745] DBS STATUS
This MMC shows the status of the DECT base stations(DBS).
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 745.
Display shows:.
DBS 12345678 S:1
STS:00000000
2) Select the BSI card via dial button pad.
OR
DBS 12345678 S:2
STS:00000000
Press Volume button to make selection.
The status of each DBS is displayed:
If the status is good, ‘1’ is displayed.
If the status is not good, ‘0’ is displayed.
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 740 DECT SYSTEM CODE
MMC 741 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
MMC 743 DBS RESTART
MMC 744 BSI STATUS
MMC 746 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
MMC 747 BSI RF CARRIER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-294 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[746] DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
Allows DECT handset registration to be enabled on a system. If this MMC is not opened
and an attempt is made to register a DECT handset, an error message will be displayed.
The default passcode can be changed using MMC 202.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 746.
Display shows:.
ENABLE DECT REG.
PASSCODE:_
2) Enter passcode. ENABLE DECT REG.
PASSCODE:****
If the correct code is entered the display shows. ENABLE DECT REG.
DISABLE
If the SYSTEM ID in MMC 740 has not been set,
the following message will be displayed.
ENABLE DECT REG.
NO REG.SYSTEM ID
3) Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.
OR
ENABLE DECT REG.
ENABLE
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 740 DECT SYSTEM CODE
MMC 741 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
MMC 743 DBS RESTART
MMC 744 BSI STATUS
MMC 745 DBS STATUS
MMC 747 BSI RF CARRIER
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-295
[747] BSI RF CARRIER
A base station uses one of 10 channels(FDMA technology). This MMC is used to allow or
deny the use of each channel(carrier). By default, all carriers can be used by a base station.
0: Carrier can be used
1: Carrier cannot be used
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
1111111111
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 747.
The display shows the status of each carrier(0-9):
CARS:0123456789
SELS:1111111111
If ‘1’ is shown below a carrier then this carrier can be
used by the base station.
If ‘0’ is shown below a carrier then this carrier cannot
be used by the base station.
2) Dial 1 or 0 for each carrier.
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 740 DECT SYSTEM CODE
MMC 741 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
MMC 743 DBS RESTART
MMC 744 BSI STATUS
MMC 745 DBS STATUS
MMC 746 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-296 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[748] COSTING DIAL PLAN
The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialed digits of a dialed number
and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in three
fields: ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference.
DIGITS
Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to ten digits. These are the entries
that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialed by the station making the call.
This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the
table that match the number dialed. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING
DIAL PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialed digits will be matched to 1 because
1308 and 1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician
or when any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical
order.
Wild cards(∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Character
assignment(MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries
are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed.
DIAL PLAN
This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern(1-7, 8).
This pattern is used by MMC 433 TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing
according to MMC 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialed, the system checks MMC
749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call.
EXAMPLES
When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to
find a match. If 13056 is dialed and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, 1305
is the closest match and this entry will be selected. If 1305 is dialed and this MMC contains
entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials another
digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be
selected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6,
the 13 entry is the closest match.
Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because
this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after
exact digits. If 1813 and 18∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is
found, it will check 18∗∗.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-297
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 748.
Display shows.
COST DP (001)
DIGIT:
2) Dial CALL COST entry.(e.g., 005)
OR
COST DP (005)
DIGIT:
Press Volume button to select entry and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter digit string via the dial keypad and
press Right Soft button.
COST DP (005)
DIGIT:1305
4) Enter DIAL PLAN(1-8).
OR
COST DP (005)
CALL RATE: NONE
Press Volume button to select dial plan and
press Right Soft button to save and move step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 433 COST RATE
MMC 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-298 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[749] RATE CALCULATION TABLE
The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST
RATE. These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan.
There are eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields.
No Type Description
0 FIRST INTERVAL
DURATION
This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a
fixed cost is applied. The range is from 0 to 999 seconds, for
example, 180 seconds(three minutes).
1 FIRST INTERVAL
COST
This is the dollar cost for the first interval duration.
The range is from 0 to 999, for example, 345($3.45).
2 SECOND INTERVAL
DURATION
This is the amount of time for the duration of each billing increment
after the first interval has expired. The range is from 0 to 999
seconds, for example, 006 seconds(six seconds).
3 SECOND INTERVAL
COST
This is the dollar cost for each billing increment. The range is from
0 to 999, for example 100($1.00).
4 SURCHARGE This is a one-time charge that is applied to the call over and above
the time charges. The range is from 0 to 999, for example
150($1.50).
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL COST RATES NO DATA
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 749.
Display shows.
COST RATE (1)
1ST DUR :000 SEC
2) Dial COST RATE number.(1-8, e.g., 3)
OR
COST RATE (3)
1ST DUR :000 SEC
Press Volume button to select COST RATE and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial option number.(0-4, e.g., 1)
OR
COST RATE (3)
1ST COST:000
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-299
4) Enter data via dial keypad.(e.g., 125: $1.25)
OR
COST RATE (3)
1ST COST:125
Press Volume button to select data and press
Right Soft button to save and move step 3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 433 TRUNK COST RATE
MMC 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-300 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[750] VM CARD RESTART
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug In Voice Mail Card.
There are three options available in this MMC:
No Option Description
0 DOWNLOAD When the Built-In Voice Mail card starts, part of the power up
procedure will download data from the system to determine time,
date, what mailboxes to create, and system numbering plan. This
must be done at least once, but once done this download feature
can be turned NO to save boot up time.
1 CARD RESTART If this option is set to YES the Built-In Voice Mail card will
immediately restart according to the download OPTION specified
above.
This option is determine which type virtual port include during
mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure.
The virtual port type are followed:
No Type Description
0 VIRTUAL EXT Virtual extension number
1 DESKTOP ITP DESKTOP IP-based phone number
2 DECT PHONE DECT terminal number
3 MOBILE ITP Wireless IP-based mobile phone
number
4 BRI STATION ISDN terminal number
5 VOIP NET TRK VoIP networking trunk number
6 VOIP 323 TRK VoIP H.323 trunk number
7 VOIP SIP TRK VoIP SIP trunk number
2 VIRTUAL NUMBER
DOWNLOAD
8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking
Remove Built-In Voice Mail Card
If during any test procedures you need to run the system with a default database
and power up with this MMC option set to YES the Built-In Voice Mail database
will be overwritten according to the data in MMC 751 and the default numbering
plan. If you plan this type of test, remove Built-In Voice Mail Card until the
procedure is finished and the customer database is reloaded.
CONDITIONS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-301
DEFAULT DATA
ALL OPTIONS ARE NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 750.
Display shows:.
VM CARD RESTART
DOWNLOAD ? NO
2) Dial 0,1 or 2 to set option and advance.
OR
VM CARD RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
3) Dial 0(No) or 1(Yes) to confirm selection.
OR
VM CARD RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-302 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card. It assigns each station or
group as having a mailbox(yes or no). When stations or groups are flagged as YES, during
Voice Mail card power up mailboxes will be created for each directory number with a
‘YES’ entry.
Once the Voice Mail database has been created new boxes can be added.
a) Through Voice Mail administration,
b) By adding a new mailbox in this system and cycling system power.
If a mailbox is to be removed it must be done through Voice Mail administration.
If a station that do not have an associated voice mailbox, call the Voice Mail system they
will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting.
CONDITIONS
Mailboxes that are needed for people that do not have an extension must be added through
Voice Mail programming.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS: YES
ALL GROUPS: NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 751.
Display shows:.
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
[201] YES
2) Dial station number.
OR
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
[202] YES
Press Volume button to scroll the number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.
OR
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
[202] NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move stop 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-303
[752] AUTO RECORD
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.
Some specific station in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record
conversations. When this option is set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls(incoming or
outgoing) can be recorded.
When this option is selected a specific port can be assigned for each station set to automatic
conversation recording or the effectiveness of this feature cannot be guaranteed.
In this MMC you can assign:
Station number: Which station use this feature.
Mailbox number: What mailbox the conversation are recorded in.
I, O or B: What type of conversations are recorded, in, out or both.
Voice mail port number: What port is dedicated to the station.
A maximum of 8 stations can this feature in the system.
The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result
in an error message.
When using the auto record feature
Before using the auto record feature make sure that you are not violating any
state or federal laws. Some states require that the recorded party be notified.
SAMSUNG is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.
CONDITIONS
When a Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail
group defined in MMC 601.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-304 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 752.
Display shows:.
AUTO RECORD
STN:201 MB:NONE
2) Dial station number via dial keypad.
OR
AUTO RECORD
STN:201 MB:NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial mailbox number via dial keypad.
OR
AUTO RECORD
STN:201 MB:201
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Dial VM number via dial keypad.
OR
AUTO RECORD
PORT:209 CALL:I
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Dial call type via dial keypad.(0: I, 1: O or 2: B)
OR
AUTO RECORD
PORT:209 CALL:B
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
6) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-305
[753] WARNING DESTINATION
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.
This MMC provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the Voice Mail card, if
the Voice Mail card is removed or is offline.
In addition any calls that are forwarded to the Voice Mail card will not forward, they will
remain ringing at the ‘fwd from’ station until answered.
This destination can be a station number or a group number.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
500
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 753.
Display shows:.
WARNING DEST.
DEST:500
2) Dial station number or group number.
OR
WARNING DEST.
DEST:501
Press Volume button to scroll the number.
3) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-306 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[754] VM HALT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.
This MMC is used to halt the Voice Mail card(take it offline). It ensures that there is no
traffic on the Voice Mail card when it is removed from the system.
CONDITIONS
This operation should be performed before removing the voice mail card mail card from
the system.
DEFAULT DATA
PROC
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 754.
Display shows:.
VM HALT
STATUS:PROC
2) Enter 1 to halt or 0 to process.
OR
VM HALT
STATUS:PROC
Press Volume button to scroll the selections.
3) When you select 1 to halt, display shows:
Press 1 to confirm.
VM HALT
ARE YOU SURE?YES
4) Display shows:
VM HALT
STATUS:HALT
5) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-307
[755] VM ALARM
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.
This MMC will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever
the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a threshold.
The threshold is measured in % full. This means that if the MMC is set for 80, the alarm
will be generated when the disk exceeds 80 % of the available drive space.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
80 %
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 755.
Display shows:
VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:80
2) Enter new threshold level. VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:75
3) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-308 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[756] ASSIGN VM MOH
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.
This MMC is used to assign each port a Music on Hold source for the system from a sound
file located on the Built-In Voice Mail Card hard disk drive. The 100 available sound files
are defined as numbers 5000 to 5099.
Basically Built-In Voice Mail Card supports various music for numbers 5000 to 5099.
If you want to use default Built-In Voice Mail Card support music, select the number.
Otherwise, make sure you record the sound file first. The next step is to assign the sound
file to a Built-In Voice Mail port. For example, if you record sound file 5025 you would
associate 25 with a specific Built-In Voice Mail port, e.g., 225. This will dedicate the port
for use only as MOH and remove it from group 529 or 549.
Now 225 will show up as a valid music source in MMC 308, 309 and 408.
Each Music on Hold source assigned here requires one Built-In Voice Mail port.
When the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH
If the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH, it must be disabled before
boot up since Built-In Voice Mail Card and the system use port 1 during boot up to
exchange critical information. For this reason we suggest you use the last port as
VMMOH ports.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NOT USE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-309
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 756.
Display shows:
SET VMMOH
209 : NOT USE
2) Dial VM number.
OR
SET VMMOH
215 : NOT USE
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter VM message number.
OR
SET VMMOH
215 : 25
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-310 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[757] VM IN/OUT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.
This MMC is used to assign each Voice Mail Port as used for incoming, outgoing or both
way calls. Note that this MMC must support outgoing calls if off premises notification
(beeper, outbound follow me of outbound notification) is used.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
IN/OUT
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 757.
Display shows:
VM IN/OUT
209 : IN/OUT
2) Dial VM number.
OR
VM IN/OUT
215 : IN/OUT
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter In or Out via dial keypad.
OR
VM IN/OUT
215 : IN
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-311
[758] VM DAY/NIGHT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail Card.
Built-In Voice Mail Card can operate in either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode.
This mode will determine what main menu greetings and options are played to the callers.
This operating mode can change automatically(if enabled in Built-In Voice Mail Card)
according to the setting in this MMC.
This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS: DAY
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 758.
Display shows:
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 1 : DAY
2) Enter ring plan number.
OR
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 3 : DAY
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3)
Dial 0 for day or 1 for night.
OR
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 3 : DAY
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 RING PLAN TIME
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-312 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[759] CLI RINGING
Assigns a specific CID number received from the central office to a specific ring plan
destination. And this programming allows the technician to reject the specific CID number
and assign its own priority. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority
9 is the lowest.
It also allows to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific CID number.
There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for single line sets.
There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station(NO) option for the phones.
There are 5 cadences and a Follow Station option(NO) for SLT’s
The CID Ringing table consists of 500 entries.
Option Description
CLI CID number to be received from the central office. Up to 16 digits may be
entered.
REJ CID call reject option. When this sets YES, if a call comes that matched CID
number and CLI field then the system will be reject call.
PRI CID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and
priority 9 is the lowest. When calls into station group come and group
members are all busy, the system will assign a priority to the CID number so
that calls from a high priority CID number will be placed at the front of the
group queue.
If this option sets NO, the longest call that placed at the group queue has
the highest priority.
R1: XXX, R2: XXX,
R3: XXX, R4: XXX,
R5: XXX, R6: XXX
Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a
station, station group.
Ring Tone options for a specific CID Number.(NO, 1~8)
No Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency.
TONE
1~8 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring phones with this
ring frequency.
Ring Cadence options for a specific CID Number at SLT’s(NO, 1~5)
No Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.
1 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the
intercom ring cadence.
2 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CO
ring cadence.
3 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the
DOOR ring cadence.
4 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the
ALARM ring cadence.
CAD
5 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the
CALLBACK ring cadence.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-313
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 759.
Display shows first entry.
CLI RINGING(001)
CLI:
2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 005)
OR
CLI RINGING(005)
CLI:_
Use Volume button to scroll through entries
and press Right Soft button to select entry.
3) Enter CID number and press Right Soft button to
advance next entry.
CLI RINGING(005)
CLI:1234567
OR
Enter CID number and press Left Soft button
to return to step 2.
4) Enter reject option via dial keypad.
(1 for YES, 0 for NO)
CLI RINGING(005)
REJ:NO PRI:NO
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance next step.
5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.( 1-9 or NO)
OR
CLI RINGING(005)
REJ:NO PRI:NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft buttons to advance next step.
6) Enter station or group number for each Ring plan
destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 501)
CLI RINGING(005)
R1:501 R2:NONE
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-314 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
7) Dial 1-8(or NO)to select ring tone.(e.g., 2)
OR
CLI RINGING(005)
TONE:2 CAD:NO
Press Volume button to select ring tone and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
8) Dial 1-5(or NO)to select ring cadence.
OR
CLI RINGING(005)
TONE:2 CAD:NO
Press Volume button to select ring cadence and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
9) press TRANSFER to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312 ALLOW CID
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-315
[760] ITEM COST TABLE
This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10 character
name for the item. There are a maximum of 100 entries(00 to 99) in the table with item 00
reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and
items 89 to 99 are reserved for other PMS stream items.
These item codes with the exception of codes 93 to 99 will appear on the guests bill at
checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for. The room bill, when
printed will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field
will show the number dialed. In addition to the name up to 8 of the tax codes or rates
defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item.
PRE DEFINED CODES
No Code Description
Room Deposit This is the code used for pre pay room deposits.
01 Phone Deposit This is the code used for pre pay phone deposits
02-88 - User Assignable Code
89 W/UP SET A wake up call was set
90 W/UP ANS A wake up call was answered
91 W/UP N/ANS A wake up call was not answered
92 W/UP CANCL A wake up call was cancelled
93 Check In A guest has checked into a room
94 Check out A guest has checked out of a room
95 Available A room has been flagged as Available
96 Occupied A room has been flagged as Occupied
97 Clean Room A room has been flagged as needs cleaning
98 Fix Room A room has been flagged as need maintenance
99 Hold A room has been flagged as hold
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
NO ENTRIES
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-316 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 760.
Display shows:
ITEM CODE (00)
NAME:RM Deposit
2) Enter valid code number(e.g., 02) via dial
Keypad.
ITEM CODE (02)
NAME:
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter in item name(e.g., ROOM COST) via
keypad using the method described above.
ITEM CODE (02)
NAME:CLASS A
4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax
entry step.
ITEM CODE (02)
TAXES:00000000
5) Enter in the tax rates in MMC 761 that apply to this
item and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
ITEM CODE (02)
TAXES:11000000
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-317
[761] TAX RATE SETUP
This MMC allows the technician to set up the 8 tax rates used in MMC 760. Each tax rate
may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost. In addition a 10
character name may be used to define the reason for the tax. The Various options are
further detailed below.
Option Description
TAX RATE This is the number assigned to this tax rate. The tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to
match the rate field in MMC 760 counting from left to right.
TYPE This is the type of tax and defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage(%) of
the cost of an item or is added as a fixed dollar value($) to an item or is applied as
a Inclusive VAT percentage(I) of the cost of an item.
VALUE This is the actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost.
NAME This is a 10 character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.
INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
DEFAULT DATA
All rates are %
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 761.
Display shows:
TAX RATE (1)
TYPE:% VAL:00.00
2) Enter valid tax number, e.g., 2 via dial button pad.
OR
TAX RATE (2)
TYPE:% VAL:00.00
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 0 for ‘%’, 1 for ‘C’ or 2 for ‘I’.
(Inclusive VAT)
TAX RATE (2)
TYPE:C VAL:00.00
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-318 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Enter in the tax rate or value via dial button pad.
OR
TAX RATE (2)
TYPE:C VAL:01.25
Press Volume button to make selection.
If valid entry, system advances cursor.
5) Enter name using above table and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
TAX RATE (2)
NAME:MIA BED
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-319
[762] ROOM COST RATE
This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates according to week. Each room cost
Rate can be assigned with the percentage of the room cost from Sunday to Saturday.
EXAMPLE: If you set SUN: 150 %, 1. MON: 100 %, 2.TUE: 090 % ...
If you set $100 for the room cost in CHECK-IN procedure under above condition.
The real room cost will be $150 on Sunday and $90 on Tuesday.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION'.
DEFAULT DATA
All rates are 100 %
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 762.
Display shows:
RM COST RAT(SUN)
100% :
2) Dial day number.(0-6, e.g., 2)
OR
RM COST RAT(TUE)
100% :
Press Volume button to select day and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter room cost rate.(001-999, e.g., 090) RM COST RAT(TUE)
100% :090
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-320 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and
an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message will be displayed.
CONDITIONS
A four digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits 0-9.
When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 800.
Display shows:
ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE:
2) Enter passcode.
ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE:∗∗∗∗
Correct code shows: ENABLE TECH.PROG
DISABLE TENANT:1
Incorrect code shows:
ENABLE TECH. PROG
PASSCODE ERROR
3) Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable.
OR
ENABLE TECH.PROG
ENABLE TENANT:1
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move tenant number and
enter tenant number(1-2).
4) Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level. 801:TEC.PASSCODE
SELECT PROG.ID
5) Enter the MMC desired.(e.g., 209) 209:AOM MASTER
AOM NOT EXIST
6) To log out and return to MMC 800, press
Volume button to select DISABLE.
OR
Press Speaker button then Transfer to return to
normal display.
Programming option will time out.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-321
[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800 Enable Technician Program
from its current value.
CONDITIONS
The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current or old
passcode is required for this MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
DEFAULT PASSCODE: 4321
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 801. TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
2) Enter new passcode. TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗
3) Enter new passcode again.
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :∗∗∗∗
4) If passcode is correct, press Right Soft
key to continue and enter desired MMC.
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS
If passcode is incorrect. TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE
System returns to step 2. TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-322 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
Allows the System Administrator to have access to certain MMCs. For example,
it is required that the System Administrator customer have access to MMC 102 Call
Forward for call forwarding but it is not required that the System Administrator have access
to MMC 710 LCR Digit Table for LCR dial plans. This MMC is for both tenants.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 802.
Display shows:
CUST.USE MMC :1
100:STN LOCK:YES
2) Enter desired tenant number(1-2) via dial keypad.
OR
MMC TENANT:1
100:STN LOCK:YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad.
OR
MMC TENANT:1
102:CALL FWD:YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad.
OR
MMC TENANT:1
102:CALL FWD:NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to
make additional entries.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-323
[803] ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
Allows the assignment of tenant groups on a per-cabinet, slot and port basis.
The simple rule is Cabinet-Slot-Port = Tenant. The simplicity of this program allows for
flexible assignments. The only information needed is the correct correlation of entries.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ASSIGNMENTS TENANT 1
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 803.
Display shows:
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 -01 T:1
2) Enter cabinet number if no change press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 –01 T:1
3) Enter slot number if no change press Right
Soft button to move cursor.
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:2 -01 T:1
4) Enter port number if no change press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:2 -03 T:1
5) Enter tenant number if no change press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:2 -03 T:2
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-324 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[804] SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER
Provides a means of assigning a system I/O port for use with one of the service types
detailed below. A system has two SIO ports defined as IOM ports 2 and 3 and an optional
modem port defined as port 5. In order for remote programming to work correctly the
modem port must be assigned as PCMMC.
No Option Description
No Type Description
00 NOT USE not used
01 PCMMC Connects PCMMC
02 SMDR SMDR print
03 UCD REPT UCD report
04 UCD/SMDR UCD report and SMDR print
05 CTI Connects CTI
06 CTI/SMDR Connects CTI with SMDR data
07 CTI/UCD Connects CTI with UCD data
08 CTI/S/U Connects CTI with SMDR data and UCD data
09 TRAFFIC Call Traffic data print
10 TRF/SMDR Call Traffic data and SMDR print
11 ALARM System Alarm report
12 ALM/TRAF System Alarm data and Call Traffic data print
13 PERI UCD Periodic UCD report
16 HM REPT Hotel/Motel report(Hotel/Motel related)
17 PMS PMS data print(Hotel/Motel related)
18 PMS SMDR PMS data and SMDR print(Hotel/Motel related)
19 BD-PMS Connects Bi-directional PMS
(Hotel/Motel related)
27 UCD VIEW UCD view data print(MMC 860 enabled only)
28 UV/SMDR UCD view data and SMDR print
(MMC 860 enabled only)
29 UV/CTI Connects CTI with UCD view
(MMC 860 enabled only)
0 SERVICE
(Service Type)
30 REMO M/A Connects Remote M & A
1 BAUD
[Baud Rate(Speed)]
0: 4800 bps
1: 9600 bps
2: 19200 bps
3: 38400 bps
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-325
(Continued)
No Option Description
2 CHAR LENG
(Character Length)
7: 7 bits
8: 8 bits
3 PARITY
(Parity Bit)
0: NONE
1: ODD
2: EVEN
4 RETRY COUNT
(4 Retry count)
01-99
5 STOP BIT
1: 1 BIT
2: 2 BIT
6 WAIT TIME 0-99900 ms for ENQ/ACK, 0-3600 sec for NORMAL
7 DTR CHECK
(Disconnect check on/off)
0: NONE
1: ODD
2: EVEN
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SERVICE PORT 2: PCMMC
PORT 3: SMDR
BAUD RATE: 19200 BPS
CHAR LENGTH: 8 BITS
PARITY: NONE
RETRY COUNT: 03
STOP BIT: 1 BIT
WAIT TIME: 03000 MSEC or 30 SEC
DTR CHECK: OFF
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-326 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 804.
Display shows:
SYS I/O PORT (1)
SERVICE:PC-MMC
2) Enter desired port via dial keypad.(e.g., 2)
OR
SYS I/O PORT (2)
SERVICE:SMDR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter desired parameter via dial keypad.(e.g., 1)
OR
SYS I/O PORT (2)
BAUD:9600 BPS
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter parameter data via dial keypad.
OF
SYS I/O PORT (2)
BAUD:19200BPS
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS
MMC 860 UCD VIEW
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-327
[805] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
This MMC is only used for system version display. This is a READ ONLY MMC.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 805.
Display shows:
MCP VERSION
‘03.07.01 L2.03
2) Press Volume button to select other Card versions.
DLI CARD
Cabinet and Slot shown:
C1-S2:8 DLI
NO VERSION DATA
TEPRI CARD PRI MODE
Cabinet and Slot shown:
C2-S1:TEPRI/EP
‘01.08.14 V1.02
AUTO ATTENDANT CARD
Cabinet and Slot shown:
C1-S8:AA
‘00.09.19 1.00
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-328 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL
Allows the preprogramming of a card slot for a specific board type. A board inserted into a
system will not be recognized by the system until it is ENABLED using this MMC. Cards
installed using MMC 806 will NOT be assigned in the system numbering plan. You must
then use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions, trunks, AA, ports
or miscellaneous functions. This MMC also shows which PSU is powering the card
selected.
POWER STATUS
N: 48V Power does not used.
A: 1st Power is used.(1st Power type = PSU 60)
B: 2nd Power is used.(2nd Power type = PSU 60)
1: 1st Power is used.(1st Power type = PSU-B)
2: 2nd Power is used.(2nd Power type = PSU-B)
[xx]: The maximum port count which 48 V power is supplied.
When a card is removed and a different type card is inserted
If a card is removed and a different type card is inserted and this MMC is
performed, the memory associated with that card(e.g., key programming, etc.) will
be erased.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 806.
Display shows:
C:1–S:1 P:1[16]
8 DLI 8 DLI
2) Press Volume button to make selection
(e.g., Cabinet 1) and press Right Soft button.
C:1–S:1 P:1[16]
8 DLI 8 DLI
3) To select which slot to address press.
Volume button to make selection.
C:1–S:6 P:2[16]
16 DLI 16 DLI
OR
Use the dial pad to make a selection(e.g., Slot 6) and
press Right Soft button.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-329
4) Press Volume button to make selection or use
the DIAL to select.(1: yes 0: no)
C:1–S:6 P:2[16]
RESET CARD ? NO
5) Press Volume button to make selection or use
the DIAL to select.(1: yes 0: no)
C:1–S:6 P:2[16]
ARE YOU SURE?NO
and press Right Soft button to return to step 1.
Continue to add cards as shown in step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-330 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL
Allows the system administrator to set the level of phone volume.
Level of Phone Volume FX
No Type No Type
0 KEY TONE VOL 0 LINE VOLUME
SPEAKERER VOLUME
1 SIDETONE VOL 1 NOR.LP ATTEN
2 HANDSET TX 2 MIC LP ATTEN
3 MIC TX LEVEL 3 ACOU DECOUPL
4 NOISE GUARD 4 ELEC DECOUPL
5 NOISE THRES 5 T/R RATIO
6 ALC THRES 6 R/T RATIO
7 TX/RX THRES. - -
8 TX/RX COMP - -
9 MIN RX VOL(28D, 12L, 21D, ITP) - -
When changing the MMC [807]
‘MMC [807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL’ should not be changed from the
default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.
CONDITIONS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-331
DEFAULT DATA
DEPEND ON PHONE TYPE
21D FX
Type Default Type Default
KEY TONE VOL 1 LINE VOLUME 3
SIDETONE VOL 1 SPEAKERER VOLUME 14
HANDSET TX 8 NOR.LP ATTEN 4
MIC TX LEVEL 3 MIC LP ATTEN 5
NOISE GUARD 8 ACOU DECOUPL 8
NOISE THRES 1 ELEC DECOUPL 8
ALC THRES 7 T/R RATIO 2
TX/RX THRES. 3 R/T RATIO 2
TX/RX COMP 5 - -
MIN RX VOL 6 - -
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 807.
Display shows:
VOL.CONTROL:US24
KEY TONE VOL:1
2) Enter phone type via dial keypad.
OR
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
KEY TONE VOL:1
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter volume item via dial keypad.
OR
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
SIDETONE VOL:1
Press Volume button to make selection and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter volume data via dial keypad.
OR
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
HANDSET TX :6
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-332 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[809] LEVEL AND GAIN
Allows the system administrator to set the base level of the TX volume on phones system
wide. There are eight(8) levels those are able to be controlled by the Volume button on
phone. And maximum controllable levels in the system are ten(10). Phone station users can
vary eight levels. So this MMC gives the most flexibility to the system administrator so he
can classify any desired eight(8) levels within eleven(11).
No Option Description
Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity(Max.: 9) Default values are
followed:
INDEX: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL: 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 7
1 MISC TSW GAIN Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or
the external music source of the MISC card.(0~7, higher numbers
mean lower levels) Default value is 0.
2 TSW GAIN
CONTROL
Adjusts the tone sensitivity(As shown below, there are 8 types of
matrix connections of the T-Switch that adjusts the tone sensitivity.
Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0
in MMC 421.)
0 DGP DLI phone
1 SLT SLI phone
2 ATRK Analog trunk
3 DTRK Digital trunk
4 DECT DECT terminal
5 VOIP MGI port or IP-based phone
6 SVMi SVMi port
7 WLAN WIP port
When changing the MMC [809]
‘MMC [809] LEVEL AND GAIN’ should not be changed from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.
CONDITIONS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-333
DEFAULT DATA
RX
TX
DGP SLT ATRK DTRK DECT VOIP SVMi WLAN
DGP 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +0.0
SLT 0.0 -6.0 0.0 +0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +0.0
ATRK 0.0 0.0 -6.0 -6.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +0.0
DTRK 0.0 +1.9 +1.9 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
DECT 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
VOIP 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
SVMi 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
WLAN +0.0 +0.0 -6.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 +0.0
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 809.
Display shows:
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 0 0
2) Press Volume button to make selection(0-3).
After selection is made, press Right Soft button
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1 1
to move cursor.
3) (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected)
a) Select the desired volume level via dial keypad.
OR
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1 1
Press Volume button to go to the next volume level
and press Right Soft button.
b) Enter desired volume data via dial pad.
OR
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1 3
4) (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected)
a) Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial keypad.
OR
MISC TSW GAIN
BGM/MOH :0
Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM
TSW gain and press Right Soft button.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-334 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
5) (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected)
a) Select the TX TWS connect type via dial button pad.
OR
TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT DGP :+0.0
Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW
connect type and press Right Soft button.
b) Select the RX TSW connect type via dial button pad.
OR
TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT ATRK:+0.0
Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW
connect type and press Right Soft button.
c) Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial pad.
OR
TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT ATRK:+1.9
Press Volume button to scroll data and press
Right Soft button.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-335
[810] HALT PROCESSING
Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single cabinet
slot or in the entire system.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 810.
Display shows:
HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALL PROC
2) Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad.
OR
HALT/PROCESSING
C:1 S:ALL PROC
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
Press ANS/RLS button to select all cabinets
and slots.
HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALL PROC
3) Enter slot number via dial keypad.
OR
HALT/PROCESSING
C:1 S:2 PROC
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
4) Enter 1 for HALT or 0 to PROC.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-336 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[811] RESET SYSTEM
Provides two methods of restarting the system. The first method restarts the system and
clears all memory. The second method restarts the system only. If clear all memory is
selected, only the default data will return. Extreme care should be taken when using this
MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If memory is
cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status.
No Type Description
0 RESET SYSTEM System reset only with Smart Media read.
1 CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with Smart Media read.
2 FAST RESTART System reset only without Smart Media read.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 811.
Display shows:
SYSTEM RESTART
RESET SYSTEM?NO
2) Enter reset type(0-2) via dial keypad.
OR
SYSTEM RESTART
CLEAR MEMORY?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
Press Volume button to make selection and press
SYSTEM RESTART
CLEAR MEMORY?YES
Right Soft button.
4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
Press Volume button to make selection and press
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?YES
Right Soft button.
5) If clear memory, system will return with default time
and date and default extension number.
OR
If system just restarted, it will return to normal
programmed status.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-337
[812] SET COUNTRY CODE
This MMC must be run by the installer before any other programming is done.
When changing the MMC [812]
‘MMC [812] SET COUNTRY CODE’ should not be used from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.
CONDITIONS
Allows the system installer to select system software country. If you change the country
selection, the system will be restart and all customer data returns to defaulted status
according to the selected country.
DEFAULT DATA
According to MCP2 DIP S/W.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 812.
Display shows:
SELECT COUNTRY
Undefined
2) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
SELECT COUNTRY
RUSSIA/CIS
3) Press Volume button to select Yes or No and
press Right Soft button.
DEFAULTING SYSTM
ARE YOU SURE?NO
When you select ‘YES’
if you select ‘YES’, this will restart the system and all data make default.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
ALL MMC
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-338 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[813] HOTEL OPERATION
Allows the system installer to enable the HOTEL feature.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 813.
Display shows:
HOTEL OPERATION
DISABLE
2) Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.
Press Volume button to make selection and
HOTEL OPERATION
ENABLE
press Right Soft button.
3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
Press Volume button to make selection and
HOTEL OPERATION
CHANGE NOW ? NO
press Right Soft button.
4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
Press Volume button to make selection and
HOTEL OPERATION
ARE YOU SURE?NO
press Right Soft button.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
Hotel Related MMC
MMC 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC 223 FAX PAIR
MMC 513 HOTEL TIMER
MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE
MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP
MMC 762 ROOM COST RATE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-339
[814] SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE
Allows system programmer to assign a LCD display based on system programming
language.
0. ENGLISH
1) GERMAN
2. PORTUGAL
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ENGLISH
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 814.
Display shows:
SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
2) Enter desired language number via dial button pad.
OR
SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
GERMAN
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-340 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
Provides a means to copy the customer database to the SMDB(Smart Media card Data
Base). This enables the on board database(SRAM) to be copied to the SMDB and also
allows the SMDB database to be copied to the on board database. A daily save can be
programmed to automatically save the on board data base to the SMDB. This insures that
an up to date database is always available in the case of a catastrophic failure. A daily save
time of 00:00 means there is no save performed.
It is recommended to CLEAR the SMDB before the SRAM is copied to it. When the
SRAM is copied to the SMDB there is no interruption in service. If the SMDB is copied to
the SRAM the system will reset to accept the new data.
Option Description
SMDB Smart Media card database
SRAM MCP2 On-Board database
S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm Indicates the time the database was saved to the SMDB or the time the
SRAM was last saved
DAILY SAVE hh:mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the SMDB
A Smart Media Card of 16 MB or 32 MB
A Smart Media Card of 16 MB or 32 MB must be installed in order to copy the on
board database(SRAM) on to the Smart Media card(SMDB).
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
DAILY SAVE 00:00(no daily save)
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-341
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 815.
Display shows:
CUST DBASE:SMDB
S:12/01/01 00:00
If the Smart Media is used already, the display shows. CUST DBASE:SMDB
SMART IS BUSY
2) Press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:SMDB
S:12/01/01 00:00
3) Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
CUST DBASE:SMDB
CLEAR SMDB :NO
4) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
press Right Soft button.
CUST DBASE:SMDB
CLEAR SMDB :YES
5) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
press Right Soft button.
CUST DBASE:SMDB
ARE YOU SURE?NO
If you select YES, the display shows. CUST DBASE:SMDB
Cleared....
6) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
CUST DBASE:SRAM
DAILY SAVE:00:00
7) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
CUST DBASE:SRAM
DAILY SAVE:00:00
8) Input save time.
OR
CUST DBASE:SRAM
DAILY SAVE:23:30
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
9) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
CUST DBASE:SRAM
COPY TO SMDB:NO
10) Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to make change and
CUST DBASE:SRAM
ARE YOU SURE?:YES
return to the step 9.
11) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-342 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[816] CONFERENCE GAIN
Provides a tool to adjust the gain or loss of stations and trunks in the conference bridge.
This is made available to allow for the adjustment of the conference bridge due to
permanent unsatisfactory Trunk Line conditions that may inhibit a satisfactory conference
bridge. Programming adjustments can be made on individual conference analog trunk
members.
Option Description
MEMBER This identifies which size of conference the adjustment will be made for. ie. 3, 4 or 5
party conference.
A-TRK This identifies which analog trunk member that is being addressed.
CNF This is the gain or loss adjustment in the conference bridge.
SW This is the gain or loss adjustment in the time division switch.
When changing the MMC [816]
‘MMC [816] CONFERENCE GAIN’ is not to correct low volume. To be used with
the support of local SAMSUNG Electronics Co. distributor.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
USE DEFAULT: YES
Member A-TRK 0 1 2 3 4
CNF -2.5 -2.5 -2.5 - - 3
SW +0.0 +0.0 -2.5 - -
CNF -6.0 -6.0 -6.0 -6.0 - 4
SW +0.0 +0.0 -2.5 -6.0 -
CNF -6.0 -6.0 -6.0 -6.0 -6.0 5
SW +0.0 +0.0 -2.5 -6.0 -6.0
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-343
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 816.
Display shows:
CONFERENCE GAIN
USE DEFAULT :YES
2) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to make change and
CONFERENCE GAIN
USE DEFAULT :NO
to move cursor.
3) Dial 3,4 or 5.(e.g., 4 part conference bridge)
OR
MEMBER:4 A-TRK:0
CNF:-6.0 SW:+0.0
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Dial 0 to 4.(e.g., 2 analog trunk member)
OR
MEMBER:4 A-TRK:2
CNF:-6.0 SW:2.5
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Press Volume button to select CNF gain and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
MEMBER:4 A-TRK:2
CNF:-6.0 SW:2.5
6) Press Volume button to select SW gain and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
MEMBER:4 A-TRK:2
CNF:-6.0 SW:-6.0
7) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-344 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Change the version by downloading new version program stored Smart Media card to
MCP2, SCP2/ LCP2 or TEPRI card.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 818.
Display shows:
PGM DOWNLOAD
MPP:MPPLV203.PGM
2) Press Volume button to select program type
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
PGM DOWNLOAD
SPP:SPP_V203.PGM
3) Press Volume button to select YES and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
LAN PGM
DOWNLOAD NOW?NO
If you select MCP program download,
the system will restart.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 819 SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-345
[819] SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL
This MMC uses display file sizes and clear file on Smart Media card.
Files included in Smart Media are described below:
File Name Description
STARTUP.INI If a user designates an MCP or SCP program at MMC 818, related data are saved
in this file. This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs
are selected at MMC 818.
STARTUP.PRE When the system is initially started, this program uses the memory of the
MCP card to load the MPP program of Smart Media.
This program must be included to start the system.
MPPMxxx.PGM
MPPLxxx.PGM
Program for MCP2 board.
Since the MCP2 program is not installed in the MCP2 board itself, at least
one MCP2 program must be included in Smart Media to start the system.
Files named MPPMxxxx.PGM represent programs for M-system, and those
named MPPLxxxx.PGM represent programs for L-system. Smart Media must
include the proper MCP2 program corresponding to the system type(Lsystem or M-system).
SPPV200.PGM LCP program. The LCP program is installed in the card itself. The one
included in Smart Media is used for S/W version upgrade.
PRIV100.PGM TEPRI program. The TEPRI program is installed in the card itself. The one
included in Smart Media is used for S/W version upgrade.
DATABASE.MPP This file is created in Smart Media when DB is saved to SMDB by MMC 815.
Initially not included, this file is created only when SMDB is created by MMC
815.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-346 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 819.
Display shows:
STARTUP.PRE
sz:79288 bytes
2) Press Volume button to select program type and
press Hold button to move cursor delete Selection
MPPLV203.PGM
sz:6783488 bytes
3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
MPPLV203.PGM
DELETE FILE? NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to delete file and move cursor
step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-347
[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking.
Up to 50 link Ids can be entered including SELF ID. In addition each Link ID is also
associated with the IP address of the MCP2 card for that system and IP address type.
Option Description
LINK ID System ID for networking feature.
SIGNAL G/W System IP address for VoIP networking
IP TYPE System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type
determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ on MMC 830.
CONDITIONS
‘SELF’ represents self-node, and must be set to use the networking function. Items other
than ‘SELF’ are used for station numbers and can be omitted.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 820.
Display shows:
SELF :LINK ID
2) Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and
press Right Soft button.
SELF :LINK ID
11
3) Press Volume button to select other link ID
and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.
SYS01:LINK ID
4) Enter other link ID via dial keypad and
press Right Soft button.
SYS01:LINK ID
22
5) Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS
MMC 824 ASSIGN NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-348 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
Assigns the Q-signaling PRI trunk for networking. It is assigned data on a per-TEPRI card
basis.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 821.
Display shows:
[701] Q-SIG TRK
NORMAL
2) Enter first trunk number of PRI card.
OR
[701] Q-SIG TRK
NORMAL
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter 0 for NORMAL, or 1 for Q-SIGNALING.
OR
[701] Q-SIG TRK
Q-SIGNALING
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-349
[822] SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
Assigns the virtual extension port type. The virtual extension port types are followed:
No Type Description
00 SLT Emulates SLI port
01 24 BTN SET 24 buttons phone
02 12 BTN SET 12 buttons phone
03 7 BTN SET 7 buttons phone
04 6 BTN SET 6 buttons phone
05 28 BTN SET 28 buttons phone
06 18 BTN SET 18 buttons phone
07 8 BTN SET 8 buttons phone
08 38 BTN SET 38 buttons phone
09 21 BTN SET 21 buttons phone
10 14 BTN SET 14 buttons phone
11 LARGE SET Large LCD phone
12 7 BTN LCD 7 buttons LCD phone
13 0 BTN LCD 0 button LCD phone
14 NONE not used
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
3501-3546: SLT
3401-3480: 21 BTN SET
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-350 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 822.
Display shows:
[3501]PORT TYPE
SLT
2) Enter virtual extension number.
OR
[3502]PORT TYPE
SLT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.
[ALL] PORT TYPE
SLT
3) Enter virtual extension type.
OR
[3501]PORT TYPE
21 BTN SET
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-351
[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS
Assigns the class of service for networking.
No Option Default Description
01 CALL OFFER Y Call Offer
03 CC PATH RSV Y CC Path Reservation
04 CC SIG CONN Y CC Retention of Signal Connection
05 CC SVC RETN Y CC Service Retention
06 CCBS N Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
07 CCNR N Call Completion on No Reply
08 CFB Y Call Forward Busy
09 CFNR Y Call Forward No Reply
10 CFU Y Call Forward Unconditional
11 CI N Call Intrusion
12 CI CAPABIL 2 Intrusion Capability Level(1~3)
14 CI PROTECT 2 Intrusion Protection Level(0~3)
23 CONP LEVEL 3 CONP Level(0: none, 1: Alert, 2: Busy, 3: Both)
26 CT RE-ROUTE N Transfer By Rerouting
27 DND TONE N DND Announcement
28 DNDO Y Do Not Disturb Override
29 DNDO CAPABL 2 DNDO Capability Level(0~3)
30 DNDO PROTEC 2 DNDO Protection Level(1~3)
31 PAGE Y PAGE
32 PATH REPL. Y Path Replacement
33 PATH RETEN N Path Retention
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-352 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 823.
Display shows:
NETWORK COS (01)
01:CALL OFFER :Y
2) Dial the class of service number(01-30).
OR
NETWORK COS (02)
01:CALL OFFER :Y
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial the feature number.
OR
NETWORK COS (02)
03:CC PATH RSV:Y
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES.
OR
NETWORK COS (01)
03:CC PATH RSV:N
Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
Press Right Soft button to store data.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-353
[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally under networking
condition, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node
extension. It’s not convenient. In this MMC, the system provides the easy digit translation
of NETWORK LCR DIAL number. The translated digits are works like as LCR plus
translated digits. Using this MMC, you only dial the another node extension number and
call the another node extension simply. The system provides 96 entry of network dial
translation.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 824.
Display shows:
01:601
SIZE:0 MAX:00
2) Dial the entry number.
OR
01:601 _
SIZE:0 MAX:00
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter digit string(max. 8digits) and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
01:601 60201
SIZE:0 MAX:00
4) Enter the minimum number of user dialed digits.
OR
01:601 60201
SIZE:3 MAX:00
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Enter the waiting number of dial until LCR is
operated.
01:601 60201
DISP:N MBX:N
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-354 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
6) Enter YES/NO to display other node extension
like as a internal extension number format.
01:601 60201
DISP:Y MBX:N
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
7) Enter YES/NO to assign Mail Box for remote
extension automatically.
01:601 60201
DISP:Y MBX:N
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
8) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-355
[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION
Assigns the options used for networking.
No Option Description
0 ADD NUMBER TO NAME Assign to includes the extension number in the name field of
Q-SIG standard message.
1 USE REMOTE VM Assign to use SVMi on remote system.
2 REMOTE VM NUMBER Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote
VM is used.
3 REMOTE CID NUMB Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to
SVMi.
4 USE REMOTE ATTN Assign to use Attendant on remote system.
5 REMOTE ATTN NUMB Assign to access number of remote Attendant when the
Remote Attendant is used.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES
USE REMOTE VM: NO
REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE
REMOTE CID NUMB: YES
USE REMOTE ATTN: NO
REMOTE ATTN NUMB: NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-356 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 825.
Display shows:
ADD NUMB TO NAME
YES
2) Dial the option number.
OR
USE REMOTE VM
NO
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1(YES) or 0(NO).
OR
USE REMOTE VM
YES
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to mover cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
MMC 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-357
[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK
The system clock may be synchronized with a external clock source from TEPRI card, PRI
card or BRI card or use the internal clock source.
CONDITIONS
In this MMC, you can select to use internal clock source and assign the system clock
source priority when the external clock source is used. The external clock source of TEPRI
card, PRI card or BRI card only can be selected.
DEFAULT DATA
PRIORITY 1: C1-S1
PRIORITY 2: C1-S2
PRIORITY 3: C1-S3
PRIORITY 4: C2-S1
PRIORITY 5: C2-S2
PRIORITY 6: C2-S3
PRIORITY 7: C3-S1
PRIORITY 8: C3-S2
PRIORITY 9: C3-S3
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 826.
Display shows:
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C1-S1
2) Dial the priority number(1-9 or 1-3 ).
OR
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C1-S1
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial the priority data.
OR
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C1-S1
Press Volume button to select and Press
Right Soft button to store.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-358 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN connected device.
The eight types of data listed below can be displayed using the LAN printer.
01. SMDR
02. UCD REPORT
03. TRAFFIC REPORT
04. ALARM REPORT
05. UCD VIEW
06. PERIODIC UCD
07. HOTEL REPORT
08. PMS
The items that are set in this program are listed below.
No Option Default Description
00 DATA TYPE - Type of data to be displayed
01 CURR STATUS OFF Current status of the LAN printer
02 EMPTY BUFF NO Prints all data left in the buffer
03 UPDATE LAN NO Applies modified items
04 DESTINATION OFF Data transmit destination(Off, Printer, PC, Both)
05 PRINTER IP 200.1.1.1 The IP address of the LAN printer
06 PRINTER TCP 10010 The TCP port of the printer
07 LAN TCP 10020 LAN TCP port
08 RETRY COUNT 03 Re-transmit attempt count(00~10)
09 RETRY WAIT 010 sec Wait time for re-transmit(005~250 sec)
10 PJL ENABLE FALSE Sets PJL(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
11 LANGUAGE RAW Printer language(0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)
12 PAPER SIZE LETTER Paper size(0. A4, 1. LETTER)
13 FONT TYPE COURIER Font type(0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN)
14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE Sets duplex(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
15 ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Orientation(0. PORTRAIT, 1. LANDSCAPE)
16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT Printer tray(0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual)
17 RESOLUTION 300 Resolution(0.300, 1.600)
18 LINE/PAGE 60 Line per page
CONDITIONS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-359
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 829.
Display shows:
[01] DATA TYPE
SMDR
2) Enter type of data to be printed.
OR
[02] DATA TYPE
UCD REPORT
Press Volume button to select the type and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3) Enter the item number
OR
[02] PRINTER IP
200. 1. 1. 1
Press Volume button to select the item and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
4) Select the data.
OR
[02] PRINTER IP
168.219. 83.101
Press Volume to select the data and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-360 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS
This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the
OfficeServ 500 system MCP2 card. This MMC must be utilized if there are ITP series
phones and/or MGI cards used on the system. System only allow to connected by other
system(CTI Server, News Server), when CTI SERVER ADDR, NEWS ADDRESS is not
set such as 0.0.0.0 or 255.255.255.255.
No Parameter Description
00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MCP2 card.
01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting
IP devices beyond the local network subnet.
02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask.
This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP
devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MCP2(without
having to go through the designated network IP gateway).
03 SYSTEM RESET Prompt to restart system MCP2 when system IP address is
changed. This reset is same to FAST RESTART on MMC 811.
04 SYSTEM IP TYPE Defines which IP addressing relationship is used for
communications to and from the MCP2 card.
0 PRIVATE IP ONLY: The system assumes all IP phones and
VoIP connections are on the same network. And all IP
addresses are private IP address.
1 PRIVATE w PUBLIC: The system knows that there is a mixture
of IP phones and VoIP connections on the same network and
on remote network(s), thus communicates accordingly based
upon the entries in MMC 840(for IP phones), MMC 838(for
other VoIP gateways) or MMC 830(for other MCP2).
2 PUBLIC IP ONLY: The system assumes all IP phones and VoIP
connections are on the different public network. And all IP
addresses are public IP address.
05 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP The MCP2 will originate communications, to IP phones and VoIP
connections outside the local network, using this IP address.
Communications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI
card. The system identifies communications to/from this address
as ‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to
establish communications with the system, without exposing your
LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’.
06 SYSTEM MAC ADDR For your reference, and cannot be changed. The unique hardware
(MAC) address of the MCP2 card.
07 PCMMC ADDRESS When system wants connect to PCMMC, system will be sent to
this IP address for connection message. Reserved for future use.
08 SM MANAGER IP When system wants connect to remote M & A PC, system will be sent
to this IP address for connection message. Reserved for future use.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-361
(Continued)
No Parameter Description
09 CTI SERVER ADDR When system wants connect to CTI Server , system will be sent to this
IP address for connection message. Reserved for future use.
10 NEWS ADDRESS When system wants connect to NEWS Server, system will be sent to
this IP address for connection message. Reserved for future use.
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
- The first 3 parameters: SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYSTEM
NET MASK are stored separate from the main system database, thus will not be
defaulted when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Furthermore, any
changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MCP2 is reset.
- When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010
CONDITIONS
This MMC must be utilized if there are ITP series phones and/or MGI cards used on
the system.
After changing the Ethernet parameter, restart the system to apply the new setting.
DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM IP ADDR: 165.213.97.185
SYSTEM GATEWAY: 165.213.97.1
SYSTEM NET MASK: 255.255.255.0
SYSTEM RESET: NO
SYSTEM IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY
SYSTEM PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1
SYSTEM MAC ADDR: CARD DEPENDANT
PCMMC ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0
SM MANAGER IP: 0.0.0.0
CTI SERVER ADDR: 0.0.0.0
NEWS ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-362 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 830.
Display shows the system IP address.
SYSTEM IP ADDR
165.213. 97.185
2) Press Volume button to make selection and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
SYSTEM IP ADDR
165.213. 97.185
3) Using the keypad enter three digit IP octet numbers
IE 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10.
SYSTEM IP ADDR
192.168.001.010
Cursor will return to step 1 upon completion
of IP address entry.
4) Press Volume button to make selection and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
SYSTEM GATEWAY
165.213. 97. 1
5) Using the keypad enter three digit IP octet numbers.
IE 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1
SYSTEM GATEWAY
192.168.001.001
Cursor will return to step 5 upon completion
of system gateway entry.
6) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE? NO
7) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE? NO
8) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS
MMC 833 VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC 840 IP SET INFO
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-363
[831] MGI PARAMETERS
This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MGI
card(s). This MMC must be utilized MGI card(s) used on the system.
No Parameter Description
0 IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address for the MGI card.
1 GATEWAY Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting
IP devices beyond the local subnet.
2 SUB MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to
calculate the range if IP devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of
the MGI(without having to go through the designated network IP
gateway).
3 IP TYPE Defines which IP addressing relationship is used for
communications to and from the MGI card.
0 PRIVATE IP ONLY
1 PRIVATE w PUBLIC
2 PUBLIC IP ONLY
4 PUBLIC IP The MGI will originate communications, to IP phones and VoIP
connections outside the local network, using this IP address. If this
IP address sets 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255 or default value then this
MGI card uses private IP only. See System IP Type on MMC 830.
5 VERSION No entry required. Used to indicate revision of MGI3 S/W.
6 MAC ADDR For your reference, and cannot be changed. The unique
hardware(MAC)
address of the MGI card.
7 CARD RESET Prompt to restart MGI card when IP address is changed. This use
for MGI 1 and 2 only, MGI3 is self restart automatically.
MGI PARAMETERS
- The first 3 parameters: IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK-changes to
these parameters will not be applied until the MGI is reset.
- When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-364 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
CONDITIONS
This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI card installed in the system.
DEFAULT DATA
IP ADDRESS: 1.1.1.1
GATEWAY: 1.1.1.1
SUB MASK: 255.255.255.0
IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY
PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1
VERSION: V4
CARD RESET: NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 831.
Display shows the first MGI card.
[3801] IP ADDRESS
168.219. 76.101
2) Enter MGI number.
OR
[3801] IP ADDRESS
168.219. 76.101
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter MGI parameter number.
OR
[3801] IP ADDRESS
168.219. 76.101
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter MGI parameter.
OR
[3801] IP ADDRESS
165. 10. 1.100
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC 840 IP SET INFORMATION
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-365
[832] VOIP ACCESS CODE
Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol(IP) address to the VoIP gateway.
This MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes.
TABLE(00~62): Outbound or Inbound table use for specific access codes. Usually when
the MCP2 card is used as a VoIP gateway the Outbound table is used. The Inbound table is
used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call. Each table has
63 entries(00~62).
No Option Description
0 ACCESS DGT This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is
accessed; this directs a call based on the routing tables used.
An access code table then references an access code and correlates an
IP address to the access code for routing. A maximum of 8 digits are
available.
1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received
to make up the whole access code.
2 DEL.LENGTH This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code.
If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to
the destination to continue routing at the far end destination.
3 INSERT DGT This is the digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be
used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is
needed to be inserted in the dialed digits.
4 IP TABLE 1 This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP
address. The system has 64 IP tables(00~63) with 16 entries(00~15) in
each table. See MMC 833.
5 IP START This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to
associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to
start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications.
Example: If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be
in the last 7 entries of a table the IP START location would be 8.
IP address searching would start at entry 8.
6 GK USE This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized
to establish this connection.
CONDITIONS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-366 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
DEFAULT DATA
ACCESS DGT: 00~09(digits 0~9),10~62 NONE
DGT LENGTH: 1
DEL.LENGTH: 1
INSERT DGT: NONE
IP TABLE 1: 00
IP START: NONE
GK USE: NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 832.
Display shows the outbound and first access
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
0
Code.
2) Enter 0 for O(outbound) or 1 for I(inbound)
code table.
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
0
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter access code table number(00-62) via dial
keypad.
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
1
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter access code item(0-6) via dial keypad.
OR
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
1
Press Volume button to make select ion and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Enter access code data via dial keypad.
OR
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
840
Press Volume button to make select ion and press
Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
6) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 833 VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 836 H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-367
[833] VoIP IP TABLE
This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry(MMC832).
There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP address is required to
route dialed digits based on the access code and digits dialed. The IP entry field is divided
into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields.
When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
TB(00) ENTRY(00): MMC830 SYSTEM IP ADDR
ALL OTHERS: EMPTY
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 833.
Display shows the first table number.
TB(00) ENTRY (00)
0. 0. 0. 0
2) Enter table number(00-62) via dial keypad.
OR
TB(00) ENTRY (00)
0. 0. 0. 0
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter entry number(00-15) via dial keypad.
OR
TB(00) ENTRY (00)
0. 0. 0. 0
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter IP address via dial keypad.
Cursor will be return step 3.
TB(00) ENTRY (00)
165.213. 87.110
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC entry.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-368 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-369
[834] H.323 OPTIONS
This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC are set
system-wide.
No Parameter Description Default
00 GATEWAY CALL ID This a up to 12 digits numeric entry that identifies
this system.
1234
01 H.323 FAST SETUP Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup
method.
ENABLE
02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification
type. There are 3 possible selections :
0 GWID: Which shows the gateway call ID.
1 ANI: Which shows the calling station number
2 IP: Which shows the calling H.323 gateway IP
address.
ANI
06 TUNNELING Enables or disables the need for additional
channels using H.245 signaling. Tunneling allows
use of the H.245 signal channel with the Q.931
channel.
ENABLE
07 DEFAULT DIL NO This allows programming of the default direct in
line number when digits are missing, or incorrect
on an inbound call.
500
11 CODEC AUTO NEGO Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation
when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway.
ON
14 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for H.323 signaling and
sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall
equipment. The common and default IP path or
port used is 10000.
-
17 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC323), which
provides calling party identification when using the
MGI as a H.323 gateway.
This provides station ID of the calling station. A
single digit value corresponding with the desired
table in MMC323 should be entered here. This is
only used when MMC405 value is null.
1
18 INCOMING MODE This option selects how incoming calls are routed
when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway.
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC714
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC724
FOLLOW
DID TRANS
19 ALLOW GW CHECK When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323
gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.
DISABLE
20 CLIR WITH NUMBER When this option is set to ON, the CLIP number is
sent to the network even though the CLIP
restriction flag is set.
DISABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-370 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 834.
Display shows the first option.
GATEWAY CALL ID
1234
2) Enter H.323 option number(00-19) via
dial keypad.
H.323 FAST SETUP
DISABLE
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad.
OR
H.323 FAST SETUP
ENABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO LINE TEL NUMBER
MMC 306 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-371
[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS
This MMC provides various MGI DSP options. The options set in this MMC are MGI-type
specific.
MGI card types are followed:
No Parameter Description
0 MGI3 Supports maximum 16 channels G.711, G.723.1, G.729, G.729A or
T.38. Default 8 channels and 8 channels on option board.
1 MGI2 Supports 16 channels G.711 or G.729.A
2 MGI1 Supports 16 channels G.711 only
MGI3 parameters are followed:
No Parameter Description Default
00 CODEC-FRAME Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used
and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets
generated by the MGI card. MGI3 card supports
G.729A(8 K), G.729(8 K), G.711(64 K), and
G.723.1(5.3~6.4K).
G.729A -
40 ms
01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function
removes echo that is generated by voice reflection and
packet delay.
ENABLE
02 SILENCE SUP This parameter determines whether silence suppression
is used This prevents transmission during the silence
period of a call, and conserves bandwidth when
enabled.
DISABLE
03 IN FILTER This option select input filtering of the DSP. This should
always be set as ENABLE.
ENABLE
04 OUT FILTER This option select output filtering of the DSP. This
should always be set as ENABLE.
ENABLE
05 INPUT GAIN PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is31 dB~32 dB(0~63).
This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to
the site. Default is 32(0 dB).
31 (0 dB)
06 VOICE VOL This value selects the voice volume. The range is31 dB~31 dB(0~63).
31 (0 dB)
08 JITTER OPT This is a scale value that introduces a intentional
buffer(delay) of the transmission of VoIP packets
generated by the MGI card. This value determines
whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay.
The range is 00~12.
4
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-372 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Parameter Description Default
09 MIN JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter
adjustment.
The range is 010~300 ms
30 ms
10 MAX JITTER Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter
adjustment.
The range is 010-300 ms.
150 ms
11 FAX ECM This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP, in the case that
errors are detected.
ENABLE
12 MAX FAX CNT This is maximum number of channels that can be
simultaneously utilized for Fax-over-IP. The range is
00~16.
2
13 DTMF TYPE There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND,
which is industry standard(H.245) type DTMF transport,
and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary
method.
OUTBAND
14 TOS FIELD An eight-bit binary value that will be utilized by external
routers, switches, etc(that optionally support TOS-bit
prioritization)-to identify the transport-priority value of
data packets generated by the MGI card. This value can
be left at default value(00000) if your network
infrastructure does not support this method of
bandwidth management.
all bits 0
15 FAX RETRY This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP, in the
case that errors are detected. The range is 0~4 and 0
means no retry.
0
16 RTP CHK TM This options selects the interval time of sending RTCP. 5 sec
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-373
MGI2 and MGI1 parameters are followed:
No Parameter Description Default
0 CODEC
FRAME
Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used
and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets
generated by the MGI card. MGI2 supports G.729A(8 K)
and G.711(64 K). MGI1 supports G.711 only.
G.729A(MGI2)-
40 ms
1 ECHO
CANCEL
This function removes echo that is generated by voice
reflection and packet delay. This sets ENABLE only,
cannot changed.
ENABLE
2 SILENCE SUP This parameter determines whether silence
suppression is used This prevents transmission during
the silence period of a call, and conserves bandwidth
when enabled.
DISABLE
4 MIN JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter
adjustment.
The range is 020~300 ms
30
5 MAX JITTER Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter
adjustment.
The range is 020-300 ms.
100
6 DTMF TYPE There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND,
which is industry standard(H.245) type DTMF transport.
This sets INBAND only, cannot changed.
INBAND
7 TOS FIELD An eight-bit binary value that will be utilized by external
routers, switches, etc(that optionally support TOS-bit
prioritization)-to identify the transport-priority value of
data packets generated by the MGI card. This value
can be left at default value(00000) if your network
infrastructure does not support this method of
bandwidth management.
all bits 0
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-374 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 835.
Display shows the first option.
MGI3:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –40 MS
2) Enter MGI type(0-2) via dial keypad.
OR
MGI3:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –40 MS
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad.
OR
MGI3:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –40 MS
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter MGI DSP parameter.
OR
MGI3:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –20 MS
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-375
[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS
Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional external industrystandard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions, and Status signaling
(RAS). The settings are system wide.
When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010
No Parameter Description Default
00 GK CONNECTION This enables or disables the H.323 call to connect to
a gatekeeper.
DISABLE
01 GK ROUTING This enables or disables routing of calls through a
gatekeeper.
DISABLE
02 GK IP ADDRESS This is gatekeeper’s IP address. 0.0.0.0
03 GK NAME This is alphanumeric name identifier of the
gatekeeper. An entry of 16 characters.
‘Gatekeeper’
04 ALTER GK IP
ADDR
This provide for an alternate gatekeeper address. 0.0.0.0
05 H.323 GATEWAY
ID
This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when
registering with the gatekeeper. This can be up to 32
characters.
‘OfficeServ’
06 E.164 GATEWAY
NO
This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk
when registering with the gatekeeper. This can be up
to 16 digits in length.
1234
07 GK KEEP ALIVE This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge
the presence of the gatekeeper. The range is
000~999 seconds.
0 sec
08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route in case the primary
gatekeeper is down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER
GK.
PSTN
09 GK RAS TYPE Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your
gatekeeper’s capabilities.
AUTO
11 URQ REASON
MODE
Select ON or OFF for usage of Un-register Request
RAS(URQ) messages.
ON
12 RRQ FAIL TIME Programs the time frame to re-send Registration
Request RAS(RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper.
The range is 1~99.
30 sec
13 GRQ SEND Select ON or OFF for usage of Gatekeeper RAS
Request(GRQ) messages.
OFF
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-376 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Parameter Description Default
14 USE MULTI E.164 When this option is set to ENABLE, the E.164
identifier can be assigned up to 32 lists.
DISABLE
15 E.164 LISTS (01) This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk
when registering with the gatekeeper. There is a
maximum 32 E.164 identifier lists with a digit string
length of 16 digits.
NONE
16 GK REGISTERED Display the status of registration to the GateKeeper. NO
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 836.
Display shows the first available option.
GK CONNECTION
DISABLE
2) Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad.
OR
GK ROUTING
DISABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter H.323 GK option data.
OR
GK ROUTING
ENABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-377
[837] SIP OPTIONS
This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) trunk
parameters. The MCP2 supports SIP and H.323 on a per call-per-port basis. The settings
are system-wide.
When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1)10 input must be: 192 168 001 010
No Parameter Description Default
00 GATEWAY
CALL ID
This a up to 12 digits numeric entry that identifies this
system.
‘1234’
01 CALLER ID
TYPE
This option controls the calling party identification type.
There are 3 possible selections:
0 GWID: Which shows the gateway call ID.
1 ANI: Which shows the calling station number(Default)
2 IP: Which shows the calling H.323 gateway IP
address.
ANI
05 DEFAULT DIL
NO
This allows programming of the default direct in line
number when digits are missing, or incorrect on an
inbound call.
500
06 UDP PORT:
TRUNK
Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call. 5060
07 UDP PORT:
PHONE
Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call. 5070
09 RE-TRANS.
T1 TIME
The initial re-transmission time if no answer based on the
RFC2543 specification. The range is 0~9900 ms.
500 ms
10 RE-TRANS.
T2 TIME
The maximum re-transmission time if no answer based
on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 0~9900 ms.
4000 ms
11 RE-TRANS.
T4 TIME
The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the
ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The
range is 0~9900 ms.
5000 ms
12 GENERAL
RING TM
The server shall retransmit the response during this
amount of time until the requested retransmission is
received. For example, the wait time after sending 200
OK for INFO. The range is 0~99900 ms.
5000 ms
13 INVITE LING
TM
After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the
client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message.
The client waits for this amount of time after sending ACK
for the Final Response. The range is 0~99900 ms.
5000 ms
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-378 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Parameter Description Default
14 PROVISIONAL
TIME
After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent
shall wait for this amount of time until Timeout ends. The
range is 0~999900 ms.
180000 ms
15 INV.NO RESP
TIME
Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User
Agent shall wait for this amount of time. The range is
0~99900 ms.
5000 ms
16 GEN.NO
RESP TIME
Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User
Agent shall wait for this amount of time. The range is
0~99900 ms.
5000 ms
17 REQ.RETRY
TIME
After sending General Request, the User Agent shall wait
for the Final Response for this amount of time. The range
is 0~99900 ms.
5000 ms
18 SIP SERVER
ENABLE
Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional external
industry-standard SIP Server.
DISABLE
20 SIP SERVER
IP
Sets SIP server IP address. 0.0.0.0.
28 SIP SERVER
PORT
Sets the port to use on the SIP Server. 5060
29 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for SIP signaling and sets a
range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The
common and default IP path or port used is 10000.
10000
32 SEND CLIP
TABLE
Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC323), which provides
calling party identification when using the MGI as a SIP
gateway.
This provides station ID of the calling station. A single
digit value corresponding with the desired table in
MMC323 should be entered here. This is only used when
MMC405 value is null.
1
33 INCOMING
MODE
This option selects how incoming calls are routed when
the MGI is used as a SIP gateway.
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC714(default)
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC724
FOLLOW DID
TRANS
34 ALLOW GW
CHECK
When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway
to check for gatekeeper presence.
DISABLE
37 CLIR WITH
NUMBER
When this option is set to ON, the CLIP number is sent to
the network even though the CLIP restriction flag is set.
DISABLE
38 SIP
REGISTERED
Display the status of registration to the SIP Server. NO
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-379
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 834.
Display shows the first option.
GATEWAY CALL ID
1234
2) Enter SIP option number(00-20) via dial keypad.
OR
CALLER ID TYPE
ANI
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter SIP option data via dial keypad.
OR
CALLER ID TYPE
IP
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO LINE TEL NUMBER
MMC 306 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-380 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address(PRIVATE or PUBLIC) is used to
connect other device via H.323 trunk or SIP trunk. The device which use the PRIVATE IP
Address assigned in this MMC, the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect
the device.
When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
TABLE(80): 165.213.255.255
ALL OTHERS: 0.0.0.0
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 838.
Display shows the first table number.
PRIVATE IP (01)
0. 0. 0. 0
2) Enter table number(01-80) via dial keypad.
OR
PRIVATE IP (01)
0. 0. 0. 0
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter IP address via dial keypad.
Cursor will be return step 3.
PRIVATE IP (01)
165.213. 87.110
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC entry.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-381
[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION
This MMC provides a means to register the IP phones with the OfficeServ 500 system.
During registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and
Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered.
The system made default phone numbers are 3201~3299 and made default User ID’s match
the default station numbers(3201~3299). The system default password is 1234. IP phones
must be individually programmed with User ID and Password to register with the system.
No Option Description Default
00 USER ID This is the ID the IP phone must match to register
with the OfficeServ 500 system. This entry can be
alphanumeric.
first 99 IP phones
are ‘3201’~‘3299’,
others are EMPTY
01 USER PSWD This is the Password the IP phone must also have to
register with the OfficeServ 500 system. This entry
can be alphanumeric.
‘1234’
02 IP ADDR This is the IP address of the IP phone once
registered with the system.
This is read only data.
0.0.0.0.
03 MAC ADDR This is MAC address of the IP phone once
registered with the system.
This is read only data.
FFFFFFFFFFFF
04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone once
registered with the system. This is read only data.
This information will be needed when traversing NAT
routers, firewalls, etc.
6000
05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone once
registered with the system. This is read only data.
This information will be needed when traversing NAT
routers, firewalls, etc.
9000
06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used: PRIVATE or
PUBLIC or PUBLIC/FIREWALL.
PRIVATE
07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use.
G.729A(low bandwidth) or G.711(high bandwidth).
This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection
only, others case are follow MGI CODEC type.
G.729A
08 PHONE TYPE This the type of IP phone used. SAMSUNG or
SIP(future). Please should be use SAMSUNG.
-
09 REGIST CLR This is used to clear the registration of a particular
IP phone. This is similar to phone plug out and
plug in, and the useful for maintenance. Because
technician will be re-registered IP phone without
network cable find out first.
-
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-382 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Option Description Default
10 FRAME
COUNT
This value determines the transmission interval time of
VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data
uses case of MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN =
PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~40 ms.
10 ms
11 JITTER BUF Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter
adjustment. This data uses case of MMC 841 ITP DSP
PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only.
The range is 10~90 ms.
20 ms
12 TOS FIELD An eight-bit binary value that will be utilized by external
routers, switches, etc(that optionally support TOS-bit
prioritization)-to identify the transport-priority value of
data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can
be left at default value(00000) if your network
infrastructure does not support this method of
bandwidth management. This data uses case of MMC
841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only.
all bits 0
13 S/W VERSION Display IP phone software version. This read only data. DISCONNECT
14 S/W UPGRADE This is used IP phone software upgrade request
command. When this selects YES and press Right Soft
button, the system requests to IP phone software
upgrade with TFTP IP address.
DISCONNECT
15 TIME ZONE Decides time difference of IP Phone and the system.
This is for IP Phone which is installed in the different
time area of the system.
00:00
16 PUB TO PUB When this option is set to ‘USE MGI’, MGI can be
allocated between Remote ITPs in same private zone.
NOT USE MGI
17 SIG TYPE This option can change UDP/TCP signal type of ITPs.
(ITP V3.xx only supports TCP signal type. When ITP
V2.xx attempt to conection the TCP signal type will be
changed to UDP automatically even though user set the
TCP signal type. )
UDP
18 PRIVATE IP This is the Private IP address of the IP phone once
registered with the system. This is read only data.
0.0.0.0
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-383
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 840.
Display shows:
[3201]USER ID
3201
2) Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.
OR
[3210]USER ID
3210
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad.
OR
[3210]DSP TYPE
G.729A
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter option data via dial keypad.
OR
[3210]DSP TYPE
G.711
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 616 FIXED MGI USER
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS
MMC 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-384 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options.
The options set in this MMC are system-wide.
No Option Description Default
0 PHONE VERSION Sets running IP-based phone and new phone
software version with the system.
0 LARGE DGP: Large LCD phone
1 LARGE ITP: Large LCD IP-based phone
2 2LINE ITP: line LCD IP-based phone
3 WIPM APPL: Wireless IP-based mobile phone
software.
4 SOFT PC
5 SOFT PDA
6 WIPM BOOT: Wireless IP-based mobile phone
boot program.
7 SOFT MENU: Soft menu version
0000
1 PHONE TFTP IP Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP
address.
0.0.0.0
Defines the method that IP-based phones use to
registration themselves with the system.
-
0 TYPE: Defines the method that IP-based
phones use to registration themselves with the
system.
a) SYS PSWD: System will authenticate the
IP-based phones with the value contained
within parameter ITP REGISTRATION:
PSWD within this same MMC.
B) ITP PSWD: System will authenticate the
IP-based phones according to entries
made in MMC 840.
c) DISABLE: System will not authenticate
IP-based phones at all.
SYS PSWD
2 ITP REGISTRATION
1 PSWD: This is a system-wide password value
used for registration of IP phones.
‘1234’
Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system.
0 PSWD: This is a system-wide password value
used for authentication of EasySet server.
‘1234’
3 EASYSET OPTION
1 ALIVE TIME: This is a EasySet link via LAN
alive check timer.
0 sec
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-385
(Continued)
No Option Description Default
Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system. 0 SMDR REPORT: Sets YES or NO for SMDR data
to CTI link via LAN.
NO
1 UCD REPORT: Sets YES or NO for UCD data to
CTI link via LAN.
NO
4 CTI LINK OPTION
2 ALIVE TIME: This is a CTI link via LAN alive
check timer. If this sets 0, the system will not
check link alive.
300 sec
Sets IP phone DSP parameter of system-wide. 0 M-FRAME: This value determines the
transmission interval time of VoIP packets
generated by the IP phone. This data uses
DOWN = SYS DATA case only on this MMC.
The range is 10~40 ms.
10 ms
1 JITTER: Decides the minimum time to consider
delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses
DOWN = SYS DATA case only on this MMC.
The range is 10~90 ms.
20 ms
2 TOS: An eight-bit binary value that will be
utilized by external routers, switches, etc(that
optionally support TOS-bit prioritization)-to
identify the transport-priority value of data
packets generated by the IP phone. This value
can be left at default value(00000) if your
network infrastructure does not support this
method of bandwidth management. This data
uses case only on this MMC.
all bits 0
5 ITP DSP PARA
3 DOWN: Determines data uses system-wide
data or each phone data for IP-based phone
DSP control.
a) SYS DATA: System-wide data will be
used.(MMC 841 data)
b) PHONE DATA: Each phone data will be
used.(MMC 840 data)
SYS DATA
6 ITP TX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset TX gain value of
each level. Defaults are followed but depend on
Country
-
7 ITP RX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset RX gain value of
each level. Defaults are followed but depend on
Country
-
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-386 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Option Description Default
8 ITP TX GAIN/MIC Sets IP-based phone MIC gain value of each level.
Defaults are followed but depend on Country
-
9 ITP RX GAIN/SPKR Sets IP-based phone SPKR gain value of each
level. Defaults are followed but depend on Country
-
Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with
the system.
-
0 TYPE: Sets IP-based phone software upgrade
type.
a) MMC COMMAND: IP-based phone
software upgrades manually in MMC 840.
b) PHONE CON: IP-based phone software
upgrades automatically at phone
connection.
c) AUTO TIME: IP-based phone software
upgrades automatically at set time.
MMC
COMMAND
1 START TIME: IP-based phone software
automatically upgrade start time.
0000.(Disable)
10 ITP VERS
UPGRADE
2 INTERVAL: IP-based phone software
automatically upgrade interval time.
10 sec
11 MGI ALIVE PERIOD Set the time interval of checking the link
connection of MGI card and the system.
-
13 LICENSE KEY Soft phone license key NONE
14 LICENSE STATUS SOFTP ALLOW
SOFTP USED
SOFTP CONN
NEWS ALLOW
0
0
0
NO
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-387
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 841.
Display shows the first available option.
PHONE VERSION
LARGE DGP: 0000
2) Enter option category number(0-14) via dial keypad.
OR
ITP REGISTRATION
TYPE: SYS PSWD
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter option number via dial keypad.
OR
ITP REGISTRATION
PSWD: 1234
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter option data.
OR
ITP REGISTRATION
PSWD: 8228
Press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-388 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[844] IP STATION TYPE
This MMC is used to assign the IP station type(DESKTOP PHONE or MOBILE PHONE).
In default, the first half of IP station is assigned to DESKTOP PHONE and the last half is
assigned to MOBILE PHONE. To install the certain type more than the default assigned
count, user must to change the IP station type in this MMC because the maximum capacity
of IP Phone is limited. To install ITP-5012L, ITP-5014D or ITP-5021D must be set to
DESKTOP Phone. And to install WIP-5000M must be set to MOBILE PHONE.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
[L] 001~120: DESKTOP PHONE, 121~240: MOBILE PHONE
[M] 001~060: DESKTOP PHONE, 061~120: MOBILE PHONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 844.
Display shows:
INDEX:001 [3201]
DESKTOP PHONE
2) Dial index number.(e.g., 121)
OR
INDEX:121 [3301]
MOBILE PHONE
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Dial 1 or 0 to select type.
(1: MOBILE PHONE, 0: DESKTOP PHONE)
INDEX:121 [3301]
DESKTOP PHONE
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-389
[845] WLAN PARAMETER
This MMC modifies the WLAN parameter.
Set the network configuration with the WLAN parameters, which are the SYSTEM ID,
the System KEY, and the WBS24 and SIP related with WLAN call.
The system KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a
terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but only when this value is modified to another
value, an electric power will be supplied to the WBS24, thus enabling the use of the
WLAN terminal, In addition, the System KEY serves as an identification ID when the
WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24.
The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must be modified to another value in
order to use a multiple system in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally
described in this menu.
Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask, and Gateway.
These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configuration setting is
essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for WBS24 should be selected. Currently
up to 14 frequencies may be selected.
Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) variables used for the WBS24(Basic) can be defined.
WLAN PARAMETER
No Parameter Description Default
00 SYSTEM ID ID used for distinguishing systems in wireless
environment. Different IDs must be assigned to
different systems.
WBS24
01 SYSTEM KEY Key used for registering terminals. Different values
must be assigned to each system.
00000
02 1st DNS IP First Domain Name Server(DNS) IP address 0.0.0.0
03 2nd DNS IP Second Domain Name Server(DNS) IP address 0.0.0.0
04 2nd WBS IP IP addresses of all WBSs of system used by
wireless terminal. Different IPs must be assigned
to each system.
168.208.144. 10
05 CODEC LIST It shows CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls
between WBS24 and terminal.(G.729)
CODEC 1: G.729
06 RF CHANNEL Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by
WBS.
USE CH 1: 01
USE CH 2: 06
USE CH 3: 11
USE CH 4: 00
USE CH 5: 00
USE CH 6: 00
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-390 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Parameter Description Default
07 VERSION WLAN module version. 08 TFTP SERVR WBS UPGRADE Server IP. 0.0.0.0
09 TFTP FILE WBS UPGRADE file name. WBS00000.TFP
18 WBS TX PWR TX POWER of entire WBSs. DEFAULT
19 CLR WBSREG Initializes registration data of all WBSs. NO
WBS PARAMETER
There are two types of WBSs, the COMBO AP and BASIC AP. A system cannot use both
types of WBSs at the same time. The AP type to be used can be set at Program 849.
Depending on the selected AP type, this program displays COMBO AP(CWBS), and
BASIC AP(BWBS).
When using COMBO AP
WBS24 COMBO is connected to a WLI card. Up to 3 WLI cards can be connected to
an L-system, and a single WLI card can be connected to a M-system.(A single WLI
card can connect up to 8 WBS24 COMBOs.)
When using BASIC AP
WBS24 BASIC is connected to the system through the network and requires an MGI
port to provide tone and call path connection.
No Parameter Description Default
0 IP ADDRESS WBS24 IP address for Ethernet. 0.0.0.0
1 GATEWAY Gateway address of the WBS24 Network. 0.0.0.0
2 NET MASK Netmask of the WBS24 Network. 255.255.255.0
3 MAC ADDR MAC address of WBS24 received to the system
when WBS24 is connected.
FFFF FFFF FFFF
4 VERSION WBS24 Software version. 5 STATUS Alive operation status. OFF
6 USE RF CH. RF channel No. used by each WBS24 . 1, 6, or 11
7 TX POWER TX POWER of each WBS. DEFAULT
8 LANGUAGE According to Languge, different date/day is
serviced(not yet implemented).
ENGLISH
9 TIMEZONE According to time zone, different time zone is
serviced(not yet implemented).
00:00
10 PARA CLR Initializes WBS registration data. NO
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-391
SIP PARAMETER
No Parameter Description
0 RE-TRANS T1 When using an unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP,
retransmission is required when no reply is received. RE-TRANS.
T1 TIME is the initial retransmission interval defined in RFC2543.
1 RE-TRANS T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC 2543
2 RE-TRANS T4 RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various purposes.
For example, this parameter can be used as the time waited by User
Agent Server(USA) after receiving ACK message in an unreliable
transmission protocol.
3 GEN RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the server cannot be
sure if the client has received the last reply.
Thus, the server must retransmit the reply for as long as this time until
it receives the requested retransmission. For example, this parameter
can be used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for INFO.
4 INV RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the client cannot
verify if the server has received the ACK returned to the server for the
INVITE Final Response. The client waits for as long as this time after
sending the ACK for the Final Response.
5 GEN NO RESP Waiting time until canceling SIP related Request.
6 INV NO RESP Waiting time until canceling SIP INVITE Request.
7 REQ RETRY Waiting time until receiving final response for SIP related Request.
8 PROVISIONAL On receiving Provision Response, the User Agent must wait for as
long as this time until Timeout.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 845. WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24
2) When the cursor is at WLAN, press UP or DOWN
and select WLAN, WBS, or SIP.
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24
3) Press Soft button and move to the SYSTEM ID.
When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID,
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24
press UP or DOWN key and select
the setting menu for WLAN.
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-392 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Set the items below at the WLAN menu.
SYSTEM ID: Use the Soft button to move the
cursor Enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24
register.
Press Soft button and proceed to next register status.
Register the SYSTEM KEY. WLAN: SYSTEM KEY
00000
Register the DNS server(first) IP. WLAN: 1ST DNS IP
0. 0. 0. 0
Register the DNS server(second) IP. WLAN: 2ND DNS IP
0. 0. 0. 0
Register the 2nd WBS IP. WLAN: 2ND WBS IP
0. 0. 0. 0
Select the voice codec. Select from the G711a,
G711u, and G729 CODEC.
WLAN: CODEC LIST
CODEC 1: G.711a
Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority.
Select the usable RF channel. Maximum 6 channels
can be used for a system.
WLAN: RF CHANNEL
USE CH 1: 01
(Default RF channel: 1, 6, 11)
Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS.
(Default: LEVEL 1~4)
WLAN: WBS TX PWR
DEFAULT
Used to clear registration information of all WBS. WLAN: CLR WBSREG
ARE YOU SURE?NO
5) Set the items below at the WBS24 menu The selected
WBS is according to the MMC 849 SELECT AP
TYPE(CWBS: COMBO WBS, BWBS: BASIC
WBS).
Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS. CWBS1: IP ADDR
0. 0. 0. 0
Register the WBS24 NET MASK. CWBS1: NET MASK
255.255.255. 0
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-393
Register the WBS24 GATEWAY. CWBS1: GATEWAY
0. 0. 0. 0
Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS. CWBS1 : MAC ADDR
FFFF FFFF FFFF
Displays the WBS24 VERSION. CWBS1 : VERSION
Displays the WBS24 STATUS. CWBS1 : STATUS
OFF
Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL(The WBS RF
channel must be selected among the preCWBS1 : RF CHAN
USE CH 1:01
assigned RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS
item).
Register the WBS24 TX POWER.
(Default: LEVEL 1~4)
CWBS1 : TX POWER
DEFAULT
Used to clear the WBS parameter. CWBS1 : PARA CLR
ARE YOU SURE?NO
6) Set the items below at the menu.
Register the RE-TRANS T1.
The initial re-transmission time if no answer
SIP : RE-TRANS T1
000500MS
based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 500 ms)
Register the RE-TRANS T2.
The maximum re-transmission time if no answer
SIP : RE-TRANS T2
004000MS
based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 4000 ms)
Register the RE-TRANS T4. The time the User Agent
Server waits after receiving the ACK message.
SIP : RE-TRANS T4
005000MS
Based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)
Register the GEN LING TM. The server shall
retransmit the response during this amount of
SIP : GEN LING TM
006000MS
time until the requested retransmission is received.
For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for
INFO.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 6000 ms)
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-394 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Register the INV RING TM. After the client sends
ACK for the INVITE Final Response,
SIP : INV RING TM
001000MS
the client cannot confirm if the server received the
ACK message. The client waits for this amount of
time after sending ACK for the Final Response.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 1000 ms)
Register the GEN NO RESP Before sending Cancel
for General Request, the User Agent shall
SIP : GEN NO RESP
005000MS
wait for this amount of time.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)
Register the INV NO RESP Before sending Cancel
for the Invite Request, the User Agent
SIP : INV NO RESP
006000MS
shall wait for this amount of time.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)
Register the REQ RETRY After sending General
Request, he User Agent shall wait for
SIP : REQ RETRY
005000MS
the Final Response for this amount of time
The range is 0-99900 ms Default is 5000 ms
Register the PROVISIONAL After receiving the
Provision Response, the User Agent shall
SIP : PROVISIONAL
180000MS
wait for this amount of time until Timeout ends
The range is 0-999900 ms. (Default: 180000 ms)
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-395
[846] WIP INFORMATION
This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal’s information.
No Parameter Description Default
00 REGISTERED Shows if the terminal is registered NO
01 LOCATED Shows if the terminal is connected to the system DETACH
02 PHONE TYPE Shows the type of the terminal 03 WLI NUMBER Number of WLI connected to the WBS24
servicing the terminal
-
04 WBS NUMBE Number of WBS24 servicing the terminal 05 IP OFFSET Location of IP pool of the terminal IP 06 IP ADDRESS Terminal IP address 0.0.0.0
07 MAC ADDR Terminal MAC address 0000 0000 0000
08 USER ID User ID per terminal 1212
09 PASSWORD Password of terminal user 0000
10 INSERT DGT If 5 or more numbers are entered into the WIP
terminal, this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the
numbers, supposing that the entered numbers
do not start with a C.O. number, C.O. group
number, LCR, network LCR, or function code
-
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 846. [3301] REGIETERED
NO
2) Dial the WIP number.
OR
[3301] REGIETERED
NO
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Set the items below at the menu.
Confirm the status of terminal register for each
phone number.
[3301] REGIETERED
NO
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-396 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Displays the location of the registered terminal. [3301] LOCATED
DETACH
Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered
terminal.
[3301] PHONE TYPE
Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered
terminal.(Currently, This is not used)
[3301] WLI NUMBER
Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered
terminal.
[3301] WBS NUMBER
Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal. [3301] IP OFFSET
Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered
terminal.
[3301] IP ADDRESS
Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered
terminal.
[3301] MAC ADDR
Register the USER ID of terminal. [3301] USER ID
1212
Register the PASSWORD of terminal. [3301] PASSWORD
0000
Register the INSERT DGT of terminal.
(These digits will be automatically inserted in
[3301] INSERT DGT
_
front of user dialling digits when the count of user
dialling digit is exceed 4 and it does not start with
the TRK access code and FEATURE code)
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-397
[847] WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
This MMC is used for rebooting the WBS24 all or independently. This MMC is also used
for initializing the WLI card.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button, and enter 847. RESET :WLI :1
RESET NOW ? NO
2) Select the item number.(0: RESET, 1: STATUS)
OR
RESET :WLI :1
RESET NOW ? NO
Press Volume button to select item number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Select the card type.(WLI or WBS) RESET :WLI :1
RESET NOW ? NO
4) Select the card number. If you press [ANS/RLS]
button, all WLI(or All WBS) will be selected.
RESET :WLI :2
RESET NOW ? NO
5) Press Soft button, or press [1] to select YES,
and the WBS will be initialized.
RESET :WLI :2
RESET NOW ? NO
6) To verify the STATUS of WLI or WBS, select 1
to step 2.
STATUS: WLI
C1S1 OFF OFF
STATUS: CWBS:01
Y N N N N N N N
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-398 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST
This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating a new
IP list. This IP Address is automatically assigned to WIP-5000M during new registration
procedure. If the IP Address is assigned already, the assigned terminal number will be
shown in the USED field.
Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the data terminal in order to use the
wireless LAN.(Not implemented yet)
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button, and enter 848. IP:001 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0
2) Select the menu.(0: IP LIST, 1: MAC LIST) IP:001 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0
3) Select the table number. IP:001 USED:
_ 0. 0. 0. 0
4) Enter the IP ADDRESS. IP:001 USED:
168. 0. 0. 0
5) Numbers next to USED indicates the terminal
number from which the IP ADDRESS was
IP:001 USED:3301
168.219.149. 5
assigned.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-399
[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION
This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration.
Parameter Description
REGISTER VoWLAN Enable or disable the register of new WIP-500M mobile phone.
WIP REGIST CLEAR Used to clear the registration of WIP. The FORCED mode clearing is used
when the device is not connected normally(ex: device broken) and the
NORMAL mode clearing can be used in normal cases.
WBS WEP SERVICE Enable or disable the WEP(Wired Equivalent Privacy) feature
WEP KEY Assign the WEP key(13 characters only)
STATIC WBS IP Select the use of Static WBS IP
STATIC WIP IP Select the use of Static WIP IP
SELECT AP TYPE Select the AP type of the system. Combo AP and Basic AP cannot be
used in simultaneously. After change the AP type, the system must
be restarted.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
REGISTER VoWLAN: DISABLE
WIP REGIST CLEAR: DISABLE
WBS WEP SERVICE: DISABLE
WEP KEY: None
STATIC WBS IP: DISABLE
STATIC WIP IP: DISABLE
SELECT AP TYPE: BASIC AP(DEPEND ON COUNTRY)
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button, and press 849. ENTER PASSWORD
_
2) Enter the PASSCODE to activate the register.
(This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202
ENTER PASSCODE
****
WLAN REGST)
3) Select ENABLE to register the terminal to the
REGISTER WLAN.
REGISTER VoWLAN
DISABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-400 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
4) Select the WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the register
status for each terminal.
WIP REGIST CLEAR
3301:FORCED
5) Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION is
selected.
WBS WEP SERVICE
DISABLE
6) Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP
SERVICE is enabled.(13 characters only)
WEP KEY
7) Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP. STATIC WBS IP
DISABLE
8) Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP. STATIC WIP IP
DISABLE
9) Select AP TYPE of the system. If you change the AP
type, the system must be restarted.
SELECT AP TYPE
COMBO AP
SELECT AP TYPE
RESET SYSTEM?NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-401
[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY
This MMC is only used for system resource display. This is displayed the used resources
and the free resources. This is a read only MMC.
0. DTMFR DSP’S
1. CID DSP’S
2. R2MFC DSP’S
3. CONF GROUP’S
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 850.
Display shows:
DTMFR DSP’S
USE:000 FREE:012
2) Enter the option number(0-3).
OR
CID DSP’S
USE:000 FREE:014
Press Volume button to select.
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-402 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[851] ALARM REPORTING
This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. There are two levels of
faults displayed via alarm code, major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are
usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor
alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not
seriously degrade the systems operating capabilities. The alarm buffer will hold up to 100
alarms on a first in-first out(FIFO) basis. Alarms will provide a date and time stamp based
on the system time. If applicable the hardware cabinet, port, and/or slot will be displayed.
If an ALARM SIO port is programmed(MMC 804) alarm information can be printed on
demand and also prints as alarm information is provided.
ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS(Select one of the options)
No Option Description
0 VIEW ALARM View alarm buffer.
1 OVERFLOW
CONTROL
Determines buffer control when buffer is full.
0 OVERWRITTEN: When buffer is full, the oldest entry in
buffer overwritten.(Default)
1 STOP RECORDING: When buffer is full, stop recording
alarms.
3 CLEAR ALARM BUF Clears alarm buffer.
4 PRINT ALARM BUF Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port.
Alarm Code Definition
See Alarm Code Definition on MMC 852.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-403
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 851.
Display shows:
SYS ALARM REPORT
VIEW ALARMS
2) Enter desired option.
OR
SYS ALARM REPORT
VIEW ALARMS
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) System displays the alarm count number, date and
time stamp.(uses station, configuration for
[00] 02/18 14:30
MNF02 C1-S02
display format, date, time will be 24 hour format)
Alarm type and cause code will display.
4) Press Volume button arrows to scroll through
other alarms.
SYS ALARM REPORT
VIEW ALARMS
OR
Press Right Soft button to return step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-404 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display the alarms on
stations that have the Alarm Key assigned. The System Alarm Key is programmed in
Station Key Assignments(MMC 722). System Alarm key programming is tenant
wide(tenant 1 and 2). Alarms not programmed to report to the System Alarm key will still
be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting(MMC 851). The alarm
buffer will hold up to 100 alarms on a First In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Pressing the System
Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is generated by the system.
Alarm conditions that have multiple causes e.g., PRI errors and synchronization loss will
print all associated alarm information if an SIO port is programmed as an ALARM port.
The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via MMC 851 System Alarm Reporting.
Alarm Notification
Alarm Notification Off/On(0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and
audible notification to the System Alarm key station(s). Pressing the System
Alarm key and the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station
that pressed the System Alarm key and the release key. See alarm displays table
for assignments.
Alarm Code Definition:
No Code Alarm Name Definition
- MJA-- MCP2 Error System Fault
01 MJA01 POR Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed via power on
restart(POR).
02 MJA02 Soft Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed via button reset.
03 MJA03 MEM Reset The system RAM has been cleared via manual programming
(PCMMC or KMMC) resulting in a system reset.
04 MJA04 MCP Reset The MCP2 has S/W exception error.
Alarm data = Reason
- BUS ERR: Restart Bus Error
- ADDR.ERR: Restart Address Error
- ILLEGAL: Restart Illegal opcode
- ZERO DIVID: Restart Zero divide
- PRIVILEGE: Restart Privilege Violation
- ENDL LOOP: Restart Endless Loop
05 MJA05 LCP Reset The SCP2 or LCP2 has reset
Alarm data = Cabinet(1, 2 or 3)
06 MJA06 PCM Switching A fault has occurred in the Switching Control
Alarm data = MCP BASE, ESM: 1, ESM: 2 or ESM: 3
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-405
(Continued)
No Code Alarm Name Definition
- MJB-- LCP/TASK Error LCP or TASK Fault
10 MJB01 HDLC Com Error Communications to LCP lost or faulty.
11 MJB02 Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the MCP2.
12 MJB03 Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the
cabinet 1 SCP2.
13 MJB04 Memory Alarm 3 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the
cabinet 2 LCP2.
14 MJB05 Memory Alarm 4 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the
cabinet 3 LCP2.
15 MJB06 IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm data = IPC Queue type
(MCP-LAN, MCP-SCP, MCP-LCP1, MCP-LCP2)
16 MJB07 Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm data = Error Task
- MJC-- DSP Error System DSP Fault
17 MJC01 DTMF Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system
DTMF resources.
Alarm data = DTMF Receiver DSP position
18 MJC02 Tone Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system
tone resources.
Alarm data = TONE Receiver DSP position.
26 MJC10 AA-DTMF Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card
DTMF resources.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
27 MJC11 AA-MFR Rec An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card
DTMF resources has recovered.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
28 MJC12 E911 Restart The E911 card has restarted.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
29 MJC13 E911 Block The E911 card has blocked because the system
detects the card does not work correctly.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
32 MJC16 WLI Restart The WLI card has restarted.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
33 MJC17 WLI Block The WLI card has blocked because the system
detects the card does not work correctly.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-406 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Code Alarm Name Definition
- MJD-- DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault
34 MJD01 Sync Failure Clocking on TEPRI cards has become asynchronous.
35 MJD02 Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI cards has become synchronous.
36 MJD03 Red Alarm Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI card for
more than 250 ms.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
37 MJD04 Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI cards.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
38 MJD05 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on
TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
39 MJD06 Yellow Alarm
Rec
Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on
TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
40 MJD07 Blue Alarm All one's being transmitted on facility on TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
41 MJD08 Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
42 MJD09 Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the when error rate exceeds 1x10-6
errors. Note: 1x10-6 is threshold for minor alarm, 1 x 10-3 is
threshold for major alarm errors on E1,PRI or BRI.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
43 MJD10 NTWRK Event An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI
Network digital line. Protocols do not match or
subscriber ID mismatch.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot Cx-Syy)
44 MJD11 SPID Init Error The BRI received an error from the network
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
45 MJD12 SPID Init Rec The BRI has recovered from an error on the network
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
46 MJD13 LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
47 MJD14 LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test passed.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
48 MJD15 BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
49 MJD16 BRI DL Recovery A BRI data link is back in service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
50 MJD17 RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI card RAM.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-407
(Continued)
No Code Alarm Name Definition
- MJD-- DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault
51 MJD18 E1 Restart The E1 card has restarted
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
52 MJD19 PRI Restart The PRI card has restarted
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
53 MJD20 BRI Restart The BRI card has restarted
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
54 MJD21 PCM Loss Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
55 MJD22 PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
- MJE-- MGI Error MGI card Fault
56 MJE01 MGI Restart The MGI card has restarted
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
57 MJE02 MGI Stop The MGI card has stoped
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
58 MJE03 MGI IP Duplicate The MGI card IP address is duplicated
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
59 MJE04 MGI NTWK Error The MGI card has blocked because the system detects
the card doesn’t response via network link.
External ping test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
60 MJE05 MGI NTWK Rec The MGI card has restarted because the system detects
the card does response via network link.
External ping test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
61 MJE06 MGI DSP Error The MGI card DSP has blocked because the system
detects the card DSP runs not correctly.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
62 MJE07 MGI DSP Run The MGI card DSP has restarted because the system
detects the card DSP runs correctly.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
63 MJE08 WBS Disconnect Indicates the WBS is disconnected.
Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx
64 MJE09 WBS connect Indicates the WBS is connected.
Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-408 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Code Alarm Name Definition
- MNF-- Minor Error Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving
65 MNF01 Card Out A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been
removed from service or is not recognized by the system
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
66 MNF02 Card In A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been
returned to service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
67 MNF03 IPC Error Inter processor communication error has occurred.
Alarm Data = Cabinet-Slot(Cx-Syy)
68 MNF04 Trunk Fault Out of service trunk detected via loop detect. Internal
CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
69 MNF05 Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of
service is now operational.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
70 MNF06 Trunk
Disconnect
Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk.
External seizure test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
71 MNF07 Trunk Connect Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk
External seizure test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
72 MNF08 SIO TxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
73 MNF09 SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
74 MNF10 E1 Out Of Srv E1 Digital line status has been changed to out of
service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
75 MNF11 E1 In Service E1 Digital line has been restored to normal service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
76 MNF12 SIO Out IO port has lost DTR
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
77 MNF13 SIO In IO port has regained DTR.
Alarm Data = SIO 1 through 6
78 MNF14 TODC Error Time of Day Clock in the MCP2 has erred.
79 MNF15 TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of
available time slots. Maximum 192 per cabinet.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
80 MNF16 PSU Alarm Indicates there are over 56 ports in a cabinet with a
single PSU and more power is required.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-409
(Continued)
No Code Alarm Name Definition
81 MNF17 PSU Alarm Rec A second PSU has been recognized when added after
alarm condition of
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
82 MNF18 SLI Fault An SLI card has been detected as out of service via an
internal CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
83 MNF19 SLI Recovery An SLI card detected as out of service has been
detected as recovered and is in service via internal
CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
84 MNF20 PSUB Alarm Indicates there are over 120 ports in a cabinet with two
PSU.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
85 MNF21 DSS Alarm System capacity of 64 button DSS modules has been
exceeded.
86 MNF26 SIO RxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
87 MNF27 SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
88 MNF28 LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)
89 MNF29 LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)
90 MNF30 SPNet Link Error SPNet Link Connection Error
Alarm Data = MMC 0 LINK ID INDEX Number
91 MNF31 SPNet Send
Error
SPNet Message sending Error
Alarm Data = xx:yyyy:zz
xx: SPNet TRK INDEX, yyyy:SPNet TRK number,
zz: MMC820 LINK ID INDEX number
MNG-- Minor Error Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving
92 MNG01 Phone
Disconnect
Indicates the Phone is disconnected.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
93 MNG02 Phone Connect Indicates the Phone is connected.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
94 MNG03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates the Extension is Off Hook Alarm time over.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
95 MNG04 On Hook Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
96 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more
than 10 %.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-410 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(Continued)
No Code Alarm Name Definition
97 MNG06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more
than 500 ms.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 852.
Display shows:
01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
POR Restart
2) Enter desired Alarm Display number.(e.g., 64)
OR
64:MNF01 ACT:OFF
Card Out
Press Volume buttons to select desired
option and press Right Soft button and to
advance the cursor.
3) To select if the alarm is active press 1 for
YES and 0 for NO.
64:MNF01 ACT:ON
Card Out
An entry will advance the cursor to return to
step 2.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection
and press Right Soft button to save and
return step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 722 STATION KEY ASSIGNMENT
MMC 723 SYSTEM WIDE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 851 SYSTEM ALARM REPORTING
MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-411
[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY
This MMC is used to place stations, trunks, and common resources equipment in a
maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problem
equipment. Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when
called. The calling stations display(if equipped) will show ‘MADE BUSY’ when called.
Stations receiving DID or E & M type calls will receive a DND/No more calls tone.
The station display will still function with station and date.
When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a locked all station. Trunks made
busy can not originate calls. Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed
destination. Common resource equipment such as DSP’s, CID DSP’s and miscellaneous
equipment such as page ports, AA ports or voice mail card ports can also be placed in a
maintenance busy state.
MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS
No Option Description
0 TRK Trunks
1 STN Stations
2 PAGE Page Ports
3 AA Auto Attendant card ports
4 DTMFR DTMF Receiver(4/DSP)
5 CID CID Receiver(14/DSP)
6 R2MFC R2MFC Receiver(8/DSP)
7 CONF GRP #01-24
8 MGI MGI ports
DTMFR/CID/R2MFC DSP
Cases of DTMFR, CID or R2MFC DSP selection when DSP is not mounted
display will show NONE. If mounted display will show IDLE by default.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL IDLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-412 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 853.
Display shows busy functions:
MAINTENANCE BUSY
TRK :NONE
2) Enter busy function type(0-8) via dial keypad.
OR
MAINTENANCE BUSY
STN :NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter station number.
OR
MAINTENANCE BUSY
STN :201 IDLE
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle.
OR
MAINTENANCE BUSY
STN :201 BUSY
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-413
[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME
Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time. The system diagnostics tests include memory
audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks, DSP, AA DSP tests. Additional tests
include CODEC tests on analog trunk and station cards and tone tests. If the diagnostics
cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the system will abort the test and retry
during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is recommended to assign the diagnostic
time during non-peak traffic periods.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 854.
Display shows:
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN: :
2) Enter weekday number.
(0: Sun, 1: Mon, …, 6: Sat)
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN:_ :
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter military time hour via the dial pad.
Cursor will advance to next entry.
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN:23:_
4) Enter military time minutes via the dial pad.
Data saved and cursor will advance to step 2.
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN:23:30
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-414 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[855] SYSTEM OPTIONS
This MMC provides a means to review the common use hardware that is mounted in the
system. System Options show miscellaneous hardware and daughter boards. This enables
the technician to review the available hardware without having to dismantle or power down
the system to confirm if the hardware is mounted.
This is a READ ONLY MMC.
SYSTEM OPTIONS

Option Description
MCP D-BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board #1 of MCP
MCP D-BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board #2 of MCP
MCP D-BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board #3 of MCP
MCP SW Shows the DIP S/W status of MCP
C1 POWER-B Shows the second power exist of Cabinet #1
SCP D-BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board #1 of SCP
SCP D-BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board #2 of SCP
SCP D-BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board #3 of SCP
LCP1 ONLINE Shows the connection status of Cabinet #2 LCP
C2 POWER-B Shows the second power exist of Cabinet #2
LCP1 D-BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board #1 of Cabinet #2 LCP
LCP1 D-BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board #2 of Cabinet #2 LCP
LCP1 D-BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board #3 of Cabinet #2 LCP
LCP2 ONLINE Shows the connection status of Cabinet #3 LCP
C3 POWER-B Shows the second power exist of Cabinet #3
LCP2 D-BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board #1 of Cabinet #3 LCP
LCP2 D-BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board #2 of Cabinet #3 LCP
LCP2 D-BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board #3 of Cabinet #3 LCP
CxSy VPM Shows the VPM board status of Voice Mail Card.
CxSy SW Shows the DIP S/W status of TEPRI card.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-415

Option Description
MCP D-BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board #1 of MCP
MCP D-BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board #2 of MCP
MCP D-BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board #3 of MCP
MCP SW Shows the DIP S/W status of MCP
C1 POWER-B Shows the second power exist of Cabinet #1
CxSy VPM Shows the VPM board status of Voice Mail Card.
CxSy SW Shows the DIP S/W status of TEPRI card.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 855.
Display shows:
SYSTEM OPTIONS
MCP D-BD 1 :ESM
2) Press Volume button to view options. SYSTEM OPTIONS
MCP D-BD 2 :IPM
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-416 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that technician
programming was accessed. This will allow a technician to determine if there was
unauthorized access to system programming and where this access occurred.
The information stored in this log will consist of 2 elements, the date and time it occurred
at and the access location.
There are 4 types of access location information as described below:
Type Description
NNNN This would be the extension number of a phone that had accessed programming directly.
MODEM This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via the integrated
V90 modem attached to the IOM board of main cabinet.
LAN This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN
connection on the MCP2 card of main cabinet.
SIOx This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via one of the SIO
connections on the IOM board of the main cabinet where x is the number(2 or 3) of
the SIO port that was used.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 856.
Display shows:
(1) 11/22 11:03
201 :11/22 11:27
2) Enter index number.(e.g., 3)
OR
(3) 11/22 12:30
203 :11/22 13:30
Press Volume button to scroll.
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-417
[858] ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM
Assigns the alarm for alarm information to send Remote M&A PC via LAN.
Alarm Code Definition
See Alarm Code Definition on MMC 852
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
All OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 858.
Display shows:
01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
POR Restart
2) Enter the alarm entry number.
OR
02:MJA02 ACT:OFF
Soft Restart
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter YES or NO(1, 0) for alarming.
OR
02:MJA02 ACT:ON
Soft Restart
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 2.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-418 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY
This MMC is only used for system H/W EPLD version display. This is a READ ONLY
MMC.

No Option Description
00 MCP2 CARD Shows the EPLD version of MCP2
01 MCP2 B1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #1 of MCP2
02 MCP2 B2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #2 of MCP2
03 MCP2 B3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #3 of MCP2
04 C1 M-BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of Cabinet #1
05 C1 SCP2 CARD Shows the EPLD version of SCP2 card
06 C1 SCP1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #1 of SCP
07 C1 SCP2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #2 of SCP
08 C1 SCP3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #3 of SCP
09 C2 M-BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of Cabinet #2
10 C2 LCP2 CARD Shows the EPLD version of Cabinet #2 LCP2 card
11 C2 LCP1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #1 of Cabinet #2 LCP
12 C2 LCP2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #2 of Cabinet #2 LCP
13 C2 LCP3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #3 of Cabinet #2 LCP
14 C3 M-BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of Cabinet #3
15 C3 LCP2 CARD Shows the EPLD version of Cabinet #3 LCP2 card
16 C3 LCP1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #1 of Cabinet #3 LCP
17 C3 LCP2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #2 of Cabinet #3 LCP
18 C3 LCP3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #3 of Cabinet #3 LCP

No Option Description
0 C1 M-BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of Cabinet #1
1 MCP2 CARD Shows the EPLD version of MCP2
2 MCP2 B1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #1 of MCP2
3 MCP2 B2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #2 of MCP2
4 MCP2 B3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #3 of MCP2
CONDITIONS
NONE
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-419
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 859.
Display shows:
H/W EPLD VERSION
MCP CARD :V01
2) Enter the option number.
OR
H/W EPLD VERSION
MCP B3 :LAN :V05
Press Volume button to scroll.
3) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-420 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
[860] UCD STATUS SERVICE
This MMC is set to send the information of the UCD queue status or UCD Agent status to
the SIO port real time.
CONDITIONS
To use this information, a special PC application is needed.
DEFAULT DATA
UCD VIEW SERVICE: DISABLE
SENT AGENT STATE: NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 860.
Display shows:
UCD VIEW SERVICE
DISABLE
2) Enter the number.
(0. UCD view service, 1. Send Agent state)
SEND AGENT STATE
YES
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter YES or NO.(1, 0)
OR
SEND AGENT STATE
NO
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to store.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 804 SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-421
[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS
This MMC is set to system miscellaneous options.
No Option Description
0 AUTO UPDATE TIME Sets enable(1) or disable(0) the system automatically time and
date update form ISDN call connection message. If sets enable,
when system receives ISDN call connection message, system
checks valid data of encapsulated time and date, and update
system time and date device.
1 SYSTEM SPPED BIN Sets max 500(0) or max 950(1) the maximum number of system
speed dial bin. If sets 500 then same in previous system.
If sets 950, can assign system speed dial block is up to 950 bins
and speed dial bin numbers always 3 digits(000 to 999).
Even if station speed dial bin numbers are 3 digits(000 to 049).
2 IDLE WHEN
ENBLOCK
Decides the state of Large LCD phone treated as idle or busy
when the user of Large LCD phone is dialling in ENBLOCK mode.
3 2 LINE ENBLOCK Decides the usage of ENBLOCK mode for 2 line LCD phone with
navigation buttons
4 2 ZONE EXT PAGE Decides whether 2 Zone external paging is enable or not.
5 USE LB FOR PAGE Decides whether LB port of MISC card used as ROP port or not.
6 LP TRK TONE DISC When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by
detecting busy tone.
7 USE WLAN
FEATURE
Before V2.40, this option must be set to enable to see a WLAN
related MMC. After V2.40, all WLAN related MMC is seen by
default.
9 ISDN SS FEATURE Decides whether ISDN SS(Supplement Service) used or not.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
AUTO UPDATE TIME: DISABLE
SYSTEM SPEED BIN: MAX 500
IDLE WHEN ENBLOCK: DISABLE
2 LINE ENBLOCK: DISABLE
2 ZONE EXT PAGE: DISABLE
USE LB FOR PAGE: MISC1[NONE]:LB
LP TRK TONE DISC: DISABLE
USE WLAN FEATUE: DISABLE(Only below v2.40)
ISDN SS FEATURE: DISABLE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-422 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 861.
Display shows:
AUTO UPDATE TIME
DISABLE
2) Enter the option number.
OR
AUTO UPDATE TIME
DISABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter 1 or 0 for option data select.
OR
AUTO UPDATE TIME
ENABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC 505 ASSIGN TIME AND DATE
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED DIAL BLOCK
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 705 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-423
[890] INITIALIZE PORT
This program allows you to initialize items related to call process or DB for specific station
or Trunk line. This will return the port to default condition.
CONDITIONS
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
VOLUME Used to scroll through system alarms.
KEYPAD Used to enter selections
SOFT BUTTONS Enter/leave option
SPEAKER Used to store data and move to next MMC
TRANSFER Enter/exit MMC
ACTION DISPLAY
1) Press Transfer button and enter 890.
Display shows:
[201] CALL CLEAR
ARE YOU SURE?NO
2) Enter the station or Trunk line.
OR
[202] CALL CLEAR
ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialize port.
OR
[202] DB INITIAL
ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
[202] DB INITIAL
ARE YOU SURE?YES
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to save and return step 2.
5) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
2-424 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
This page is intentionally left blank.
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. A-1
ANNEX A. Abbreviation
A
AME Answer Machine Emulation
AOM Add On Module
AP Access Point
B
BRI Basic Rate Interface
C
CCBS Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
CCNR Cell Completion on No Reply
CID Caller Identification
CLI Call Line Identification
COM Communication
COS Class Of Service
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code
CR Mode Constant Resistance Mode
CTI Computer Telephony Integration
D
DID Direct Inward Dialling
DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications
DGP Digital Phone
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DLI Digital Line Interface
DND Do Not Disturb
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
G
GK Gatekeeper
ANNEX A. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
A-2 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
I
ID Identification
IDS Intrusion Detection System
IP Internet Protocol
IPC Inter Processor Communication
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
K
KDB Keyset Daughter Board
L
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCP Local Control Processor
LED Light Emitting Diode
M
MCP Main Control Processor
MGI Media Gateway Interface
MISC Miscellaneous
MMC Man Machine Communication
MOH Music On Hold
MWSLI Message Waiting Single Line Interface
N
NAT Network Address Translation
P
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PCMMC PC based Man Machine Communication
PRI Primary Rate Interface
PRS Polarity Reverse Signal
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
Q
Q-SIG Q-Signaling
OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. A-3
R
RTCP Real-time Transmission Control Protocol
RTP Real-time Transmission Protocol
S
SCP Signal Control Processor
SIO Serial Input/Output
SIP Session Initiation Protocol
SLI Single Line Interface
SLT Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recording
SVMi Samsung Voice Mail integrated
T
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TEPRI T1E1PRI
TRK Trunk
U
UA User Agent
UCD Uniform Call Distribution
UDP User Datagram Protocol
V
VDIAL Voice Dial
VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol
VPN Virtual Private Network
W
WBS Wireless Base Station
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
WLI Wireless Local Area Network Interface
ANNEX A. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.
A-4 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
This page is intentionally left blank.
OfficeServ 500
Programming Guide
©2005 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Information in this guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics
Co., Ltd.
No information contained here may be copied, translated,
transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written
consent of SAMSUNG.
Information in this guide is subject to change without notice.

Online Document Converter

This website help webmasters to achieve a better user experience. Instead of putting a link to download their prices lists and another type of documents, you can simply send a special link to this service, and we will show your document to your users directly without the need of downloading a special application or installing another browsers plugin. Currently, we can read about hundred the most used database files. Moreover, your users can share this document directly on social networks, giving your document additional page views. By using this service, you can save costs by not overloading your own web server, give your users a better way to read documents online without any problems, and allow them to easily download converted copy for offline reading in a format they like.


Previous 10

Next 10